Docstoc

Enhancement Package

Document Sample
Enhancement Package Powered By Docstoc
					SAP Enhancement Package 4 for
SAP ERP
Cross Industry Enhancements




Suite Solution Management SAP ERP
SAP AG
Version 1.1
Index




  Introduction and Overview                          6. Procurement and Logistics Execution
  1. Analytics                                              6.1 Procurement
                                                            6.2 Inbound and Outbound Logistics
          1.1 Financial Analytics
                                                            6.3 Inventory and Warehouse Management
          1.2 Strategic Enterprise Management
  2. Financials                                      7. Product Development and Manufacturing
          2.1    Financial Supply Chain Management          7.1   Life-cycle Data Management
                                                            7.2   Manufacturing Execution
          2.2    Corporate Governance
                                                            7.3   Product Development
          2.3    Financial Accounting
                                                            7.4   Production Planning
          2.4    Treasury
                                                            7.5   General
  3. Human Capital Management
          3.1 Talent Management
                                                     8. Sales and Service
                                                            8.1 General
          3.2 Workforce Process Management
          3.4 General                                       8.2 Sales Order Management
                                                     9. Cross SAP ERP
  4. End-user Service Delivery
  5. Corporate Services
          5.1    Enterprise Asset Management
          5.2    Project and Portfolio Management
          5.3    Quality Management
          5.4    Real Estate Management
          5.5    Travel Management
Legal Disclaimer


                   This presentation is not subject to your license
                   agreement or any other agreement with SAP. SAP
                   has no obligation to pursue any course of
                   business outlined in this presentation or to
                   develop or release any functionality mentioned in
                   this presentation. This presentation and SAP's
                   strategy and possible future developments are
                   subject to change and may be changed by SAP at
                   any time for any reason without notice. This
                   document is provided without a warranty of any
                   kind, either express or implied, including but not
                   limited to, the implied warranties of
                   merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose, or
                   non-infringement. SAP assumes no responsibility
                   for errors or omissions in this document, except if
                   such damages were caused by SAP intentionally
                   or grossly negligent.
Structure of this document


Navigation Index:                       Solution area/Industry               Business Function                    Feature description:
Use this sheet as main navigation       Overview:                            Summary:                             These sheets describe the features
to get fast to the area and slides of   This kind of sheets summarize the    These sheets summarize all the       in a process environment. Just
your interest                           enhancement for a industry or SAP    features delivered with this         new features are described on that
                                        ERP solution area. The rows on in    business function. Each row in the   way.
                                        the table of these slides describe   table describes one feature
                                        the several business functions




                                                   e..g. Financials                         BF xy




                                                                                            BF xy                              Feature xy




                                                                                           ….
                                                                                            BF xy                              Feature xy




                                                                                                                                 ….
                                                                                                                               Feature xy
How to navigate
(please use slide show modus)


              This buttons navigate you to the relevant information one detail level
              deeper – Navigation Index  Cross industry Solution Area 
              Business function  Feature
              This button in the lower right corner on each slide navigates you
              quickly one detail level higher or to the navigation index to jump fast
              into another area of interest



              The text in the upper left corner gives you orientation to which solution
              area this business function and/or feature belongs to
Facing the Challenge
Companies Want Stability AND Innovation



                                          The answer:
 INNOVATION
                                          SAP enhancement packages
    Easy introduction of new
     processes                            Business Driven Enhancements by CHOICE:
                                             Flexibility to implement new and enhanced
    Fast, tailored support of
                                              processes and scenarios
     processes, when required
                                             Switch framework provides the flexibility to
    Support new user groups                  activate only the needed functionality
                                             Support packages contain only corrections
                                              and legal changes



 STABILITY
    Stay compliant
    Support core processes
    Use a stable technology platform
    Standardized maintenance
     schedule
Quick Facts
Installation of new functionality separated from activation via Switch Framework




                         Preamble
                         SAP enhancement packages are shipped as a delta shipment to SAP ERP 6.0
Optional
                         Selective Installation
                            Each SAP enhancement package contains
                             new versions of existing software components
                            You only update software components, which
 Enhancement                 are related to the functionality you want to use.              Selective Update - Example
  Packages                  After installation:
                                  No UI or process change until a Business Function is activated
                                  However SAP enhancement packages require defined ERP Support Package Stack

                         Selective Activation
                            New functionality must be explicitly switched on
                             to become active in the system.
                            If activated:
 Support
                                  Changes are predictable, only well described changes in the activated areas.
 Packages
                                  Testing is simplified with templates, provided for every Business Function
  Mandatory
Mandatory
SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP
Roadmap



              SAP ENHANCEMENT PACKAGES FOR SAP ERP


              EHP1          EHP2           EHP3            EHP4
            Delivered     Delivered      Delivered        Planned for
                                                         Q4/2008



        We follow our roadmaps and keep promises
           First three generations of SAP enhancement packages for SAP
            ERP delivered and adopted in the market
           Proven by the high number of 450+ live customers and
            1800+ downloads
News:
SAP Enhancement Package 4 For SAP ERP




     Coming in Q4/2008:
     Improved fourth generation of SAP
     Enhancement Packages
           Including the latest software innovations:
                 UI simplifications, Enterprise services
                 Functional enhancements
                 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP
                  NetWeaver
           Cumulative in nature:
            SAP enhancement package 4 contains
            all functionalities of previous SAP
            enhancement packages
New With SAP Enhancement Package 4 for
SAP ERP: SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP NetWeaver

           Improvement                                   Benefits




                  EHP    EHP
            EHP


            SAP ERP 6.0

            EHP   EHP

          SAP NetWeaver 7.0
    BUSINESS SUITE - Stable Core
                                             Clear separation of new functionality
   EHP 4 components for SAP ECC              in enhancement packages and
    Server 6.0 always require SAP             corrections in support packages
    enhancement package 1 for SAP            Reduced effort for testing and no end-
    NetWeaver 7.0                             user training required when applying
   Optional deployment of SAP enhance-       support packages
    ment package 1 for SAP NetWeaver         Adding new functionality predictable
    7.0 usage types, e.g. Portal              and controllable
At-A-Glance: SAP Enhancement Package 4
SAP ERP – Cross Industry Enhancements

Financials                                       Sales and Service                        HCM
   Treasury & Risk Management                    End-to-end support for supplier and       Talent Management:
      Exposure & Hedge Mgmt for Commodities       customer returns                             New capabilities for E-Recruiting
       and FX                                     Sales order entry via CRM                    Performance Management: UI,
      Correspondence monitor with                Incentive and commission management           Functionality and Integration
       automatic matching                                                                       Enhanced Compensation Management
      IFRS 7 Reporting                                                                         Integrated Talent Management Processes
   Master Data Governance: Central                                                              (incl. Nakisa)
    Maintenance for Chart of Accounts                                                           Enriched learning solution
   Financial Supply Chain Management                                                        HCM processes & forms for
      New enterprise services and new web UIs                                                mass processes
      Collections Management: Support of                                                    Concurrent Employment Management
       several backends and collections                                                      Additional HCM – Localizations
       from subsidiaries                                                                     Employee Interaction Center
   Financial accounting and
    New General Ledger                                                                    Product Development
   Information Life Cycle Management for Tax                                             and Manufacturing
    Auditing
   Simplified Reporting and Power Lists                                                     Outsourced manufacturing scenario:
                                                                                              Work order integration
                                                                                             Product Life Cycle Management –
Corporate Services                                                                            new functions, UI and integration to iPPE
                                                                                             Manufacturing Execution
   Enterprise Asset Management                                                               (Configurable dashboard and more)
   New standard solution for Recycling          Procurement                                 Flexible and adaptive manufacturing
    Administration (REA)                                                                      processes with order-split functionality
   Project Management – Handling                 New Scenario for Service Procurement      Cross systems tracking of all batch
    large projects                                Sourcing Capabilities                      related objects
   Real Estate Management                        Enhanced MM-FI Integration                Integration to SAP LPO
   New capabilities for Travel Management        Supplier Managed Inventory (SMI) and      Extended Warehouse Management
   Quality Management – Q-Notifications           Vendor Managed Inventory (VMI)             integration with Kanban and
   Cross SAP ERP: Coverage of all common                                                     repetitive manufacturing
    business cases with PDF-Based Forms                Highlights
Bundles of Enterprise Services
Shipments in 2008 – Overview Core and Cross-Industry

Financials                                                                Sales and Service                                                      Logistics
   Bank Communication Management                                            Order to Cash (updated)                                             Outsourced Manufacturing (updated)
    (updated)                                                                Customer Service Execution (updated)                                Supplier Collaboration for the Supply Chain
   Credit Management (updated)                                              ATP Check (updated)                                                  (updated)
   Dispute Management                                                       Availability Issue Resolution and                                   Cross-Industry RFID Enabled Core Logistics
   Electronic Bill Presentment and Payment                                   Back Order Processing (updated                                      Integration of External Warehouse Mgmt System
    (updated)                                                                                                                                     Inventory Management
   External Cash Desk (updated)




                                                                                                                                                 Manufacturing and
Corporate Services                                                        Procurement
                                                                                                                                                 Product Development
 Asset Configuration1 (updated)                                           Central Contract Management                                           Batch Traceability and Analytics (updated)
 Easy Inspection Planning                                                 Procure to Pay (updated)                                              Integration of Manufacturing Execution Systems
 Maintenance Processing (updated)                                         Service Procurement                                                    (updated)
 Real Estate – Room Reservation                                           Sourcing                                                              Responsive Product Development and Launch
 Travel Management (updated)                                              Trade and Commodity Management
                                                                            (updated)


Disclaimer: All bundles are planned for shipments in Dec 2008 unless otherwise indicated. SAP reserves the right to change the ES bundles listed without prior notice.
1. available
View them* in www.sdn.sap.com  Enterprise SOA  Explore Enterprise Services ( ES Workplace /  ES Wiki)
*Some of the bundles listed on this page can be viewed in the ES Wiki.
Agenda




  Introduction and Overview                        6. Procurement and Logistics Execution
  1. Analytics                                            6.1 Procurement
                                                          6.2 Inbound and Outbound Logistics
         1.1 Financial Analytics
                                                          6.3 Inventory and Warehouse Management
         1.2 Strategic Enterprise Management
  2. Financials                                    7. Product Development and Manufacturing
         2.1   Financial Supply Chain Management          7.1   Life-cycle Data Management
                                                          7.2   Manufacturing Execution
         2.2   Corporate Governance
                                                          7.3   Product Development
         2.3   Financial Accounting
                                                          7.4   Production Planning
         2.4   Treasury
                                                          7.5   General
  3. Human Capital Management
         3.1 Talent Management
                                                   8. Sales and Service
                                                          8.1 General
         3.2 Workforce Process Management
         3.4 General                                      8.2 Sales Order Management
                                                   9. Cross SAP ERP
  4. End-user Service Delivery
  5. Corporate Services
         5.1   Enterprise Asset Management
         5.2   Project and Portfolio Management
         5.3   Quality Management
         5.4   Real Estate Management
         5.5   Travel Management
Analytics


 Analytics
 Business Functions

 Description                                                                             Target Customers

    Cost Estimate and Simulation:                                                          SAP CQM customers and PDCE customers who want to
     Functional enhancements and performance improvements for cost and quotation             benefit from the improvements
     management with the costing engine of SAP SEM and content of the product
     design cost estimate (PDCE).

    Financials, Group Close, Adjustment for Changes of Tax Rates:                          A customer who utilizes the existing deferred tax
     Tax effects previously calculated according to the tax rates of prior periods are       functionality within BCS in SAP SEM. It will likely be a
     adjusted to the current tax rate in order to obtain correct cumulative effects          multinational client who has operations in one or more
                                                                                             jurisdictions that have recently changed or are about to
                                                                                             change their effective corporate tax rates. There is a
                                                                                             high likelihood that the first target customer will be
                                                                                             German, because these customers represent the key
                                                                                             base that has requested the new functionality.

    Reporting Financials 2:                                                                Customers without legacy reports and customers
     Use new reports from SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence and overviews                  interested in real-time reporting with the front-end tools
     (POWER lists) with a uniform look and easy-to-use user interface. You can display       of SAP NetWeaver BI. For small and midsize customers
     them in SAP NetWeaver Portal or SAP NetWeaver Business Client and decide                without SAP NetWeaver BI, the reporting content of this
     where to read the data from when you call a report.                                     business function significantly lowers the hurdle of using
                                                                                             reporting tools by offering lean reporting options.
Index




  Introduction and Overview                        6. Procurement and Logistics Execution
  1. Analytics                                            6.1 Procurement
                                                          6.2 Inbound and Outbound Logistics
         1.1 Financial Analytics
                                                          6.3 Inventory and Warehouse Management
         1.2 Strategic Enterprise Management
  2. Financials                                    7. Product Development and Manufacturing
         2.1   Financial Supply Chain Management          7.1   Life-cycle Data Management
                                                          7.2   Manufacturing Execution
         2.2   Corporate Governance
                                                          7.3   Product Development
         2.3   Financial Accounting
                                                          7.4   Production Planning
         2.4   Treasury
                                                          7.5   General
  3. Human Capital Management
         3.1 Talent Management
                                                   8. Sales and Service
                                                          8.1 General
         3.2 Workforce Process Management
         3.4 General                                      8.2 Sales Order Management
                                                   9. Cross SAP ERP
  4. End-user Service Delivery
  5. Corporate Services
         5.1   Enterprise Asset Management
         5.2   Project and Portfolio Management
         5.3   Quality Management
         5.4   Real Estate Management
         5.5   Travel Management
Analytics > Financial Analytics


 Reporting Financials 2


 Simplify Reporting Financials with Attractive, State-of-the-Art Reporting Tools
 Benefits                                                                                 FIN_REP_SIMPL_2
    Unifies look and feel of financial reports and sports an attractive user interface.
    Reduces learning costs.
    Offers scalability in back-end technology.
    Allows switching between direct access for lean back-end scenarios and replicated data for high-volume environments.

                                                                                                                             Target Users for this Business
 New Features                     Description
                                                                                                                             Function

 Simplified reporting for            The reports provide status information for each close task in the task list and an        Corporate controllers and
 closing                              overview of the progress of the task list with respect to schedule. Users can create       other users in corporate
                                      alerts that notify them if close tasks are delayed or taking longer than planned.          finance, including
                                      The new reports also show the close status per business unit. This is particularly         compliance officers
                                      important in a shared service environment, where one unit might perform a close
                                      task for multiple business units, but each business unit needs to have status
                                      information concerning the degree of completion in its unit.

 Simplified reporting for            Reports cover all stages of the investment management life cycle from planning            Corporate controllers and
 investment management                and budgeting to availability control and replanning, and address all objects              investment managers
                                      associated with investment management (investment programs, items,
                                      appropriation requests, orders and work breakdown structure elements).

 Simplified reporting for            Provides modern easy-to-use reports for the following areas: asset history sheet,         Asset accountants and
 asset accounting                     asset balances, asset transactions, planned depreciation, posted depreciation,             corporate finance
                                      comparison of depreciation, depreciation forecast, inventory list, and assets not
                                      posted.

 Improvements of                                                                                                             Target Users for this Business
                                  Description
 existing features                                                                                                           Function

 Simplified reporting for            Provides sample reports based on operating concern S_GO that display net sales,           Controllers and business
 profitability analysis               contribution margins, operating profit, and target turnover in an easy-to-use              unit analysts
                                      interface
Analytics > Financial Analytics > Reporting Financials 2


 Feature: Simplified reporting for closing

Delivered by Business Function FIN_REP_SIMPL_2
     The reports provide status information for each close task in the task list and an overview of the progress
      of the task list with respect to schedule. Users can create alerts that notify them if close tasks are delayed
      or taking longer than planned. The new reports also show the close status per business unit. This is
      particularly important in a shared service environment, where one unit might perform a close task for
      multiple business units, but each business unit needs to have status information concerning the degree of
      completion in its unit.

 Customer business challenges
     The current application focuses on the users               End User
      responsible for executing the close tasks and              Environment
                                                                                                      Business Client                    Enterprise Portal
      provides them with access to the tasks themselves,
      status information, and any spool requests, job logs,




                                                                          Push
                                                                 Report




                                                                                                                                                                                          Pull
      and error logs created when the tasks were                 Access                           Process                                          Launchpad
      scheduled. The new reports provide high-level status
      information that document whether all tasks are                            Currently used:                                         Coming additionally in future:
                                                                                 POWER List, BEx Web Analyzer, BEx Analyzer (MS Excel)   Business Objects Tools (e.g. Crystal Reports, Xcelsius)
                                                                 Reporting
      complete for a given business unit and provide the
                                                                 Frontend
      basis for active alerting if a deadline is exceeded or a   Tools
      task takes substantially longer than planned.
 Business value                                                  Data                                                   Business Query
                                                                 Provisioning
     The local close is a time-critical process where                                                            Business Data Provisioning
      multiple stakeholders work interactively to close the
      books on time. The new reporting functions provide                                              Direct Access                                      Staging
      parties other than the accountants executing the               Suite
                                                                                                             Operational Information Provider
                                                                    Database
      close with information concerning the status and
      progress of the close. That allows them to initiate
      corrective action if delays are expected, especially if
      they would affect the global close (consolidation).
Analytics > Financial Analytics > Reporting Financials 2


 Feature: Simplified reporting for investment
 management
Delivered by Business Function FIN_REP_SIMPL_2
     Reports cover all stages of the investment management life cycle from planning and budgeting to
      availability control and replanning, and address all objects associated with investment management
      (investment programs, items, appropriation requests, orders and work breakdown structure elements).




 Customer business challenges
     Provide easy-to-use reports that provide key          End User
      business information concerning budget availability   Environment
                                                                                                 Business Client                    Enterprise Portal
      by investment program




                                                                     Push
                                                            Report




                                                                                                                                                                                     Pull
                                                            Access                           Process                                          Launchpad

                                                                            Currently used:                                         Coming additionally in future:
                                                                            POWER List, BEx Web Analyzer, BEx Analyzer (MS Excel)   Business Objects Tools (e.g. Crystal Reports, Xcelsius)
                                                            Reporting
                                                            Frontend
                                                            Tools


 Business value                                             Data                                                   Business Query
                                                            Provisioning
     Simplifies and streamlines reporting process for                                                       Business Data Provisioning
      investment management
                                                                                                 Direct Access                                      Staging
                                                                Suite
                                                               Database                                 Operational Information Provider
Analytics > Financial Analytics > Reporting Financials 2


 Feature: Simplified reporting for asset
 accounting
Delivered by Business Function FIN_REP_SIMPL_2
     Provides modern easy-to-use reports for the following areas: asset history sheet, asset balances, asset
      transactions, planned depreciation, posted depreciation, comparison of depreciation, depreciation forecast,
      inventory list, and assets not posted.




 Customer business challenges
     Asset accounting provides detailed information       End User
      on all financial transactions affecting fixed        Environment
                                                                                                Business Client                    Enterprise Portal
      assets. There are many standard reports that




                                                                    Push
      focus on the life cycle of the asset from            Report




                                                                                                                                                                                    Pull
                                                           Access                           Process                                          Launchpad
      acquisition to retirement. The most important
      reports have been simplified.                                        Currently used:
                                                                           POWER List, BEx Web Analyzer, BEx Analyzer (MS Excel)
                                                                                                                                   Coming additionally in future:
                                                                                                                                   Business Objects Tools (e.g. Crystal Reports, Xcelsius)
                                                           Reporting
                                                           Frontend
                                                           Tools


 Business value                                            Data                                                   Business Query
                                                           Provisioning
     Simplifies and streamlines reporting process for                                                      Business Data Provisioning
      asset accounting
                                                                                                Direct Access                                      Staging
                                                               Suite
                                                              Database                                 Operational Information Provider
Agenda




  Introduction and Overview                        6. Procurement and Logistics Execution
  1. Analytics                                            6.1 Procurement
                                                          6.2 Inbound and Outbound Logistics
         1.1 Financial Analytics
                                                          6.3 Inventory and Warehouse Management
         1.2 Strategic Enterprise Management
  2. Financials                                    7. Product Development and Manufacturing
         2.1   Financial Supply Chain Management          7.1   Life-cycle Data Management
                                                          7.2   Manufacturing Execution
         2.2   Corporate Governance
                                                          7.3   Product Development
         2.3   Financial Accounting
                                                          7.4   Production Planning
         2.4   Treasury
                                                          7.5   General
  3. Human Capital Management
         3.1 Talent Management
                                                   8. Sales and Service
                                                          8.1 General
         3.2 Workforce Process Management
         3.4 General                                      8.2 Sales Order Management
                                                   9. Cross SAP ERP
  4. End-user Service Delivery
  5. Corporate Services
         5.1   Enterprise Asset Management
         5.2   Project and Portfolio Management
         5.3   Quality Management
         5.4   Real Estate Management
         5.5   Travel Management
Analytics > Strategic Enterprise Management


 Cost Estimate and Simulation


 Additional Functionality Enhances Flexibility and Scalability of PDCE
 Benefits
    Additional functionality enhances flexibility and scalability of PDCE




                                                                                                                          Target Users for this Business
 New Features                    Description
                                                                                                                          Function

 Batch import for PDCE              It is now possible to schedule and manage data packages to select and import            Functionality will be used by
 objects                             data from legacy systems in batch mode                                                   administrators. A daily
                                                                                                                              business user benefits from
                                                                                                                              automated data processing.

 Editable messages sent             Users can enable their own formulas to send editable messages according to their        Business and technical
 according to customer               customizing settings                                                                     users
 formulas

 Inheritance mechanism              Customers can define inheritance behavior on attribute fields and trigger               Users
                                     inheritance manually or via a formula up or down in the structure


 BOM import                         It is now possible to import BOMs with missing key information (a design BOM, a         Users and SAP PLM
                                     BOM using materials without a plant, and so on). Incomplete objects are created          integration
                                     as preliminary materials in PDCE.

 Capture a master of                If an object is copied, its master can be referenced. A later change to the master      Users
 copied objects and                  can be automated to change the copy accordingly.
 enable mass change
Analytics > Strategic Enterprise Management


 Cost Estimate and Simulation



 Improvements of                                                                                                                Target Users for this Business
                                 Description
 existing features                                                                                                              Function

 Enhanced where-used                The where-used wizard allows use of cross-object key filters (examples: project               End user (cost estimator and
 list                                and version). The searched assignment of an object can therefore be analyzed                   team lead)
                                     independently of other object keys (example: find component 4711 in all projects
                                     and versions filtered). The same applies to the definition and filter of the result list
                                     (found parents).

 Enhanced price                     Valuation and price selection can be customized with greater sophistication by                Business user
 selection conditions for            using different dimensions to evaluate data selection
 valuation customizing

 Content enhancements:              The SAP-delivered PDCE business content was improved to ease enhancements                     Users
 1PDCE                               and include additional requirements.


 Formula parameter for              Fixed values used in formulas as parameters can now be set to multiple single                 Technical users
 fixed value: support for            values and intervals
 multiple values and
 intervals

 Object categories                  Objects can now be grouped using common object categories, which greatly                      Technical users
 supported                           simplifies buliding formulas
Analytics > Strategic Enterprise Management > Cost Estimate and Simulation


 Feature: Batch import for PDCE objects

Delivered by Business Function FIN_PDCE_COSTQUOT_CI_1
     It is now possible to schedule and manage data packages to select and import data from legacy systems
      in batch mode




                                                                                 Foundation Topic (no process assignment)




 Customer business challenges                                                Business value
     Complex selection and time-consumption to fill data from                  Time-consuming mass imports can be set to run during low
      legacy systems into PDCE for further processing                            system load time. Automatic updates can be scheduled.
                                                                                 Automation of manual tasks. Improved data integrity and
                                                                                 real-time update and synchronization between systems
                                                                                 involved in the business process.
Analytics > Strategic Enterprise Management > Cost Estimate and Simulation


 Feature: Editable messages sent according to
 customer formulas
Delivered by Business Function FIN_PDCE_COSTQUOT_CI_1
     Users can enable their own formulas to send editable messages according to their customizing settings




                                                                                 Foundation Topic (no process assignment)




 Customer business challenges                                                Business value
     No messages could be sent to end users according to                       Users can enable their own formulas to send editable
      customized business and calculation logic                                  messages according to their customizing settings. The end
                                                                                 user can be guided according to the results of the
                                                                                 calculation.
Analytics > Strategic Enterprise Management > Cost Estimate and Simulation


 Feature: Inheritance mechanism

Delivered by Business Function FIN_PDCE_COSTQUOT_CI_1
     Customers can define inheritance behavior on attribute fields and trigger inheritance manually or via a
      formula up or down in the structure




                                                                                 Foundation Topic (no process assignment)




 Customer business challenges                                                Business value
     Customer control of the values for inheritance of fields                  Customers can define inheritance behavior on attribute
      was impossible                                                             fields and trigger inheritance manually or via a formula up or
                                                                                 down in the structure
Analytics > Strategic Enterprise Management > Cost Estimate and Simulation


 Feature: BOM import

Delivered by Business Function FIN_PDCE_COSTQUOT_CI_1
     It is now possible to import BOMs with missing key information (a design BOM, a BOM using materials
      without a plant, and so on). Incomplete objects are created as preliminary materials in PDCE.




                                                                                 Foundation Topic (no process assignment)




 Customer business challenges                                                Business value
     Import for design BOM, text items, and so on was                          Better support of the product design and definition process
      impossible                                                                 providing partlially incomplete data
Analytics > Strategic Enterprise Management > Cost Estimate and Simulation


 Feature: Capture a master of copied objects
 and enable mass change
Delivered by Business Function FIN_PDCE_COSTQUOT_CI_1
     If an object is copied, its master can be referenced. A later change to the master can be automated to
      change the copy accordingly.




                                                                                 Foundation Topic (no process assignment)




 Customer business challenges                                                Business value
     Copy lost master (origin) reference                                       If an object is copied, its master can be referenced. A later
                                                                                 change to the master can be automated to change the copy
                                                                                 accordingly. Changes in the structure can be followed up
                                                                                 more easily between versions.
Analytics > Strategic Enterprise Management


 Financials, Group Close, Adjustment for
 Changes of Tax Rates
 Automated Adjustment of Deferred Taxes on Change in Effective Tax Rates

 Benefits                                                                               FIN_ACC_GC_TAXRATECHG
    This functionality will allow for greater accuracy and timeliness and reduced costs through automation of the process of identifying tax rate changes
     within the system by selecting the specific records that need to be adjusted at the applicable entity, account, document type, and posting level. It
     calculates the necessary adjustments and then automatically posts the resulting adjustments based on the posting rules defined within configuration.



 Improvements of                                                                                                             Target Users for this Business
                                 Description
 existing features                                                                                                           Function

 Automated adjustment               This functionality automates identification of tax rate changes within the system;         Local and group
 of deferred taxes on                identifies the specific records that need to be adjusted at the entity, account,            accountants
 change in effective tax             document type, and posting level; calculates the necessary adjustments; and then
 rates                               automatically posts the result based on the posting rules defined within
                                     configuration.
Index




  Introduction and Overview                          6. Procurement and Logistics Execution
  1. Analytics                                              6.1 Procurement
                                                            6.2 Inbound and Outbound Logistics
          1.1 Financial Analytics
                                                            6.3 Inventory and Warehouse Management
          1.2 Strategic Enterprise Management
  2. Financials                                      7. Product Development and Manufacturing
          2.1    Financial Supply Chain Management          7.1   Life-cycle Data Management
                                                            7.2   Manufacturing Execution
          2.2    Corporate Governance
                                                            7.3   Product Development
          2.3    Financial Accounting
                                                            7.4   Production Planning
          2.4    Treasury
                                                            7.5   General
  3. Human Capital Management
          3.1 Talent Management
                                                     8. Sales and Service
                                                            8.1 General
          3.2 Workforce Process Management
          3.4 General                                       8.2 Sales Order Management
                                                     9. Cross SAP ERP
  4. End-user Service Delivery
  5. Corporate Services
          5.1    Enterprise Asset Management
          5.2    Project and Portfolio Management
          5.3    Quality Management
          5.4    Real Estate Management
          5.5    Travel Management
Financials


 Financials
 Business Functions (1/4)
     Value Proposition for SAP ERP Financials enhancements within SAP Enhancement Package 4 for SAP ERP
     Customers benefit from new user-interfaces and enhanced functionalities in the area of Financial Supply Chain Management. SAP
     Collections Management within a multiple backend systems environment is now much easier to use and increases the attractiveness for
     implementing a Financial Shared Service Center. "Master Data Governance for Financials" allows corporations to centrally maintain and
     distribute financial charts of accounts master data. Change request handling and approval workflows increase transparency, thus
     ensuring compliant master data governance. Enhancements in Treasury and Risk Management offer streamlined hedge management
     processes and enable customers to do hedge management and accounting for commodities. Moreover SAP delivers simplified reporting
     capabilities and further enhancements of the general ledger.



 Description                                                                              Target Customers

    TRM, Hedge Management for FAM:                                                          Customers with a significant demand for hedge
     Streamlined hedge management process to eliminate market price risk for                  capabilities and other accounting functionality
     securities in terms of business and accounting. Securities and forward security
     transactions can be assigned and designated by using hedging relationships.
     Effectiveness tests, documentation, and hedge accounting are supported.

  TRM, Hedge and Exposure Management, SWIFT:                                                Customers with a high demand for hedge capabilities or
   Hedge and exposure management for commodities, accounting enhancements;                    other accounting functionality in the treasury area
  Forward stock transactions; correspondence monitor for SWIFT messages                     Customers with a high demand for a tool to manage
   MT3xx,and MT 5xx;                                                                          exposures (for foreign currency and commodities) as a
  IFRS 7 and exposure integration to risk analyzer (NPV and VAR analysis of financial        prerequisite for hedge management
   exposures).                                                                               Customer with a high demand for financial risk analysis
                                                                                             Customers with a high demand for straight through
                                                                                              processing of Swift messages

    Financials Master Data Management: Charts of Accounts:                                  Large corporate groups that use several different systems
     A solution to maintain financial master data centrally in a corporate group with         for financial accounting, consolidation, planning, and
     features like versioning of the master data and approval workflow. The master data       reporting
     can be distributed by services or download to operational systems.
Financials


 Financials
 Business Functions (2/4)

 Description                                                                                Target Customers

    FSCM Functions 2:                                                                         Customers with a need to integrate other applications
     Service-enablement of and Web UI for dispute cases and credit limit requests;              with SAP Dispute Management
     multiple back-ends and head-office branch structures                                      Customers with a need to improve the credit limit request
                                                                                                process
                                                                                               Customers who have head-office branch structures
                                                                                               Customers who need to connect multiple backend
                                                                                                systems (FI-AR) to a central SAP Collections
                                                                                                Management application

    FSCM Integration 2:                                                                       Customers with a need to integrate other applications
     Service-enablement of and Web UI for dispute cases and credit limit requests;              with SAP Dispute Management
     multiple back ends and head-office branch structures                                      Customers with a need to improve the credit limit request
                                                                                                process
                                                                                               Customers who have head-office branch structures
                                                                                               Customers who need to connect multiple back-end
                                                                                                systems (FI-AR) to a central SAP Collections
                                                                                                Management application

    Billing and Invoicing:                                                                    Customers in traditional and other industries who handle
     Enablement of event detail records billing and convergent invoicing with FI-CAX.           a high volume of event detail records
     Event detail records (EDR) are process-priced transactions to create structured bill
     content. The creation of convergent invoices over multiple services and product
     lines will provide the customer with one bill.

    Biller Direct, Promise to Pay:                                                            Customers with high-volume call centers and high-effort
     Enable new funcionalities in SAP Biller Direct for customers using FI-CA: 1) Enable        collections who want to lighten the load at call centers by
     promise-to-pay in SAP Biller Direct and 2) Enable SAP Biller Direct to handle              offering promise-to-pay via e-services
     customer-defined fields during the selected process on bill data, address data,           Customers who want to adjust or enhance screens in
     bank data, and credit card data.                                                           SAP Biller Direct with their own fields
Financials


 Financials
 Business Functions (3/4)

 Description                                                                                 Target Customers

    Integration FI-CA/CRM Dispute Management:                                                  Service industries using FI-CA
     Enables integration of dispute management in FI-CA with dispute management in
     SAP CRM in the interaction center (IC) Web Client


    Billing Consolidation Connector:                                                           Customers who want to exchange business-to-business
     Billing consolidation connector provides a built-in capability to connect to service        documents electronically with their business partners via
     providers for business-to-business document exchange, including digitally signed            supplier networks
     invoices. The connection is tailored to meet the requirements of SAP Billing
     Consolidation.

    Bank Communication Management:                                                             Customers with a high demand for the management of
     This BF includes the functionality of Bank Communication Management shipped                 outgoing payments, customers with several cost-intensive
     with EhP 2. This component supports you when you monitor and release payment                corporate-to-bank interfaces, and customers with
     media in payment transactions with banks. With EhP 4 the product has been                   connectivity to the SWIFT network
     improved in terms of Simplification

    Information Life-Cycle Management: Tax Auditing:                                           All customers who have to decommission an SAP system.
     Extract all relevant data (master and transaction data) for doing tax audits with the
     retention warehouse after decommissioning the original system


    General Ledger Accounting 2:                                                               Customers who want to have more transparency when
     Improve closing (enhanced check of posting periods)                                         performing parallel accounting using parallel ledgers,
         Verify data transparency better (drill down from FI to CO data)                       balance sheet, and profit-and-loss on additional account
         Validate data quality using additional account assignments (profit center)             assignments
         Identify documents posted in new G/L ledger groups

    CO, Allocations:                                                                           Public sector organizations using multiple funding sources and
     Enhancements to CO allocation tools for activity allocation and overhead                    funding types with varying timeframes for the fund expiration
     calculation. Calculations are based on a specific valuation date rather than the            with a requirement to make timesheet corrections outside the
                                                                                                 current period. The realtime overhead functions may also be of
     current periodic rate. The change is important where adjustments are required in
                                                                                                 interest to manufacturing customers wishing to trigger an
     prior periods when a different rate was valid.
                                                                                                 overhead posting as each order confirmation is posted.
Financials


 Financials
 Business Functions (4/4)

 Description                                                                               Target Customers

    CLM-CM, Additional Account Assignments:                                                  Customers with a high demand for splitting the results of
     New accounting dimensions for cash management and forecast: business area (can            a cash position and liquidity forecast by profit center or
     now be turned off), segment, profit center, fund, and grant                               segment
                                                                                              Customers from the public sector who split the results of
                                                                                               a cash position and liquidity forecast by fund or grant

    Contract Accounts A/R and A/P, 02:                                                       Customers with a large volume of business partners and
     Generic development and enhanced functionality in the area of contract accounting         documents to process



    Partly Exempt Organizations:                                                             Customers with partly exempt organizations
     New functional capabilities have been provided that enable handling of value-added
     tax (VAT) for partly exempt organizations


    FI Localization Topics for Japan and Portugal:                                           Corporate accounting
     FI-AA localization enhancements for Japan and Portugal :
     property tax (Japan), invoice summary enhancements (Japan), and MAPAS Fiscais
     (Portugal)

    FI Localization Topics for Japan and South Korea:                                        All Korean customers who plan to use SAP ERP 6.0,
     FIN localization enhancements for Korea and Japan                                         including new and installed based customers across all
     Tax reporting: to maintain Korea-specific fields time-dependently in the vendor and       industries. Samsung Group will be first target customer.
     customer master
     Payments: to determine the due date of BOE in the authomatic payment program.
     Invoice Summary Enhancements for Japan

    Credit Card Encryption: Periodic Key Exchange:                                           Secure handling of payment card data in SAP ERP
     Periodic exchange of encryption keys used for payment card encryption according
     to the PCI DSS standard
Financials


 Financials
 ES Bundles

 Description

    Bank Communication Management:
     This ES bundle covers all enterprise services to allow communication between a company and external banks
       Enhanced ISO 20022/SEPA support
       New interface for credit and debit advice
       Additional security features


    External cash desk:
     In addition to the already existing eSOA Services of EhP2 this bundle contains additional services to run an cash desk also in an internal
     scenario, where the cesh desk are owned by the company which is running the ERP system.

    Credit Management:
     This ES bundle supports the information flow between different departments within a company to make quick, efficient credit decisions as
     well as external information from third party services such as credit agencies.

    Dispute Management:
     This bundle contains enterprise services which can be used to create and change dispute cases. Also, you can search for dispute cases via
     an enterprise service according to various criteria. This enterprise service bundle facilitates the integration of SAP Dispute Management in
     other applications (SAP and non-SAP). You can also use the services in order to build your own custom-made user interfaces for SAP
     Dispute Management.

    Electronic Bill Presentment and Payment:
     This ES bundle provides electronic bill presentment and payment services for billers and authorization and settlement capabilities for the
     communication with credit card processors. It will not include a dedicated user interface though.
Financials


 ES Bundle – Bank Communication
 Management

       Enables the seamless communication of financial transactions of a company with its house banksvia the
        SWIFT network
       Provides full payment flow transparency and gives a high control of payment transactions
       Target Market: Any company that initiates payments and receives electronic bank statements fromits
        house banks – especially if they rely on many different house banks


                       AP Clerk               Treasury Clerk       Treasury Manager




                                                                                                     Send                  Update
                                   Initiate               Batch                Approve
             Invoice                                                                               payment                 status
                                  payments              payments              payments
                                                                                                    media                  monitor


Business Value                                                         Use Cases
   Streamlined communication with house banks via one single             Initiate outgoing payments
    communication channel (seamless SWIFT Net integration)                Initiate incoming payments via direct debit
   Dramatically reduced TCO                                              Approve, reject or resubmit payments
   Significantly improved straight-through processing                    Receive and process electronic bank statement
   Increased payment flow transparency through status
    monitoring of payments and bank statements
   Enhanced compliance through multiple approval levels for
    outgoing payments
Financials


 ES Bundle – External Cash Desk



     Easy-to-use enterprise services to post deposits, withdrawals and differences at company-
      owned cash desks. In addition, payment without business partner relationship will be
      supported by an enterprise service.
     Target Market: Service Industries, for example Utility and Telco Companies


                                        External Cash
        Customer                         Desk Agent                                     FI-CA Clerk

                        Post
                     GL Payments                                                                                  Monitoring
                                                                 PI
                                                                                                             Process
          Post             Post               Post                                   Process
                                                                                                           Cash Balance Reconciliation
         Deposit        Withdrawal        Differences                                Payment
                                                                                                             Postings


Business Value                                                        Use Cases
   Easy to-use standardized interface to complete a internal            Supporting company-owned cash desks
    cash desk scenario                                                    In addition to the external cash desk services already
   Lower running costs due to integrated monitoring/reporting            available for processing payments, this bundle includes the
    tool                                                                  functions for communicating cash balance-relevant postings,
   Lower integration costs due to standard interface                     such as:
   Complete communication between cash desk and ERP                        Deposits (into the cash desk)
                                                                            Withdrawals (out of the cash desk)
    system is done using enterprise services
                                                                            Differences (after cash desk reconciliation)
                                                                         In addition, payments with no relationship to a business
                                                                          partner are supported
Financials


 ES Bundle – Credit Management



       Enables creation, change, display and search of credit limit requests
       Allows to build simplified UIs to create & process credit limit requests
       Target Market: Customers who already use SAP Credit Management


                                                             Credit Manager

Account Manager /
   Sales Clerk                                                                                                   Credit Manager


                                                                   Analyze

             Request credit
                                                Review                             Change                           Approve
              limit change

                    ERP 6.0                      ERP 6.0                           ERP 6.0                         ERP 6.0
Backend                                                                             EhP4
                     EhP4                         EhP4                                                              EhP4
System

Business Value                                                        Use Cases
   Real-time integration of credit limit request process in SAP         Credit limit application process: Account manager or sales
    Credit Management                                                     clerk request a changed (usually higher) credit limit for a
   Sales can be directly involved in credit limit application            customer
    process
Financials


 ES Bundle – Dispute Management



       This ES bundle enables creation, change, display and search of dispute cases.
       Allows integration of SAP Dispute Management with other applications (SAP / non-SAP)
       Target Market: Customers who already use SAP Dispute Management and want to integrate it with other
        applications.



                                                                                          Any employee of the
Customer                              AR Clerk                                            company & customer         AR Clerk


                                                              Analyze

             Create
                                        Review                        Change                    Decide                   Resolve
             Dispute

              ERP 6.0                    ERP 6.0                      ERP 6.0                  ERP 6.0                 ERP 6.0
Backend
               EhP4                       EhP4                         EhP4                     EhP4                    EhP4
System

Business Value                                                          Use Cases
   Real-time integration of SAP Dispute Management with                   Integration of SAP Dispute Management with other “dispute
    other application                                                       handling application
    Integrated view on all customer disputes / claims / tickets           Custom-made UI for SAP Dispute Management
    /can be built                                                          Customers create disputes via self service
    Example: Possibility to integrate dispute cases date in third-
    party CRM system
   Offer self service to customer in order to reduce internal
    costs
Financials


 ES Bundle – Electronic Bill Presentment &
 Payment

       Enables electronic bill presentment and payment services for billers in a customer facing portal
       Allows consumption of financial accounting customer information by other applications
       Target Market: The EBPP bundle is of value to any company of any size that presents invoices in a
        customer-facing portal



                         AR Clerk                                       Customer                        Cash Manager

                                                Analyze


              Invoice                   Review                      Authorize                    Pay                     Settle

               ERP 6.0                   ERP 6.0                    ERP 6.0                   ERP 6.0                  ERP 6.0
Backend
                EhP4                      EhP4                       EhP4                      EhP4                     EhP4
System

Business Value                                                         Use Cases
   Reduction of administrative cost in the accounting                    Customer Facing Portal
    department                                                            Consumption of financial accounting customer information
   Possibility to offer high service level to customers
   Real time customer account information available
   High flexibility to integrate customer account information in
    other applications
Agenda




  Introduction and Overview                          6. Procurement and Logistics Execution
  1. Analytics                                              6.1 Procurement
                                                            6.2 Inbound and Outbound Logistics
          1.1 Financial Analytics
                                                            6.3 Inventory and Warehouse Management
          1.2 Strategic Enterprise Management
  2. Financials                                      7. Product Development and Manufacturing
          2.1    Financial Supply Chain Management          7.1   Life-cycle Data Management
                                                            7.2   Manufacturing Execution
          2.2    Corporate Governance
                                                            7.3   Product Development
          2.3    Financial Accounting
                                                            7.4   Production Planning
          2.4    Treasury
                                                            7.5   General
  3. Human Capital Management
          3.1 Talent Management
                                                     8. Sales and Service
                                                            8.1 General
          3.2 Workforce Process Management
          3.4 General                                       8.2 Sales Order Management
                                                     9. Cross SAP ERP
  4. End-user Service Delivery
  5. Corporate Services
          5.1    Enterprise Asset Management
          5.2    Project and Portfolio Management
          5.3    Quality Management
          5.4    Real Estate Management
          5.5    Travel Management
Financials > Financial Supply Chain Management


 Biller Direct, Promise to Pay


 SAP Biller Direct: Promise-to-Pay and Customer Field Extensions
 Benefits                                                                                FIN_FSCM_BD_2
  Promise to pay: Considering the increasing worsening of customers‟ payment behavior and default payment, every channel and opportunity to collect
   payments, even if in fractional installments, will be used and offered to the customer in a self-service. In the SAP Biller Direct application, consumers
   now have an option to select a predetermined type of payment arrangement to settle their debts. Additional actions for contact and confirmation creation
   finalize the process. Furthermore, consumers will be able to display and review their promises to pay.
  Customer field extension: the enhancement enables UI adjustments with reduced effort and thus lowers TCO.


                                                                                                                             Target Users for this Business
 New Features                   Description
                                                                                                                             Function

 Promise to pay in SAP             Open bills can be selected to create a promise-to-pay (P2P). Permitted P2P type,            Industries using FI-CA that
 Biller Direct                      reason for the promise, and written confirmation can be chosen. The start date               deal with:
                                    and payment method for the payment rates can be assigned.                                   Mass-volume data
                                   An eligibility check is performed to determine if the customer qualifies to initiate a      High workload in interaction
                                    P2P.                                                                                         centers
                                   A simulation screen with details for the promise to pay is displayed so that the
                                                                                                                                Worsening payment
                                    customer can accept, reject, or create a new P2P.
                                                                                                                                 behavior
                                   Saving the P2P can create a contact (optional) and correspondence in FI-CA.
                                   Existing active P2Ps can be displayed with drill-down details and original items.
                                   Customers can withdraw P2Ps.
                                   Open invoices contained in a P2P are indicated with a drill-down option to display
                                    the details.
Financials > Financial Supply Chain Management


 Biller Direct, Promise to Pay



 Improvements of                                                                                                          Target Users for this Business
                                Description
 existing features                                                                                                        Function

 Customer field                    Customer field extension (CFE) is applied to SAP Biller Direct processes:                SAP Biller Direct customers
 extension in SAP Biller           Address data                                                                              or users of utilities customer
 Direct                            Bill information                                                                          e-services who want to
                                   Bank data                                                                                 adjust or enhance screens in
                                   Credit cards                                                                              SAP Biller Direct with their
                                                                                                                              own fields
                                   The following is covered by this new development:
                                   Two classes that hold the functionality for the extension
                                   Extend all actions to instantiate and clear the list at the beginning of each self-
                                    service
                                   Enhance all JCO calls to the back end so they also have the extension-table in the
                                    interface - also enhance the function modules in the back end with this parameter
                                   Put a BADI method in all wrapper methods in the back end
Financials > Financial Supply Chain Management > Biller Direct, Promise to Pay


 Feature: Promise to pay in SAP Biller Direct

Delivered by Business Function FIN_FSCM_BD_2
     Open bills can be selected to create a promise-to-pay (P2P). Permitted P2P type, reason for the promise, and written
      confirmation can be chosen. The start date and payment method for the payment rates can be assigned.
     An eligibility check is performed to determine if the customer qualifies to initiate a P2P.
     A simulation screen with details for the promise to pay is displayed so that the customer can accept, reject, or
      create a new P2P.
     Saving the P2P can create correspondence in FI-CA.
     Existing active P2Ps can be displayed with drill-down details and original items.
     Customers can withdraw P2Ps.
     Open invoices contained in a P2P are indicated with a drill-down option to display the details.
                Customer                                 Customer                         Customer                        Customer




                View open                                                                                                        Withdraw
                                                           Create promise                  Display promise
                bills in Biller
                   Direct
                                                               to pay
                                                                                 *              to pay
                                                                                                                **               promise
                                                                                                                                  to pay
                                                                                                                        Improvements
                                                                                                                                                  *
 Customer business challenges                                                        Business value
     SAP Biller Direct customers and users of Utilities                                Call centers have less load when customers can create
      customer e-services must give their consumers an option                            promises to pay by themselves in a self-service.
      to initiate promises to pay as a self-service.                                    Companies can exhaust every possibility to get at least a
     By providing this self-service, the work at call centers can                       deferred payment instead of initiating extensive collections
      be reduced and every option is used to receive at least a                          to dun these receivables.
      step-by-step payment from the consumer.
Financials > Financial Supply Chain Management


 Billing Consolidation Connector

 Built-In Capability to Connect to Service Providers for Business-To-Business
 Document Exchange
 Benefits                                                                             FIN_FSCM_BCONS_CON
    The billing consolidation connector combines SAP ERP functionality with a supplier network to provide a comprehensive solution for electronic document
     exchange.



 Improvements of                                                                                                          Target Users for this Business
                                Description
 existing features                                                                                                        Function

 Billing consolidation             The billing consolidation connector provides a built-in capability to connect to         Customers who want to
 connector                          service providers for business-to-business document exchange. The connection              exchange business-to-
                                    is tailored to meet the requirements of SAP Billing Consolidation, the SAP                business documents
                                    software running on the service provider's document exchange platform. With the           electronically with their
                                    connector delivered with SAP ERP, the customer can now easily and rapidly                 business partners via
                                    connect to these consolidator platforms.                                                  supplier networks
Financials > Financial Supply Chain Management


 FSCM Functions 2


 Improved Flexibility and Openness in SAP Financial Supply Chain Management
 Benefits                                                                               FIN_FSCM_CCD_2
    Lower integration costs
    Improved UIs enable wider reach and smooth process participation in the organization
    Lower system maintenance costs through more flexible deployment options
    More efficient collection process



                                                                                                                      Target Users for this Business
 New Features                   Description
                                                                                                                      Function

 Create, change and                Create, change, and search credit limit request via enterprise services              All customers who use or
 search credit limit                                                                                                      plan to use SAP Credit
 requests via enterprise                                                                                                  Management
 services

 Create, change, and               Create, change, and search dispute cases via enterprise services                     Customers who use or plan
 search dispute cases via                                                                                                 to use SAP Dispute
 enterprise services                                                                                                      Management

 Collections with multiple         Allows users to manage business partners originating from multiple back ends in      All customers who use or
 back ends                          SAP Collections Management                                                            plan to use SAP Collections
                                                                                                                          Management
Financials > Financial Supply Chain Management


 FSCM Functions 2



 Improvements of                                                                                                     Target Users for this Business
                                Description
 existing features                                                                                                   Function

 New UI for creating and           Allows users to create or change credit limit requests via an easy-to-use, Web      All customers who use or
 changing credit limit              based UI                                                                             plan to use SAP Credit
 requests                                                                                                                Management

 New UI for changing               Allows users to change dispute cases via a Web-based UI                             All customers who use or
 dispute cases                                                                                                           plan to use SAP Dispute
                                                                                                                         Management

 Collecting receivables            Help collection specialist collect receivables from customers with head office      All customers who use or
 from customers with                branch structures                                                                    plan to use SAP Collections
 head office branch                                                                                                      Management
 structures
Financials > Financial Supply Chain Management > FSCM Functions 2


 Feature: Create, change and search credit
 limit requests via enterprise services
Delivered by Business Function FIN_FSCM_CCD_2
     Create, change, and search credit limit request via enterprise services




                                                                                   FI-AR: Credit Management
                                                                                                                    Sales Rep
                                                             Credit                                                                  Credit
              Sales Rep                                     Manager                   Sales rep adds more                           Manager
                                                                                      information to credit



                                                          Credit Manager
                                                                                      limit request via non
                                                                                              SAP UI           *
             Sales rep creates                                                          Credit Manager                        Credit Manager
                                                              checks
             credit limit request
               via non SAP UI
                                         *              credit limit request
                                                          in his worklist
                                                                                      evaluate customer‟s
                                                                                        credit situation

                                                                                        Higher level manager
                                                                                                                            approves or rejects
                                                                                                                            credit limit request


                                                                                            might add his                       * Improvements
                                                                                                               *
                                                                                         comment to credit
                                                                                          limit request via
                                                                                             non SAP UI            Division head


 Customer business challenges                                                  Business value
     Link other applications to the credit limit request process                 Easy integration of other applications to the credit limit
      in the SAP Credit Management application. Flexible user                      request process in SAP Credit Management; flexible
      interfaces for credit limit request process.                                 custom-build user interfaces for credit limit request process
Financials > Financial Supply Chain Management > FSCM Functions 2


 Feature: Create, change and search dispute
 cases via enterprise services
Delivered by Business Function FIN_FSCM_CCD_2
     Create, change, and search dispute cases via enterprise services




                                                                                        FI-AR: Dispute Resolution
          Customer                                                                                                               Customer
           Service                                     2nd level Customer                                                         Service
            Agent                                                                           Dispute Manager                        Agent
                                                         Service Agent




          Customer service agent                      2nd level service agent           Dispute Manager resolves               Service agent views
             enters customer                            decides to forward                 dispute case which                 result in service ticket
           complaint in non-SAP
             ticketing system           *             complaint to accounting
                                                            department          *            originates from
                                                                                              service ticket
                                                                                                                                 in his non-SAP
                                                                                                                                       system            *
                                                                                                                                * Improvements
          Customer business challenges                                              Business value
     Link other applications (for example, non-SAP CRM                                Smoother integration, more flexibility for the UI, and ability
      systems) to the SAP Dispute Management application.                               for customers to build their own UIs
      Need to build custom-specific user interfaces for SAP
      Dispute Management
Financials > Financial Supply Chain Management > FSCM Functions 2


 Feature: Collections from customers with
 head-office branch structures
Delivered by Business Function FIN_FSCM_CCD_2
     Allows to collect outstanding receivables from customer who have head-office branch structure, for
      example invoice send to customer A (representing head office), but customer B (representing branch) has
      to approve the payment of the invoice.




AR clerk
                                                                                       FI-AR: Collections Management

           Collection specialist                                                          Collection specialist
                                                       Collection specialist                                              Collection specialist
           checks his worklist,                                                         mightlook at outstanding
            sees prioritization
           of branch accounts           *                 drills down to
                                                        branch account
                                                                               *          receivables of head
                                                                                        office or other branches   *      executes collection
                                                                                                                          call at branch level
                                                                                                                                                  *
                                                                                                                             * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                      Business value
     Challenge to call the right contact person: Not the                             Higher efficiency in collections process leads to lower DSO
      accounts payable clerk in the head office, but someone in                       Less outstanding receivables
      the branch / subsidiary who actually triggers if the
      payment is done or not.
Financials > Financial Supply Chain Management


 FSCM Integration 2


 Improved Flexibility and Openness in SAP Financial Supply Chain Management
 Benefits                                                                             FIN_FSCM_CCD_INTEGRATION
    Lower integration costs
    Improved UIs enable wider reach and smooth process participation in the organization
    Lower system maintenance costs through more flexible deployment options
    More efficient collection process


                                                                                                           Target Users for this Business
 New Features                   Description
                                                                                                           Function

 All features: see                 See FIN_FSCM_CCD_2. Business function FIN_FSCM_CCD_INTEGRATION            See FIN_FSCM_CCD_2
 FIN_FSCM_CCD_2                     requires FIN_FSCM_CCD_2 to be switched on.
Index




  Introduction and Overview                          6. Procurement and Logistics Execution
  1. Analytics                                              6.1 Procurement
                                                            6.2 Inbound and Outbound Logistics
          1.1 Financial Analytics
                                                            6.3 Inventory and Warehouse Management
          1.2 Strategic Enterprise Management
  2. Financials                                      7. Product Development and Manufacturing
          2.1    Financial Supply Chain Management          7.1   Life-cycle Data Management
                                                            7.2   Manufacturing Execution
          2.2    Corporate Governance
                                                            7.3   Product Development
          2.3    Financial Accounting
                                                            7.4   Production Planning
          2.4    Treasury
                                                            7.5   General
  3. Human Capital Management
          3.1 Talent Management
                                                     8. Sales and Service
                                                            8.1 General
          3.2 Workforce Process Management
          3.4 General                                       8.2 Sales Order Management
                                                     9. Cross SAP ERP
  4. End-user Service Delivery
  5. Corporate Services
          5.1    Enterprise Asset Management
          5.2    Project and Portfolio Management
          5.3    Quality Management
          5.4    Real Estate Management
          5.5    Travel Management
Financials > Corporate Governance


 Financials Master Data Management: Charts
 of Accounts
 Keep Financial Master Data Consistent Within a Corporate Group with a Compliant Change and
 Approval Process and Distribution by Enterprise SOA
 Benefits                                                                                 FIN_MDM_ACC
    Sarbanes-Oxley-compliant governance process for corporate maintenance of charts of accounts.
    Consistent charts of accounts in operational systems and consistent mapping a group chart of accounts for group close.
    Less manual work due to automated distribution of master data changes.


                                                                                                                              Target Users for this Business
 New Features                   Description
                                                                                                                              Function

 Time and period-                  An edition defines changes of selected types of objects that will become valid at a          Corporate Accountant and
 dependent versioning               certain period                                                                                Master Data Steward



 Flexible data model for           The metadata model of the master data is the foundation for financial MDM: it                Corporate Accountant and
 entities to be maintained          defines the persistence structure (database tables) of the entities, their                    Master Data Steward
 in central MDM                     relationship, and their attributes.
                                      Data model delivered for standard SAP objects (example: chart of accounts)
                                      Reuse of existing data elements in SAP ERP
                                      Use of existing ERP tables as look-up tables
                                      Customer-defined enhancements of data model




 Flexible and comfortable          Web UI with customer enhancements                                                            Corporate Accountant and
 maintenance                       Customer-defined validations                                                                  Master Data Steward
 in one central system             Customer-defined authorizations
                                   Mass change
                                   Maintenance of hierarchies
                                   Authorizations for entities and attributes
Financials > Corporate Governance


 Financials Master Data Management: Charts
 of Accounts


                                                                                                                    Target Users for this Business
 New Features                   Description
                                                                                                                    Function

 System-controlled                 Change request describes the business reasons for a required change of master      Corporate Accountant and
 change process with                data and controls the approval and execution of the actual changes.                 Master Data Steward
 flexible approval                 Change has to be assigned to an edition (status: in process).
 workflows                         Change request ensures auditability of any change: what, when, who, and why
                                   Textual description, attachments, and comments
                                   Reporting of change requests with status
                                   Comparison of old and new values

 Automated distribution          Sets of changes of an edition are distributed to several systems.                    Corporate Accountant and
 to consuming systems            Distribution preferably by enterprise SOA services (or upload and download)           Master Data Steward
Financials > Corporate Governance > Financials Master Data Management: Charts of Accounts


 Feature: Time and period-dependent
 versioning
Delivered by Business Function FIN_MDM_ACC
     An edition defines changes of selected types of objects that will become valid at a certain period




Master Data                           Corporate                  Master Data                            Master Data                        Corporate
  Admin                              Accountant                   Steward                                 Admin                           Accountant




                                                               Ap-
                                                                            Exe-
                                                     Create     prove
                                                                              cute     Final                                               Distribute
              Create edition                         Change       by
                                                                             chan-     Approval       Release edition
                                                    Request     busi-
                                                                            ges                                                             edition
                                                              ness

                                                                                                Master Data Governance for Financials
 Customer business challenges                                                               Business value
     Time-dependent versions of master data have to be                                          Time consistency for historical, current, and future validities
      maintained in parallel                                                                      of objects
     All changes from one version to another should become                                      Automated distribution of changes
      effective together at a defined time                                                       Increased transparency by reporting on differences between
     Differences between two versions should be easily visible                                   editions
Financials > Corporate Governance > Financials Master Data Management: Charts of Accounts


 Feature: Flexible data model for entities to be
 maintained in central financial master data system

Delivered by Business Function FIN_MDM_ACC
  Data model delivered for standard SAP objects (example: chart of accounts)
  Reuse of existing data elements in SAP ERP
  Use of existing ERP tables as look-up tables
  Customer-defined enhancements of data model




                       Chart of account
                                                                       RelType 1                                                       Master Data
                                                                                                                  Account
                             COA                                          1:N                                                          Governance for
                                                                                                                 ACCOUNT
                                                                       COAACC                                                          Financials



 Customer business challenges                                                               Business value
     Maintenance of financial master data in several systems:                                 Ability to maintain and manage master data in a central
        Several operational systems (ERP)                                                      system:
        Consolidation and planning system(s) (CPM)                                              Customers can use multiple data models at the same time. That
                                                                                                  makes individual data models easier to understand and to maintain.
        Reporting system(s) (BI)
                                                                                                 Consistency of the master data.
     Inconsistent data in different systems
                                                                                                 Reduced reconciliation effort and reduced time to close the books
     Significant effort for reconciliation in:
                                                                                               Delivered data model is flexible an easily adjustable to
        Group close                                                                            customer‟s situation.
        Corporate performance management
                                                                                               Tide integration with customizing and reuse of
                                                                                                ERP tables
Financials > Corporate Governance > Financials Master Data Management: Charts of Accounts


 Feature: Flexible and comfortable
 maintenance in one central system
Delivered by Business Function FIN_MDM_ACC
  Web UI with customer enhancements
  Customer-defined validations
  Customer-defined authorizations
  Mass change
  Maintenance of hierarchies
  Authorizations for entities and attributes



Master Data                           Corporate                  Master Data                            Master Data                     Corporate
  Admin                              Accountant                   Steward                                 Admin                        Accountant




                                                               Ap-
                                                                            Exe-
                                                     Create     prove
                                                                              cute     Final                                           Distribute
              Create edition                         Change       by
                                                                             chan-     Approval       Release edition
                                                    Request     busi-
                                                                            ges                                                         edition
                                                              ness

                                                                                                Master Data Governance for Financials
 Customer business challenges                                                               Business value
     The master data is used and maintained in several                                          High data consistency by one central system to govern
      different IT systems:                                                                       financial master data
          Several operational ERP systems                                                       Great flexibility and comfortable maintenance
          A consolidation system
          Reporting systems (BI)
          Planning systems (CPM)
     Significant effort to maintain identical master data for a
      given period in a distributed system landscape.
Financials > Corporate Governance > Financials Master Data Management: Charts of Accounts


 Feature: System-controlled change process
 with flexible approval workflows
Delivered by Business Function FIN_MDM_ACC
  Change request describes the business reasons for a required change of master data and controls the approval and
   execution of the actual changes.
  Change has to be assigned to an edition (status: in process).
  Change request ensures auditability of any change: what, when, who, and why
  Textual description, attachments, and comments
  Reporting of change requests with status
  Comparison of old and new values


Master Data                           Corporate                  Master Data                            Master Data                    Corporate
  Admin                              Accountant                   Steward                                 Admin                       Accountant




                                                               Ap-
                                                                            Exe-
                                                     Create     prove
                                                                              cute     Final                                           Distribute
              Create edition                         Change       by
                                                                             chan-     Approval       Release edition
                                                    Request     busi-
                                                                            ges                                                         edition
                                                              ness

                                                                                                Master Data Governance for Financials
 Customer business challenges                                                               Business value
     In an approval process, several people have to be                                          Compliance with the Sarbanes-Oxley Act:
      informed or have to approve changes before they become                                         Four eyes for certain transactions and changes with
      effective:                                                                                      approval process
           No integrated approval process                                                           Audit trail: tracking of history of changes and
           No central audit trail                                                                    approvals
                                                                                                     Corporate CFO is responsible for compliance of local
                                                                                                      processes to corporate guidelines. Local compliance
                                                                                                      is supported by enforcing corporate chart of accounts
                                                                                                      and guidelines in local ERP systems
Financials > Corporate Governance > Financials Master Data Management: Charts of Accounts


 Feature: Automated distribution to consuming
 systems
Delivered by Business Function FIN_MDM_ACC
     Sets of changes of an edition are distributed to several systems.
     Distribution preferably by enterprise SOA services (or upload and download)




Master Data                           Corporate                  Master Data                            Master Data                       Corporate
  Admin                              Accountant                   Steward                                 Admin                          Accountant




                                                               Ap-
                                                                            Exe-
                                                     Create     prove
                                                                              cute     Final                                             Distribute
              Create edition                         Change       by
                                                                             chan-     Approval       Release edition
                                                    Request     busi-
                                                                            ges                                                           edition
                                                              ness

                                                                                                Master Data Governance for Financials
 Customer business challenges                                                               Business value
     Distribution of the master data into the operative systems                                 Significant automation of the distribution process: reduce
      (example: new general ledger in SAP ERP Financials) and                                     manual work and leverage fast close.
      the system(s) performing the group close (like EC-CS and
      SEM-BCS)
Agenda




  Introduction and Overview                          6. Procurement and Logistics Execution
  1. Analytics                                              6.1 Procurement
                                                            6.2 Inbound and Outbound Logistics
          1.1 Financial Analytics
                                                            6.3 Inventory and Warehouse Management
          1.2 Strategic Enterprise Management
  2. Financials                                      7. Product Development and Manufacturing
          2.1    Financial Supply Chain Management          7.1   Life-cycle Data Management
                                                            7.2   Manufacturing Execution
          2.2    Corporate Governance
                                                            7.3   Product Development
          2.3    Financial Accounting
                                                            7.4   Production Planning
          2.4    Treasury
                                                            7.5   General
  3. Human Capital Management
          3.1 Talent Management
                                                     8. Sales and Service
                                                            8.1 General
          3.2 Workforce Process Management
          3.4 General                                       8.2 Sales Order Management
                                                     9. Cross SAP ERP
  4. End-user Service Delivery
  5. Corporate Services
          5.1    Enterprise Asset Management
          5.2    Project and Portfolio Management
          5.3    Quality Management
          5.4    Real Estate Management
          5.5    Travel Management
Financials > Financial Accounting


 Credit Card Encryption: Periodic Key
 Exchange
 Support of periodic exchange of encryption keys for payment cards
 Benefits                                                                                 PCA_KEYV
    Improvement of the security settings in SAP ERP for credit card handling




                                                                                                                             Target Users for this Business
 New Features                       Description
                                                                                                                             Function

 Periodic key exchange                 New key versions for credit card encryption can be generated with a new                 Administrator triggering the
                                        transaction.                                                                             key exchange and
                                       It is possible to create an unlimited number of key versions.                            scheduling migration
                                       The system always uses the most recent version of the key for new encryptions.           programs
                                       For decryption, old key versions are still used as long as data records for
                                        encrypted payment cards that
                                       have been encrypted using the old version still exist in the system.
                                       The encrypted, stored credit card data can be migrated to the new key version, and
                                        the key versions that are no longer used can be deleted.
Financials > Financial Accounting > Credit Card Encryption: Periodic Key Exchange


 Feature: Periodic key exchange

Delivered by Business Function PCA_KEYV
     New key versions for credit card encryption can be generated with a new transaction.
     It is possible to create an unlimited number of key versions.
     The system always uses the most recent version of the key for new encryptions.
     For decryption, old key versions are still used as long as data records for encrypted payment cards that
     have been encrypted using the old version still exist in the system.
     The encrypted, stored credit card data can be migrated to the new key version, and the key versions that
      are no longer used can be deleted.
AR clerk
                                                                                            Receivables Management
                                                                                            and Payment Handling
                   Capture                               Encrypted storage                     Masked display                       Track users
                    Credit
                    Data
                                                             of credit
                                                            card data               *           of credit card
                                                                                                     data
                                                                                                                                  accessing the
                                                                                                                                  decrypted data

                                                                                                                                   * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                           Business value
     The Payment Card Industry Data Security Standard (PCI                                The credit card key exchange improves secure handling of
      DSS) standard comprises requirements for secure                                       payment card data. In addition to the existing functionalities
      handling of credit card data for systems or applications.                             of an encrypted storage of credit card data in the system,
      Besides others, which are already fulfilled by SAP ERP                                masked display of credit data in user interfaces, and so on,
      and industry applications, it requires that encryption keys                           the keys to encrypt payment data can be exchanged
      are exchanged periodically and are finally destroyed,                                 periodically and keys that are not used any more can be
      which is provided with this feature.                                                  deleted.
Financials > Financial Accounting


 Billing and Invoicing


 Enablement of Event Detail Records (EDR) Billing and Convergent Invoicing with FI-CAX
 Benefits                                                                                 FICAX_BILL_INVOICING
    This business function enables the connection of billing, invoicing, and contract accounts for customers outside of traditional industries. Bill calculation
     enables you to receive and bill process-priced transactions (event detail records) with good performance. You can process priced transactions together
     with additional data (example: from order management) to create structured bill content, which are then forwarded to the invoicing process. The creation
     of convergent invoices over multiple services and product lines will provide one bill to the customer.




                                                                                                                               Target Users for this Business
 New Features                       Description
                                                                                                                               Function

 Import billing accounts               Import billing accounts from external systems: extract business partner items in          Operative employee
 and event detail records               delta mode, dunning history in delta mode, and SAP NetWeaver BI content based
                                        on business partner items and dunning history. Import event detail records from
                                        external systems: import EDRs that are created in a rating system and process
                                        EDRs according to various categories. A comprehensive enhancement concept
                                        supports definition of project-specific EDR categories.

 Creation of billing orders            Billing cycles, such as monthly on the 15th day of the month, can be used. Billing        Operative employee
 and billing documents                  orders are generated and processed by the billing process. When a billing account
                                        is billed, a billing period is created, which defines which EDRs are to be billed.
                                        Billing in FI-CA also supports the billing of non-EDR-based invoice component.
                                        When a billing account is billed, a billing period is created, which defines which
                                        EDRs are to be billed. Billing in FI-CA also supports the billing of non-EDR-based
                                        invoice components, such as a basic charge of a service charge. Billing
                                        documents are forwarded to the invoicing process.
Financials > Financial Accounting > Billing and Invoicing


 Feature: Import billing accounts and event
 detail records
Delivered by Business Function FICAX_BILL_INVOICING
     Import billing accounts from external systems: extract business partner items in delta mode, dunning
      history in delta mode, and SAP NetWeaver BI content based on business partner items and dunning
      history. Import event detail records from external systems: import EDRs that are created in a rating system
      and process EDRs according to various categories. A comprehensive enhancement concept supports
      definition of project-specific EDR categories.



                                                                 Billing  Invoicing and Presentment

           Receive                         Maintain
                                                              Create               Receive               Create              Create
             and                            Billing
                                                              billing             data from            Invoicing            posting
            store                          account
                                                            documents              Billing            documents            documents
            EDR‟s                           facts


 Customer business challenges                                             Business value
     Communication between customer relationship                            Efficient import of billing accounts, integration with SAP
      management (CRM) and the billing system.                                CRM, fast and efficient import and storage of EDRs, and
      Communication between rating and billing systems.                       integration with rating system
Financials > Financial Accounting > Billing and Invoicing


 Feature: Creation of billing orders and billing
 documents
Delivered by Business Function FICAX_BILL_INVOICING
     Billing cycles, such as monthly on the 15th day of the month, can be used.
     Billing orders are generated and processed by the billing process. When a billing account is billed, a billing
      period is created, which defines which EDRs are to be billed.
     Billing in FI-CA also supports the billing of non-EDR-based invoice component. When a billing account is
      billed, a billing period is created, which defines which EDRs are to be billed.
     Billing in FI-CA also supports the billing of non-EDR-based invoice components, such as a basic charge of
      a service charge. Billing documents are forwarded to the invoicing process.

                                                                 Billing  Invoicing and Presentment

           Receive                         Maintain
                                                              Create               Receive               Create               Create
             and                            Billing
                                                              billing             data from            Invoicing             posting
            store                          account
                                                            documents              Billing            documents             documents
            EDR‟s                           facts


 Customer business challenges                                             Business value
     Effective creation of billing documents including EDRs and             Fast and efficient creation of billing orders to enable
      non-EDR-based invoice components                                        grouping and aggregation of EDRs.
                                                                             Effective processing of bills.
                                                                             Integration of non-EDR-based invoice components.
                                                                             Standard interface to invoicing process.
Financials > Financial Accounting


 CO, Allocations


 Prior-Year Rates for Timesheet Corrections
 Benefits                                                                                     CO_ALLOCATIONS
    Allows organizations with multiple sources of funding to report funds usage correctly when timesheet corrections are required outside of the current
     period. Allows the activity rates and overhead rates to be read on the valuation date (prior-year rate) rather than the current calendar period, so that
     costs corrected following a timesheet adjustment are properly stated. Also allows realtime calculation of overhead costs rather than treating this
     calculation as part of the period close process.

                                                                                                                                 Target Users for this Business
 New Features                       Description
                                                                                                                                 Function

 Value retrospective                   Federal agencies allow timesheet corrections in the 13 months preceding the                 Timesheet managers and
 timesheet changes at                   document date. If a retrospective change is made to the number of hours worked,              cost accountants who need
 prior-year rates                       the rate selected for the associated activity allocation should not be the activity          to make retrospective
                                        rate valid at the time of posting, but the activity rate valid on the key date for the       corrections
                                        change. Where complex funding sources with multiple funding types and varying
                                        expiration timeframes are in place, the funding should also be updated based on
                                        the prior-period account adjustments. Follow-on functions, such as overhead
                                        calculation, should also be based on the values used for time recording.
Financials > Financial Accounting > CO, Allocations


 Feature: Value retrospective timesheet
 changes at prior-year rates
Delivered by Business Function CO_ALLOCATIONS
     Federal agencies allow timesheet corrections in the 13 months preceding the document date. If a
      retrospective change is made to the number of hours worked, the rate selected for the associated activity
      allocation should not be the activity rate valid at the time of posting, but the activity rate valid on the key
      date for the change. Where complex funding sources with multiple funding types and varying expiration
      timeframes are in place, the funding should also be updated based on the prior-period account
      adjustments. Follow-on functions, such as overhead calculation, should also be based on the values used
      for time recording.
Employee                              Time Manager      Cost Accountant   Employee
                                                                                     Managing Employee Time and Attendance
                                                                                     Overhead Cost Management and ABC/M
                                                           Charge for               Record                                   Reverses Initial
      Record Working                                                                                                        Charge and Value
                                                         Times Worked            Changes to
       Times to Cost                      Transfer to                                                   Transfer to        New Working Times
       Center/Project
       (and Approve)
                                          Controlling
                                                              and
                                                             Apply
                                                           Overhead
                                                                                   Working
                                                                                   Time in
                                                                                 Prior Period   *       Controlling          with Prior Year
                                                                                                                           Rates. Recalculate
                                                                                                                               Overhead         *
 Customer business challenges                                               Business value                                * Improvements
     Where multiple funding types and multiple funding sources                 Correct recording of fund usage in complex public sector
      are common, funding usage must be extremely accurate.                      organizations. Increased accuracy in cost center accounting.
      If timesheet changes have to be made retroactively, the
      funds usage must be adjusted to reflect the charge rate
      current at the time of the original data entry to the time
      sheet. This process currently requires the modification
      described in SAP Note 699524.
Financials > Financial Accounting


 Contract Accounts A/R and A/P, 02


 Generic Development and Enhancements in the Area of Contract Accounting
 Benefits                                                                                    FICAX_CI_2
    Generic enhancements in contract accounting: enhancements for installment plans, enhanced revenue distribution, business partner locks
     enhancements, new mass activity for credit card payments, group items for automatic clearing, new features for mass activities, use of ledger groups for
     doubtful receivables, new archiving objects, new extractors into SAP NetWeaver BI, and services for legal dunning and external cash desk


                                                                                                                              Target Users for this Business
 New Features                       Description
                                                                                                                              Function

 Enhancements for                      Calculate interest at creation of an installment plan. Calculation and posting of        Accountant
 installment plans                      fines, fees, and inflation surcharge based on the original items. Special reporting
                                        tool for installment plans which allows the open item evaluation to take the
                                        deferred due dates into account.

 New mass activity for                 The new mass activity for revenue distribution permits automatic posting of              Accountant
 revenue distribution                   distributions. Two reports for analysis are also offered.

 New mass activity for                 Automatically mass-process credit card payments                                          Accountant
 credit card payments
Financials > Financial Accounting


 Contract Accounts A/R and A/P, 02



                                                                                                                         Target Users for this Business
 New Features                       Description
                                                                                                                         Function

 New features for mass                 In mass activities you can predefine a preselection, use generic variants, and      Accountant
 activities                             configure log classes


 Use ledger groups for                 You can use ledger groups for doubtful receivables                                  Accountant
 doubtful receivables


 New extractors into SAP               Payment and returns history can be extracted to SAP NetWeaver BI                    Accountant
 NetWeaver BI


 Service for legal dunning             You can use an enterprise service to communicate with external collection           Collector
                                        agencies and legal dunning organizations


 Manage correspondence               Configure correspondence types                                                        Collection agencies
 in interaction center               Compose outbound correspondence
                                     Provide document management services
Financials > Financial Accounting


 Contract Accounts A/R and A/P, 02



 Improvements of                                                                                                              Target Users for this Business
                                    Description
 existing features                                                                                                            Function

 Business partner locks                You can set preconfigured end-dates for business locks. Authorization concept is         Accountant
 enhancements                           used at creation of business locks

 Group items for                       You can group selected items at automatic clearing                                       Accountant
 automatic clearing

 New archiving objects                 You can archive revenue distribution and doubtful receivables documents                  Accountant and system
                                                                                                                                  administrator

 Extended service for                  Additional features of the enterprise service for external cash desks to be used in      Cashier and collector
 external cash desks                    an internal scenario

 Define champion and                   The new feature allows defining test series for champion and challenger collection       Collection agencies
 challenger collection                  strategies. For a certain percentage of your champion collection strategies, you
 strategies                             can define challenger strategies, which are then assigned to the master data
                                        groups.

 Enhanced revenue                      Consider distribution rates to distribute revenues, open items, and unassigned           Revenue agencies
 distribution                           payments to final recipients

 Fund accounting                     FM derivation and update: the reconciliation account is replaced in the FM                 Accountants
 integration                          derivation by the general ledger account that results from account determination.
                                     Grant-enabled FICA: the grant field can be used as an input field when posting
                                      FICA documents using transaction FPE1.
                                     GM Update: The Order, Cost Center, and WBS element are made available in the
                                      Grants Management Update for the receivable/payable line(s) coming from FICA.
                                     Splitting of Business Partner Lines: The user can enter one Business Partner Line
                                      and more than one General Ledger Lines and the system splits the Business
                                      Partner Line into as many lines as General Ledger Lines in the document.
Financials > Financial Accounting > Contract Accounts A/R and A/P, 02


 Feature: Enhancements for installment plans

Delivered by Business Function FICAX_CI_2
     Calculate interest at creation of an installment plan. Calculation and posting of fines, fees, and inflation
      surcharge based on the original items. Special reporting tool for installment plans which allows the open
      item evaluation to take the deferred due dates into account.




AR clerk
                                                                                 Credit Risk and Collections Management:
                                                                                 Managing Deferrals and Installment Plans

                                                         Identify business           Display open                      Create new
            Identify account
                                                            agreement                   items                       installment plan
                                                                                                                                      *
                                                                                                                       * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                Business value
     Enhancements of the installment plan functionality, which                 Because receivables with a due date more than one year in
      is necessary to fulfill Brazilian market requirements.                     the future have to be reported separately; installment plans
      Covers mail order business requirements for representing                   are considered in year-end closing
      long-term payment agreements by installment plans up to
      several years.
Financials > Financial Accounting > Contract Accounts A/R and A/P, 02


 Feature: New mass activity for revenue
 distribution
Delivered by Business Function FICAX_CI_2
     The new mass activity for revenue distribution permits automatic posting of distributions. Two reports for
      analysis are also offered.




AR clerk
                                                                                      Receivables Management and Payment
                                                                                      Handling: Distributing Revenues
                                                                                             Forward
            Select items for                                                                                            Analyze revenue
             final recipient
                                                          Post distribution
                                                                              *             payments
                                                                                        to final recipient
                                                                                                                          distribution

                                                                                                                           * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                     Business value
     Lacking automation in revenue distribution                                     Automation of event-based revenue and cost distribution in
                                                                                      scenarios like season ticketing with enhanced deferred
                                                                                      revenues functionality
Financials > Financial Accounting > Contract Accounts A/R and A/P, 02


 Feature: New mass activity for credit card
 payments
Delivered by Business Function FICAX_CI_2
     Automatically mass-process credit card payments




AR clerk
                                                                                 Receivables Management and Payment
                                                                                 Handling: Processing Card Payments
                                                   Identify                                                       Clarify
                                                                                              Check status
           Create card                              source              Process                               payments that
               lot                               of payment
                                                 information
                                                                        card lot
                                                                                    *         of processed
                                                                                                   lot
                                                                                                                could not
                                                                                                               be assigned
                                                                                                             * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                               Business value
     Missing mass activity for credit card payments                            Automation
Financials > Financial Accounting > Contract Accounts A/R and A/P, 02


 Feature: New features for mass activities

Delivered by Business Function FICAX_CI_2
     In mass activities you can predefine a preselection, use generic variants, and configure log classes




                                                                                              Receivables Management
                                                                                              and Payment Handling

                                                                                              Credit Risk and Collections
                                                                                              Management




 Customer business challenges                                           Business value
     Usability of mass activities                                         Usability and automation
Financials > Financial Accounting > Contract Accounts A/R and A/P, 02


 Feature: Use ledger groups for doubtful
 receivables
Delivered by Business Function FICAX_CI_2
     You can use ledger groups for doubtful receivables




AR clerk
                                                                          Receivables Management and Payment Handling:
                                                                          Handling Doubtful and Irrecoverable Debts
                                                                        Adjust value of
                   Classify doubtful                                                                           Write off outstanding
                     receivables
                                                                         outstanding
                                                                         receivables            *                      items

                                                                                                                          * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                   Business value
     No ledger groups for doubtful receivables                                    Usability and more flexible handling of doubtful receivables
Financials > Financial Accounting > Contract Accounts A/R and A/P, 02


 Feature: New extractors into SAP NetWeaver
 BI
Delivered by Business Function FICAX_CI_2
     Payment and returns history can be extracted to SAP NetWeaver BI




AR clerk
                                                                            Receivables Management and Payment Handling:

              Create                               Process                  Check status                 Clarify
                                                                                                        returns             Print
              returns
                lot
                                                    return
                                                      lot               *   of processed
                                                                                  lot
                                                                                                     that could not
                                                                                                     be processed
                                                                                                                      correspondence


                                                                                                                      * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                     Business value
     No extraction of payment and returns history to SAP                             Better analytics
      NetWeaver BI
Financials > Financial Accounting > Contract Accounts A/R and A/P, 02


 Feature: Service for legal dunning

Delivered by Business Function FICAX_CI_2
     You can use an enterprise service to communicate with external collection agencies and legal dunning
      organizations




Collections Manager
                                                                             Credit Risk and Collections Management:
                                                                             Interacting with External Collection Agencies
                                                                                                      Recall               Process
             Submit                              Submit                       Write-off
           receivables
                               *                master data
                                                                        *   receivables
                                                                                                    submitted
                                                                                                      items        *      incoming
                                                                                                                         information    *
                                                                                                                       * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                     Business value
     No interface for legal dunning and external collections                        Standardized communication
      agencies
 Financials > Financial Accounting > Contract Accounts A/R and A/P, 02


  Feature: Manage correspondence in
  interaction center
Delivered by Business Function FICAX_CI_2
      Configure correspondence types
      Compose outbound correspondence
      Provide document management services




Collections Agent
                                                                         Credit Risk and Collections Management:
                                                                         Determination and Execution of Collection Activities

            Execute dunning                               Release dunning                                                       Print
                activity                                      activity
                                                                                              Check log
                                                                                                                          correspondence
                                                                                                                                               *
                                                                                                                             * Improvements
  Customer business challenges                                                     Business value
      Depending on its collection procedures, a collection                            The new feature allows collection agencies to set up new
       agency needs to maintain various correspondence types                            correspondence types flexibly for collection purposes and
                                                                                        use them in the context of SAP Collections Management
Financials > Financial Accounting


 General Ledger Accounting 2

 Improved Business Process Control and Data Quality with Parallel Accounting and Additional
 Account Assignments
 Benefits                                                                                       FIN_GL_CI_2
    Customers will have more control and transparency in terms of fast close and parallel accounting




                                                                                                                               Target Users for this Business
 New Features                       Description
                                                                                                                               Function

 Profit center assignment              You can check the profit center assignment in sales order items and in real estate        Users who are responsible
 monitor                                objects (RE-FX). You can select the items and objects with specific profit center          for profit center-related
                                        assignments or with missing assignments. You can get an overview list of all               reporting
                                        items and objects.

 Validation of                        possibly resulting in accepted entries that are incoherent. Example: a commission          Accounting departments
 combinations of new                  fee for a swap is to be entered against an HR cost center. Both account and cost             running a lot of feeder
 G/L characteristics                  centers are valid, but from a business point of view the posting does not make               systems and sending
                                      sense.                                                                                       posting documents to the
                                     The assumption that all these semantic controls are done in the feeder application           G/L (banking, insurance, and
                                      does not protect against errors in manual postings or in the feeder applications             retail )
                                      themselves. That is especially true in applications not fully integrated with the G/L.
                                     This function simplifies this semantic check of GL posting data entry
Financials > Financial Accounting


 General Ledger Accounting 2

 Improvements of                                                                                                                Target Users for this Business
                                    Description
 existing features                                                                                                              Function

 Guided procedure for                  The wizards are a step-by-step aid to perform the document split customizing. The          Users implementing
 document split                         advantage over following the IMG is that the system performs checks and                     document split customizing
 configuration                          document simulation on the basis of existing documents.

 Drill-down reporting                  Additional drill-down functionalities from financial reports into controlling and          Financial accountants,
 from FI to CO                          financial reports. Profit center and origin object type (example: cost center)              controllers, and persons
                                        information is a source for further drill-down into controlling reports. The target         responsible for profit
                                        reports are called via a reporting interface. Target reports can be standard reports,       centers
                                        custom or specific reports, and transactions.

 Ledger group-specific               You can select documents according to ledger or ledger group within EhP 4 using              Users who run reporting on
 display of documents                 standard reports RFBELJ00, RFBELJ00_NACC, and RFBUEB00                                        FI documents
                                     You can use the selection for customer-defined reports that are related to logical
                                      database BRF

 Separate check of                   At the end of the period, closing activities are executed. Using CO real-time                Personnel in the financial
 posting periods for                  integration, CO creates postings that update FI. Up to now, the FI posting period             and controlling departments
 postings from CO to FI               had to remain open when postings from CO to FI are performed.
                                     This function now allows handling CO and FI posting periods separately. CO and
                                      FI postings can be checked against a new posting period interval.

 Ledger-specific check of              Using the ledger approach within the new G/L in SAP ERP, each accounting                   Personnel in the financial
 posting periods                        principle is represented by its own ledger. In general, the leading financial               department
                                        statement - relevant for the consolidated financial statement - needs to be
                                        completed earlier than the local financial statement.
                                       A different fiscal year variant using a different financial statement date can be
                                        assigned to each ledger.
                                       Therefore posting periods shall be handled ledger-specifically.
                                       Up to now, a posting to several ledgers was checked only against the posting
                                        period of the representative ledger.
                                       This function offers an option to check a posting to several ledgers (accounting
                                        principles) against the posting period variants of each ledger.
 Financials > Financial Accounting > General Ledger Accounting 2


  Feature: Profit Center Assignment Monitor

 Delivered by Business Function FIN_GL_CI_2
      You can check the profit center assignment in sales order items and in real estate objects (RE-FX).
      You can select the items and objects with specific profit center assignments or with missing assignments.
      You can get an overview list of all items and objects.



Profit Center
Responsible
                                                                       New General Ledger and Profit Center Accounting


                         Sales and Distribution
                                                                              New General Ledger and Profit
                                   Or
                      Flexible Real Estate (RE-FX)
                                                                                   Center Accounting
                                                                                                                         *
                                                                                                            * Improvements
  Customer business challenges                                     Business value
      When correct profit center assignments are missing,            Using this overview, you can find and correct missing
       postings are incomplete or incorrect. That causes               assignments more easily.
       problems, especially when a profit-and-loss statement or
       balance sheet on the profit center level is required.
 Financials > Financial Accounting > General Ledger Accounting 2


  Feature: Validation of Combinations of New
  G/L Characteristics
Delivered by Business Function FIN_GL_CI_2
      Postings to FI containing combinations of additional account assignments possibly result in accepted
       entries but are incoherent from the business point of view. Example: A commission fee for a swap is to be
       entered against an HR cost center. Both account and cost centers are valid, but from a business point of
       view the posting does not make sense.
      The assumption that all these semantic controls are done in the feeder application does not protect against
       errors in manual postings or in the feeder applications themselves.
      This function simplifies this semantic check of GL posting data entry.
Accounting Clerk                                                   Cost Center Responsible
                                                                                  New General Ledger and Profit Center Accounting


                    New General Ledger and Profit                                                     Cost Center
                         Center Accounting
                                                                              *                       Accounting

  Customer business challenges                                               Business value
                                                                                                                 * Improvements
      Accounting is the only source of truth of validated data,                 When entering an accounting entry, all fields are checked to
       because accountants are responsible for legal reporting. A                 see if they exist. However, combinations of the fields
       lot of statistical information (not purely relevant to statutory           entered are never checked for validity. Fast close: by
       accounting) is carried therefore by G/L accounting                         validating data individually and checking combinations of
       documents. This information must be valid and the                          data like product group and customer group, the accounting
       combination of several items of statistical information must               close is accelerated because postings are checked when
       be semantically correct, because reporting is based on                     they are created and not at month-end during the close.
       this accounting proof information. Incorrect combinations                  Discovery of incorrect reporting lines at month-end leads to
                                                                                  time-consuming research and manual adjustment. Properly
       of data can lead to incorrect reporting.
                                                                                  validated accounting information can reduce the time to
                                                                                  close by several days.
 Financials > Financial Accounting > General Ledger Accounting 2


  Feature: Guided Procedure for Document Split
  Validations
Delivered by Business Function FIN_GL_CI_2
      The wizards are a step-by-step aid to perform the document split customizing. The advantage over
       following the IMG is that the system performs checks and document simulation on the basis of existing
       documents.




Accounting Clerk                      Responsible for Customizing in Accounting
                                                                                      New General Ledger and Profit Center Accounting



                                               New General Ledger and Profit Center Accounting
                                                                                                                    *
                                                                                                                            * Improvements
  Customer business challenges                                                    Business value
      Customers had to be highly skilled in terms of document                       Faster and more consistent customizing of the document
       split customizing and functionality. Wizards now help                          split function
       understand the meaning of the relevant customizing views                      Better understanding of overall document split functionality
       better and give hints on how to perform more consistent
       customizing.
 Financials > Financial Accounting > General Ledger Accounting 2


  Feature: Drill-Down Reporting from FI to CO

Delivered by Business Function FIN_GL_CI_2
      Additional drill-down functionalities from financial reports into controlling and financial reports. Profit center
       and origin object type (example: cost center) information is a source for further drill-down into controlling
       reports. The target reports are called via a reporting interface. Target reports can be standard reports,
       custom or specific reports and transactions.



Accounting Clerk                                                   Cost Center Responsible
                                                                                  New General Ledger and Profit Center Accounting


                    New General Ledger and Profit                                                     Cost Center
                         Center Accounting
                                                                              *                       Accounting

                                                                                                                         * Improvements
  Customer business challenges                                               Business value
      No drill-down capabilities from profit center reports into                Better reporting integration from FI to CO, value
       controlling reports; values at the profit center currently                 reconciliation between profit centers and cost objects (origin
       cannot be reconciled with controlling data                                 objects), transparency between FI and CO values, and less
                                                                                  reconciliation effort
 Financials > Financial Accounting > General Ledger Accounting 2


  Feature: Ledger group-specific Display of
  Documents
Delivered by Business Function FIN_GL_CI_2
      You can select documents according to ledger or ledger-group using the standard reports
       RFBELJ00, RFBELJ00_NACC and RFBUEB00.
      You can use the selection for customer-defined reports that are related to logical database BRF




Accounting Clerk
                                                                           New General Ledger and Profit Center Accounting



                                               New General Ledger and Profit Center Accounting
                                                                                                        *
                                                                                                                * Improvements
  Customer business challenges                                         Business value
      FI documents can be posted to a specific ledger group,             Customers running parallel accounting using the ledger
       but the reporting on documents previously provided only             approach covering different accounting principles can now
       selection via ledger. Therefore, some reports have been             select documents according to the ledger group and
       adapted so that the FI documents can also be selected via           increase transparency
       ledger group and a customer may sort the FI documents
       via the ledger group in the output list.
Financials > Financial Accounting > General Ledger Accounting 2


 Feature: Separate Check of Posting Periods
 for Postings from Co to FI
Delivered by Business Function FIN_GL_CI_2
     At the end of the period, closing activities are executed. Using CO real-time integration, CO creates
      postings that updates FI. Up to now, the FI posting period had to remain open when postings from CO to FI
      are performed. These postings can now be handled via a separate (new) posting period interval.




Responsible for Closing in CO                                     Accounting Clerk Responsible for Closing
                                                                                                                Local Close



                                   Closing in CO
                                                                                  *                          Closing in FI

                                                                                                                              * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                     Business value
     Checking the original FI postings and those being                              Period-end activities in the financial and controlling
      generated by controlling against one posting period                             department can be executed one after the other without the
      interval causes the following problems:                                         necessity of organizational coordination. Smooth period-end
      1. It opens the loophole that original FI postings still can                    closing process with fewer problems and errors can be
      be done - although from the viewpoint of finance, the                           executed. The time needed to close can be accelerated.
      period should already be closed and no further postings
      posted in FI.
      2. Controlling cannot ensure that there are no further
      postings in FI with cost elements to primary cost accounts
      before starting its period-end closing activities.
Financials > Financial Accounting > General Ledger Accounting 2


 Feature: Ledger-specific Check of Posting
 Periods
Delivered by Business Function FIN_GL_CI_2
     Using the ledger approach within the new G/L in SAP ERP, each accounting principle is represented by its
      own ledger. In general, the leading financial statement - relevant for the consolidated financial statement -
      needs to be completed at a different date than the local financial statement. A different fiscal year variant
      using a different financial statement date can be assigned to each ledger. Therefore posting periods shall
      be handled ledger-specifically. Up to now, a posting to several ledgers was checked only against the
      posting period of the representative ledger. This function offers an option to check a posting to several
      ledgers (accounting principles) against the posting period variants of each ledger.
  Accounting Clerk Responsible for Closing
                                                                                                      Local Close



                                                                  Closing in FI
                                                                                                            *
                                                                                                                     * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                            Business value
     From a system point of view, closing activities for all               The financial department can postpone the local close; the
      accounting principles need to be finished at the same time             consolidated close is to be finished at a different time. Using
      and can‟t be handled independently. The posting period of              different fiscal year variants for different accounting
      the parallel accounting principles are determined based on             principles, the system checks for each accounting principle
      those of the leading accounting principle. Using different             (ledger) if the posting period is opened. A smooth period
      fiscal year variants for different accounting principles, it is        end-closing process with fewer problems and less
      necessary to check the posting periods for each                        organizational coordination can be executed. The time of
      accounting principle so that no postings affect the books              close can be determined by each accounting principle.
      of already closed (previous) periods.
Financials > Financial Accounting


 Information Life-Cycle Management: Tax
 Auditing
 Archive the Data of a System to Be Decommissioned
 Benefits                                                                                  FIN_ACC_ILM
    The original system can be retired. The financial data, including master data and customizing data, will be stored in a separate archive system. It is
     possible to analyze the data at any time in the future in the retention warehouse.



                                                                                                                               Target Users for this Business
 New Features                       Description
                                                                                                                               Function

 Archive context data                  In addition to the normal archive process, the context data (master data and              System administrator
                                        customizing) can also be stored in a archive system
Financials > Financial Accounting > Information Life-Cycle Management: Tax Auditing


 Feature: Archive context data

Delivered by Business Function FIN_ACC_ILM
     In addition to the normal archive process, the context data (master data and customizing) can also be
      stored in a archive system




Accounting    Responsible for                   System           Responsible for
  Clerk          input for the                Administrator      Customizing and
               relevant data to                                  system activities            ILM – Information Lifecycle Management
              be archived from
                  Accounting

                 Archive                                                                            Retrieve
                                                               Archive                                                                 BI
              transactional

  * Improvements
                  data                     *                  master data
                                                                                      *              data for
                                                                                                  BI Reporting      *              Reporting (*)

                                                                                                                               (*) Content is planned
 Customer business challenges                                                             Business value                   to be available for EhP5
     Decommission an SAP system                                                             Reduce total cost of ownership
Financials > Financial Accounting


 Integration FI-CA/CRM Dispute Management


 Integration of Dispute Management in FI-CA and SAP CRM
 Benefits                                                                              FICA_FSCM_CRM_DISPUTE
    Integration of dispute management in FI-CA with dispute management in SAP CRM




                                                                                                               Target Users for this Business
 New Features                       Description
                                                                                                               Function

 Integration of dispute                Enables integration of dispute management in FI-CA and SAP CRM            Dispute managers and
 management in FI-CA                                                                                               collectors
 with dispute
 management in SAP
 CRM
Financials > Financial Accounting > Integration FI-CA/CRM Dispute Management


 Feature: Integration of dispute management in
 FI-CA with dispute management in SAP CRM
Delivered by Business Function FICA_FSCM_CRM_DISPUTE
     Enables integration of dispute management in FI-CA and SAP CRM




Call centre Agent
                                                                                       FI-CA: Managing Disputes
                                                                                       (Dispute Management)

               Display Bill                              Create Dispute
                                                                               *         Process Dispute
                                                                                                            *           Close Dispute
                                                                                                                                         *
                                                                                                                         * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                      Business value
     Missing integration of dispute management in FI-CA and                          Integration of dispute management in FI-CA and SAP CRM
      SAP CRM
Financials > Financial Accounting


 Partly Exempt Organizations


 Handling of Value-Added Tax (VAT) for Partly Exempt Organizations
 Benefits                                                                                    FIN_ACC_PEO
  This business function allows organizations with partly exempt organizations, which handle VAT tax differently to the rest of the entity, to implement fast,
   easy to use and profitable tax-exempt business scenarios. For a partly exempt organization, tax reporting can be carried out to justify the tax exemption
   and deduction rate. With this information, the sales tax statement can be filed with the tax office. Partly exempt organizations can be used in the privat
  sector and in the public sector.



                                                                                                                               Target Users for this Business
 New Features                       Description
                                                                                                                               Function

 Tax handling for partly               With this feature, you can map in the system the company areas that are                   All customers who run partly
 exempt organization                    completely or partially exempt from paying tax. You can define special tax codes           exempt organizations
                                        for these areas and create tax reports as proof for the tax office. In addition, you
                                        can use a program for supplementary tax adjustments for variable tax deduction
                                        rates.
Financials > Financial Accounting > Partly Exempt Organizations


 Feature: Tax handling for partly exempt
 organization
Delivered by Business Function FIN_ACC_PEO
     With this feature, you can map in the system the company areas that are completely or partially exempt
      from paying tax. You can define special tax codes for these areas and create tax reports as proof for the
      tax office. In addition, you can use a program for supplementary tax adjustments for variable tax deduction
      rates.



AR clerk




                                      Tax reporting                                 Tax on sales/purchases
                                                                                                                   *
                                                                                                            * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                     Business value
     Handling of value-added tax (VAT) for partly exempt            Allows the handling of value-added tax (VAT) for partly
      organizations                                                   exempt organizations
     Difficulties in preparing the sales tax statement for the
      local tax authority when running partly exempt
      organizations
Financials > Financial Accounting


 FI Localization Topics for Japan and Portugal

 Performance Improvement with Adobe Page-Split Functionality for Asset Accounting Reports:
 New Functions for Invoice Summary
 Benefits                                                                                  FIN_LOC_CI_2
    Asset accounting: performance enhancement, property tax, and MAPAS fiscais reports are required because of the expected high volume of pages to
     be printed (up to 50,000). The development is related to splitting output into smaller jobs (up to 200 pages each).



                                                                                                                        Target Users for this Business
 New Features                       Description
                                                                                                                        Function

 Accessibility and                     The output of the report programs would be displayed in Adobe form, which          Corporate accounting
 performance                            makes the reports compliant with accessibility. Performance of the report has
 improvement with SAP                   been improved with the new Adobe split functionality.
 Interactive Forms
Financials > Financial Accounting > FI Localization Topics for Japan and Portugal


 Feature: Accessibility and performance
 improvement with SAP Interactive Forms
Delivered by Business Function FIN_LOC_CI_2
     The output of the report programs would be displayed in Adobe form, which makes the reports compliant
      with accessibility. Performance of the report has been improved with the new Adobe split functionality.




 Customer business challenges                                                       Business value
     Performance pressure in running reporting and inflexibility                      Performance optimization for running reports and improved
      when tuning the length of PDF report                                              processing capacity
Financials > Financial Accounting


 FI Localization Topics for Japan and
 South Korea
 Localization for Continues Improvement of Tax Report and Automatic Payment Program
 Benefits                                                                               FIN_LOC_CI_4
    Legal compliance for South Korean against specific local time dependently fields for vendor and customers; Improve payment running efficiency and
     accuracy for South Korea customers, Improve system process automation and data consistency.



                                                                                                                          Target Users for this Business
 New Features                       Description
                                                                                                                          Function

 Enhancement of Korean               1. Maintain the Korean specific fields (VAT reg.no. Tax code1, type of business,       Impact all customers
 Tax Report and                       type of industry, Representative name) in vendor & customer master time-
 Automatic Payment                    dependently.
                                     2. To determine a due date of BOE and payment method automatically depending
                                      on a business type of vendor during the automatic payment program.
Financials > Financial Accounting > FI Localization Topics for Japan and South Korea


 Feature: Enhancement of Korean Tax Report
 and Automatic Payment
Delivered by Business Function FIN_LOC_CI_4
     1. Maintain the Korean specific fields (VAT reg.no. Tax code1, type of business, type of industry,
      Representative name) in vendor &customer master time-dependently.
     2. To determine a due date of BOE and payment method automatically depending on a business type of
      vendor during the automatic payment program.




 Customer business challenges                                                          Business value
     Legal compliance risks, high payment running efforts and                            Minimize manual adjustment and improve system
      costs                                                                                automation, improve data consistency.
Index




  Introduction and Overview                          6. Procurement and Logistics Execution
  1. Analytics                                              6.1 Procurement
                                                            6.2 Inbound and Outbound Logistics
          1.1 Financial Analytics
                                                            6.3 Inventory and Warehouse Management
          1.2 Strategic Enterprise Management
  2. Financials                                      7. Product Development and Manufacturing
          2.1    Financial Supply Chain Management          7.1   Life-cycle Data Management
                                                            7.2   Manufacturing Execution
          2.2    Corporate Governance
                                                            7.3   Product Development
          2.3    Financial Accounting
                                                            7.4   Production Planning
          2.4    Treasury
                                                            7.5   General
  3. Human Capital Management
          3.1 Talent Management
                                                     8. Sales and Service
                                                            8.1 General
          3.2 Workforce Process Management
          3.4 General                                       8.2 Sales Order Management
                                                     9. Cross SAP ERP
  4. End-user Service Delivery
  5. Corporate Services
          5.1    Enterprise Asset Management
          5.2    Project and Portfolio Management
          5.3    Quality Management
          5.4    Real Estate Management
          5.5    Travel Management
Financials > Treasury


 Bank Communication Management


 Improve Compliance for Corporate-To-Bank Communication
 Benefits                                                                           FIN_FSCM_BNK
    Enables standardization and automation of corporate to bank communication
    Enhanced straight-through-processing (STP) rates
    Companies get an accurate and real-time view of their payment transactions
    Transparent management of outgoing payments with no breaches on internal controls
    Readiness for SEPA and UNIFI/ISO20022 standard

                                                                                                                    Target Users for this Business
 New Features               Description
                                                                                                                    Function

 Simplified and enhanced       Improved integration with cash management                                              Corporate treasurers
 bank communication            Automated triggering of follow-up activities via BAdI
 management                    Indicate urgent payments in the payment monitor
                               Improved service-enabling
                               New services for paymemt advice
                               Enhanced SEPA support
                               Enhanced reporting capabilities
                               Capability to assign additional approval users for dual control (Security)

 Bank Communication            Close integration with enterprise application functionality                            Corporate treasurers and
 Management                    Logical structuring of payments into batches                                            payment factory
 (Enhancement                  Multiple approval levels for outgoing payments
 Package 2)                    Audit trail for payment approval decisions along with digital signatures for
                                internal audit
                               Analysis of payment status information and full payment-flow transparency as well
                                as status monitoring for bank statements
                               SWIFTNet Integration
Financials > Treasury > Bank Communication Management


 Feature: Simplified and enhanced bank
 communication management
Delivered by Business Function FIN_FSCM_BNK
     Improved integration with cash management
     Automated triggering of follow-up activities via BAdI
     Indicate urgent payments in the payment monitor
     Improved service-enabling
     New services for paymemt advice
     Enhanced SEPA support
     Enhanced reporting capabilities
     Capability to assign additional approval users for dual control (Security)

AR clerk
                                                                              Cash Management, Central Payments with In-House
                                                                              Cash, Processing Outbound Payments Using Bank
                                                                              Communication Management, Cash Manager
                                                                                                        Send                 Update
                                      Initiate             Batch                Approve
           Invoice
                                     payments            payments
                                                                      *        payments
                                                                                            *         payment
                                                                                                       media
                                                                                                                             status
                                                                                                                             monitor
                                                                                                                      * Improvements
                                                                                                                                         *
 Customer business challenges                                             Business value
     Payment data is highly sensitive and requires sophisticated            Standardization and automation of corporate to bank
      security processes to meet ever-increasing regulatory                   communication
      mandates                                                               Optimization of processes and increased payment flow
     Security gaps during payment file transfer (authorization,              transparency through status monitoring
      signature, and encryption are often not part of the solution)          Enhanced straight-through-processing (STP) rates with end-to-
     High levels of manual processing, productivity losses,                  end SWIFTNet integration
      excessive exception handling, and an overall lack of                   Reduced maintenance costs by using global payment standards
      transparency into payment flows                                        Includes ES bundle for the creation and status tracking of
     Missing straight-through processing                                     payment orders as well as bank statements
                                                                             Readiness for SEPA and ISO20022
Financials > Treasury > Bank Communication Management


 Feature: Bank Communication Management
 (Enhancement Package 2)
Delivered by Business Function FIN_FSCM_BNK
     Close integration with enterprise application functionality
     Logical structuring of payments into batches
     Multiple approval levels for outgoing payments
     Audit trail for payment approval decisions along with digital signatures for internal audit
     Analysis of payment status information and full payment-flow transparency as well as status monitoring for
      bank statements
     SWIFTNet Integration
AR clerk
                                                                           Cash Management, Central Payments with In-House
                                                                           Cash, Processing Outbound Payments Using Bank
                                                                           Communication Management, Cash Manager
                                                                                                 Send               Update
                                      Initiate            Batch             Approve
           Invoice
                                     payments           payments
                                                                   *       payments
                                                                                      *        payment
                                                                                                media     **        status
                                                                                                                    monitor
                                                                                                               Improvements
                                                                                                                              *
 Customer business challenges                                          Business value
     Payment data is highly sensitive and requires                     Streamlined communication with house banks over a single
      sophisticated security processes to meet ever-increasing           communication channel (seamless SWIFTNet integration)
      regulatory mandates                                               Dramatically reduced TCO
     Security gaps during payment file transfer (authorization,        Significantly improved straight-through processing
      signature, and encryption are often not part of the               Increased payment flow transparency through status
      solution)                                                          monitoring of payments and bank statements
     High levels of manual processing, productivity losses,            Enhanced compliance through multiple approval levels for
      excessive exception handling, and an overall lack of               outgoing payments
      transparency into payment flows
     Missing straight-through processing
Financials > Treasury


 CLM-CM, Additional Account Assignments


 Split Results of Cash Position and Liquidity Forecast with Additional Accounting Dimensions
 Benefits                                                                                  FIN_TRM_CM_DIMENSIONS
    Enhanced reporting capabilities of cash position and liquidity forecast by additional selection of general and industry-specific fields




                                                                                                                                 Target Users for this Business
 New Features                  Description
                                                                                                                                 Function

 Additional account             The SAP Cash Management instruments for cash position and cash forecast are                        Public sector industries with
 assignments for cash            enhanced with new accounting dimensions. By using these dimensions, the                             a need for reporting by fund
 reporting                       reports can be split according to business area (can now be turned off), segment,                   and grant
                                 profit center, fund, and grant. If new general ledger accounting is active in FI and               Customers using additional
                                 document splitting is                                                                               assignments profit center,
                                performed there for FI documents for the relevant account assignments (business                     segment
                                 area, segment, profit center, fund, and grant), you can define for which account
                                 assignments in cash management the system should consider document splitting.
Financials > Treasury > CLM-CM, Additional Account Assignments


 Feature: Additional account assignments for
 cash reporting
Delivered by Business Function FIN_TRM_CM_DIMENSIONS
     The SAP Cash Management instruments for cash position and cash forecast are enhanced with new
      accounting dimensions. By using these dimensions, the reports can be split according to business area
      (can now be turned off), segment, profit center, fund, and grant. If new general ledger accounting is active
      in FI and document splitting is
     performed there for FI documents for the relevant account assignments (business area, segment, profit
      center, fund, and grant), you can define for which account assignments in cash management the system
      should consider document splitting.
               AR Clerk                                          Cash Manager
                                                                                        Cash Management


             Process Bank                                Analyze Bank                          Forecast                      Make Ad Hoc
              Statement                                     Status
                                                                                *              Liquidity
                                                                                                               *              Payment

                                                                                                                               * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                       Business value
     Demand for splitting the results of cash position and                            Enhanced reporting capabilities of cash position and liquidity
      liquidity forecast with additional accounting dimensions                          forecast by additional selection of general and industry-
                                                                                        specific fields
Financials > Treasury


 TRM, Hedge and Exposure Management,
 SWIFT
 Hedge and Exposure Mgmt. for Commodities, Integration with Analyzer,
 Straight through processing via correspondence monitor for MT300/MT500 Series
 Benefits                                                                            FIN_TRM_LR_FI_AN_2
    Enables customers to handle commodity exposure and do hedge management and accounting for commodities
    Enable customers to calculate value at risk and net present values for exposure positions
    IFRS 7 reporting
    New product type for forward transactions on securities
    Straight-through processing of MT3xx and MT5xx messages as well as confirmation-matching process

                                                                                                                         Target Users for this Business
 New Features              Description
                                                                                                                         Function

 Exposure management          Exposure management delivers an option to upload foreign currency and                        Treasury department
                               commodity exposures from various sources to group and track them over their                  Commodity trading desk
                               lifetime and use them as hedge items in hedge management. The exposures of the
                                                                                                                            Risk manager
                               exposure management could be used to calculate NPVs or VAR in the market risk
                               analyzer, which then are needed for effectiveness testing or reporting.

 Correspondence               Supports correspondence process in the area of confirmation handling, trading,               Treasury manager, asset
 monitor                       and settlement - flexible output channel (MT and FAX) . Supports MT formats: MTs              management department,
                               300, 320, 395, 399, 502, 509, 515, 536, 540, 541, 542, 543, 544, 545, 546, 547, and 548       and middle office
                                                                                                                             department

 Hedge of commodity           Offers the option to use hedge accounting for commodity positions coming from                Treasury department
 positions                     exposure management by using commodity paper deals (futures and forwards)                    Accounting department
                               from the transaction manager
                                                                                                                            Risk management

 New effectiveness test       Regression analysis compliance and reporting for IAS39 and FAS 133 hedge                     Treasurer, risk manager, and
 method                        accounting standards in the area of effectiveness testing. This tool allows a hedge           compliance officer
                               effectiveness test based on linear regression analysis of exposure, hedge item,
                               and hedging instrument.

 Forward security             -Supports the life cycle of a forward security transaction (rollover, advance                Asset management
 transaction                   maturity, delivery at maturity, dividend adjustment, and cash or physical delivery),          department, accountants,
                               in compliance with several accounting principles                                              and treasury manager
Financials > Treasury


 TRM, Hedge and Exposure Management,
 SWIFT


 Improvements of                                                                                               Target Users for this Business
                        Description
 existing features                                                                                             Function

 Purchase GAAP             The need to report values based on P-GAAP (next to the historical figures) is         Group accountants
 accounting                 reflected by the introduction of three new book value components: value
                            adjustment gains (VAD gains), value adjustment losses (VAD losses), and original
                            value adjustment (original VAD).
Financials > Treasury > TRM, Hedge and Exposure Management, SWIFT


 Feature: Exposure management

Delivered by Business Function FIN_TRM_LR_FI_AN_2
     Exposure management delivers an option to upload foreign currency and commodity exposures from
      various sources to group and track them over their lifetime and use them as hedge items in hedge
      management. The exposures of the exposure management could be used to calculate NPVs or VAR in the
      market risk analyzer, which then are needed for effectiveness testing or reporting.




                                                                              Analyze
                                                                                        *     Operational Treasury Management

        Create and                     Create                                                                  Calculate
          update
        master data
                          *           Financial
                                     Transaction
                                                     *              Posting             Revaluation
                                                                                                      *      realized gain
                                                                                                                or loss
                                                                                                                                    Payment


                                                                                                                              * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                      Business value
     Exposures (either foreign currency or physical commodity)                        Manage and track the complete lifetime of uploaded
      lie in various systems and for hedging purposes they have                         exposures
      to grouped and tracked.                                                          Option use uploaded exposures as hedged items in hedge
     The change in a lifetime of a exposure position is not                            management to reduce manual interaction in hedge
      stored and available for auditors                                                 management
     Missing possibility to calculate net present values or value                     Helps get risk key figures for uploaded exposures
      at risk for exposure positions
Financials > Treasury > TRM, Hedge and Exposure Management, SWIFT


 Feature: Correspondence monitor

Delivered by Business Function FIN_TRM_LR_FI_AN_2
     Supports correspondence process in the area of confirmation handling and matching, trading and
      settlement process. There are various flexible output channels available (MT and FAX) .
     Supported MT formats (as a sample implementation): MT300, MT320, MT395, MT399, MT502, MT509,
      MT515, MT536, MT540, MT541, MT542, MT543, MT544, MT545, MT546, MT547 and MT548




                                                                              Analyze
                                                                                        *     Operational Treasury Management

        Create and                     Create                                                                  Calculate
          update
        master data
                                      Financial
                                     Transaction
                                                     *              Posting
                                                                              *         Revaluation
                                                                                                             realized gain
                                                                                                                or loss
                                                                                                                                   Payment


                                                                                                                             * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                      Business value
     Time-consuming, manual and error-prone process                                   Enables the customer to have real straight-through-
                                                                                        processing from deal capture via correspondence matching
                                                                                        to automatic accounting update.
                                                                                       Mitigates the risk of errors and therefore strengthens
                                                                                        compliance and enables a fast close
Financials > Treasury > TRM, Hedge and Exposure Management, SWIFT


 Feature: Hedge of commodity positions

Delivered by Business Function FIN_TRM_LR_FI_AN_2
     Offers the option to use hedge accounting for commodity positions coming from exposure management by
      using commodity paper deals (futures and forwards) from the transaction manager




                                                                              Analyze
                                                                                        *     Operational Treasury Management

        Create and                     Create                                                                    Calculate
          update
        master data
                                      Financial
                                     Transaction
                                                     *              Posting
                                                                              *         Revaluation
                                                                                                      *        realized gain
                                                                                                                  or loss
                                                                                                                               *       Payment


                                                                                                                                   * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                      Business value
     Hedge accounting for commodity positions                                         Ability to do hedge accounting and management for
                                                                                        commodity, FX, and interest risks in one solution and
                                                                                        therefore to have only a single source of truth for hedge
                                                                                        management and hedge accounting
Financials > Treasury > TRM, Hedge and Exposure Management, SWIFT


 Feature: New effectiveness test method

Delivered by Business Function FIN_TRM_LR_FI_AN_2
     Regression analysis compliance and reporting for IAS39 and FAS 133 hedge accounting standards in the
      area of effectiveness testing. This tool allows a hedge effectiveness test based on linear regression
      analysis of exposure, hedge item, and hedging instrument.




                                                                              Analyze
                                                                                        *      Operational Treasury Management

        Create and                     Create                                                                     Calculate
          update
        master data
                                      Financial
                                     Transaction
                                                                    Posting
                                                                              *         Revaluation
                                                                                                       *        realized gain
                                                                                                                   or loss
                                                                                                                                *       Payment


                                                                                                                                    * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                      Business value
     Existing hedge effectiveness tests like dollar-offset method                     With regression analysis, you can evaluate an hedge
      were unable to test effectiveness over multiple data points                       relationship using a retrospective or prospective
      in a period                                                                       effectiveness test and calculate data points in the period.
                                                                                        Regression analysis tool allows you to set parameters like
                                                                                        slope, intercept, R-squared and adjusted R-square, T-
                                                                                        statistic, and F-statistic, to determine the effectiveness of the
                                                                                        hedging relationship.
Financials > Treasury > TRM, Hedge and Exposure Management, SWIFT


 Feature: Forward security transaction

Delivered by Business Function FIN_TRM_LR_FI_AN_2
     Supports the life cycle of a forward security transaction (rollover, advance maturity, delivery at maturity,
      dividend adjustment, and cash or physical delivery), in compliance with several accounting principles




                                        Portfolio Manager           Accountant                 Risk Manager
                                                                                                         Financial Asset Management


             Asset                         Portfolio                 Portfolio                   Portfolio                Statutory
           Allocation                     Management                Accounting                  Controlling               Reporting


 Customer business challenges                                               Business value
     Time-consuming and manual process does not manage                         Straight-through processing: option to hedge the market
      risk and compliance                                                        price risk of an underlying; management of risk and
                                                                                 compliance
Financials > Treasury


 TRM, Hedge Management for FAM

 Streamlined Hedge Management Process to Eliminate Market Price Risk for Securities in Terms
 of Business and Accounting
 Benefits                                                                        FIN_TRM_INS_HM
  First option to hedge securities by using forward security transactions
  Streamlines hedge management processes to ensure compliance Seamless integration of hedge management into accounting and position management
   to ensure a fast close
  Easy-to-use tracking of effectiveness and risk analysis with extensive logging functionality



                                                                                                                  Target Users for this Business
 New Features             Description
                                                                                                                  Function

 Position management         Security position is split up according to different subpositions. That enables a      Financial asset management
 and accounting               customer to differentiate between hedged portions of a security and freestanding        department, accountants,
                              portions.                                                                               and risk manager

 Effectiveness test of       Retrospective and prospective effectiveness tests are prerequisites to the use of      Financial asset management
 hedging relationships        hedge accounting. The effectiveness test uses the dollar-offset-method to               department, accountants,
                              calculate the effectiveness of a hedging relationship. The effectiveness test can       and risk manager
                              also be executed from the master data of the hedging relationship.

 Hedging relationship        Hedging relationships are used to assign hedged items (securities) to hedging          Financial asset management
                              instruments (forward security transactions). If prerequisites (examples:                department, accountants,
                              documentation and effectiveness test) are satisfied, the hedging relationship can       and risk manager
                              be designated, and hedge accounting regulations can be used. As long as the
                              hedging relationship is fulfilling the requirements for hedge accounting, the
                              respective posting rules are used.

 Documentation of            Within hedging relationships, users can create documentation automatically or          Financial asset management
 hedging relationships        manually (upload or enter). The documentation is one of the prerequisites for the       department, accountants,
 (hedged item and             use of hedge accounting. The documents are stored with the document                     and risk manager
 hedging instrument)          management service.
SAP for Insurance -> Financial Asset Management > Portfolio Accounting


  Feature: Position Management and Accounting

Delivered by Business Function FIN_TRM_INS_HM
       Security position is split up according to different subpositions. That enables a customer to differentiate
        between hedged portions of a security and freestanding portions.
       Postings are created according to hedge accounting regulations, if the prerequisites are met.




                                            Portfolio Manager            Accountant                   Risk Manager




               Asset                           Portfolio                  Portfolio                     Portfolio                Statutory
             Allocation                       Management                 Accounting                    Controlling               Reporting


Customer business challenges                                                    Business Value
   Up to now, customers who wanted to hedge financial assets                        Streamlined, integrated process for hedging financial assets
    had to execute a tedious, manual, and therefore error-prone                       within SAP software.
    process without the support of SAP software
SAP for Insurance -> Financial Asset Management > Portfolio Accounting, Portfolio Controlling


  Feature: Effectiveness Test of Hedging
  Relationships
Delivered by Business Function FIN_TRM_INS_HM
       Retrospective and prospective effectiveness tests are prerequisites to the use of hedge accounting.
       The effectiveness test uses the dollar-offset-method to calculate the effectiveness of a hedging
        relationship.
       The effectiveness test can also be executed from the master data of the hedging relationship.



                                             Portfolio Manager                        Accountant                    Risk Manager




               Asset                             Portfolio                              Portfolio                      Portfolio                 Statutory
             Allocation                         Management                             Accounting                     Controlling                Reporting


Customer business challenges                                                                    Business Value
   Significant manual effort to calculate the dollar-offset ratio                                 Streamlined, integrated process of executing effectiveness
    outside the SAP software. Results of the effectiveness test                                     tests (prospective and retrospective) within the system by
    are stored outside the SAP software. Financial assets,                                          using market data.
    hedging relationship, and effectiveness test are currently not                                 The results are stored and a history is available.
    linked or reportable at a customer site.
SAP for Insurance -> Financial Asset Management


    Feature: Hedging Relationships

Delivered by Business Function FIN_TRM_INS_HM
       Hedging relationships are used to assign hedged items (securities) to hedging instruments (forward
        security transactions).
       If prerequisites (examples: documentation and effectiveness test) are satisfied, the hedging relationship
        can be designated, and hedge accounting regulations can be used. As long as the hedging relationship is
        fulfilling the requirements for hedge accounting, the respective posting rules are used


                                          Portfolio Manager   Accountant                  Risk Manager




              Asset                           Portfolio        Portfolio                     Portfolio                Statutory
            Allocation                       Management       Accounting                    Controlling               Reporting


Customer business challenges                                         Business Value
   Use of external tools to store the information on hedged              Reduced number of external tools
    items and hedging instruments to enable posting the results           Seamless integration of hedging relationships within position
    manually to the general ledger                                         management by using subpositions to distinguish between the
   Lack of reporting capabilities on the levels of hedging                freestanding part of securities and the already designated or
    relationships, hedged items, and hedging instruments.                  hedged portions.
                                                                          Documentation and effectiveness tests are stored related to
                                                                           the hedging relationship and can be reported.
SAP for Insurance -> Financial Asset Management > Portfolio Accounting


  Feature: Documentation of Hedging
  Relationships
Delivered by Business Function FIN_TRM_INS_HM
       Within hedging relationships, users can create documentation automatically or manually (upload or enter).
       The documentation is one of the prerequisites for the use of hedge accounting.
       The documents are stored with the document management service




                                            Portfolio Manager            Accountant                   Risk Manager




               Asset                           Portfolio                  Portfolio                     Portfolio                 Statutory
             Allocation                       Management                 Accounting                    Controlling                Reporting


Customer business challenges                                                    Business Value
   Documentation had to be stored outside SAP software.                             By connecting the documentation of the designation and the
    Because the documentation is one of the parts that auditors                       hedging relationship within SAP software, customers have a
    investigate, the manual effort needed for storage and linking                     single point of entry for information gathering during audits.
    to the business cases was significant and error-prone.                            Documentation can be easily created by using the automatic
   The automatic creation options significantly reduce the                           functionality based on PDF forms.
    effort.
Agenda




  Introduction and Overview                          6. Procurement and Logistics Execution
  1. Analytics                                              6.1 Procurement
                                                            6.2 Inbound and Outbound Logistics
          1.1 Financial Analytics
                                                            6.3 Inventory and Warehouse Management
          1.2 Strategic Enterprise Management
  2. Financials                                      7. Product Development and Manufacturing
          2.1    Financial Supply Chain Management          7.1   Life-cycle Data Management
                                                            7.2   Manufacturing Execution
          2.2    Corporate Governance
                                                            7.3   Product Development
          2.3    Financial Accounting
                                                            7.4   Production Planning
          2.4    Treasury
                                                            7.5   General
  3. Human Capital Management
          3.1 Talent Management
                                                     8. Sales and Service
                                                            8.1 General
          3.2 Workforce Process Management
          3.4 General                                       8.2 Sales Order Management
                                                     9. Cross SAP ERP
  4. End-user Service Delivery
  5. Corporate Services
          5.1    Enterprise Asset Management
          5.2    Project and Portfolio Management
          5.3    Quality Management
          5.4    Real Estate Management
          5.5    Travel Management
Human Capital Management


 Human Capital Management
 Business Functions (1/4)
    Value Proposition for SAP ERP HCM enhancements within SAP Enhancement Package 4 for SAP ERP
    A new, compelling user interface streamlines activities in the area of talent management (e.g. performance management). Besides, new
    and innovative functionality for preparing and conducting talent review meetings as well as for leveraging talent profiles and development
    plans is now available. Additional enhancements allow customers to more efficiently handle mass employee processes and organizational
    changes.




Description                                                                                Target Customers

   HCM, Performance Management 01:                                                           Customers who are using this application in an active
    Performance management (also known as objective setting and appraisals) has                mode
    additional functional and usability enhancements that address cascading goal              Customers who want to set up and align corporate,
    capabilities, enhanced SAP Learning Solution integration, and a user interface for a       departmental, and team goals
    specific performance management process.
                                                                                              Customers who want to set courses as mandatory and
                                                                                               directly book courses in an appraisal document
                                                                                              Customers who want to use this user interface for a
                                                                                               specific performance management process

   HCM, SAP E-Recruiting 2:                                                                  Customers who are implementing or live on
    User interface for SAP E-Recruiting, Web services for third-party services,                SAP E-Recruiting 6.0
    candidate profile, improved handling of all activities and mass activities, and           Customers looking to improve the quality of hires through
    search user interface                                                                      more effective screening and selection
                                                                                              Customers who want to provide a better candidate
                                                                                               experience

   HCM, Core Processes in Talent Management:                                                 Customers who focus on succession management and
    Delivery of core processes in talent management for managing succession and                review and development of talent
    developing talent                                                                         Customers who wish to prepare and perform these
                                                                                               processes in a reasonable time with the support of a tool
Human Capital Management


 Human Capital Management
 Business Functions (2/4)

Description                                                                                  Target Customers

   HCM, Learning Solution 02:                                                                  1. Existing customers of SAP Learning Solution/
          1. Portal role for training administrators                                            SAP Enterprise Learning.
          2. Learning management for team                                                      2. Customers who are using training and SAP Event
          3. Concurrent & global employment support                                             Management but not SAP Learning Solution/
          4. Rapid content publishing                                                           SAP Enterprise Learning.
          5. BI data source for course appraisals 6. Offline course distribution.
      The above features are available with both SAP Learning Solution (LSO) & Enterprise
       Learning (EL)
      (SAP EL = SAP LSO 600 + Enhancement Pack 2 + Virtual Learning Room feature)

   TNM/LSO Integration:                                                                        SAP Learning Solution customers who require training
    SAP Learning Solution objects (curriculum type (DC) and course program (EK)), are            needs management
    supported in training needs management (TNM)

   CA, Appraisals, Evaluations and Surveys 01:                                                 Customers who are using this cross-application
    An additional user interface has been provided to enable the creation and                    component in an active mode
    maintenance of appraisals, evaluations, and surveys based on Web Dynpro ABAP.               Customers who do want to use this Web Dynpro ABAP
                                                                                                 user interface for Performance Management (also known
                                                                                                 as Objective Setting and Appraisals) to create appraisal
                                                                                                 documents.

   CA, Employee Qualifications for Concurrent/Global Employment:                               Customers who are using concurrent or global
    New functional capabilities have been provided that enable handling of employee              employment in an active mode
    qualifications for concurrently or globally employed employees                              Customers who want to use qualifications with
                                                                                                 concurrently or globally employed employees

   HCM, Enterprise Compensation Management 01:                                                 Customers who use Enterprise Compensation
    New functionality enhances the compensation planning and approval process with               Management in active mode
    multilevel approval, notifications, and tracking; additional reporting capabilities;        Certain enhancements require active use of SAP
    and support for HR administration for mass changes of matrix values and                      Manager Self-Service
    additional configuration options.
                                                                                                Customers who wish to reduce administrative costs
                                                                                                 associated with compensation processes
Human Capital Management


 Human Capital Management
 Business Functions (3/4)

Description                                                                                 Target Customers

   HCM, Administrative Services 02:                                                           Customer with first experiences in maintaining HR
      1. Continuous improvements: enhanced test report, business statuses, and processes       employee data with SAP Interactive Forms who wants to
       w/o object                                                                               enhance this concept in the direction of PD objects and
      2. Processes for PD objects: organizational unit, position, and job                      mass handling of employee processes
      3. Mass process start and fast data entry by with HR administrator portal role

   HCM, Time and Labor Management for Concurrent Employment:                                  SAP ERP customers in public sector, higher education,
    Further support of concurrent employment in time management, time entry on                  and health care for all countries for which SAP provides a
    multiple personnel assignments via CATS regular, enhancements to time                       concurrent employment solution. Concurrent employment
    manager's workplace, and enablement of further functions and operations in                  customers who use time management.
    RPTIME01

   CATS classic for Concurrent Employment:                                                    SAP ERP customers in public sector, higher education,
    Concurrent employment relates to functionality for employees who have several               and health care for all countries in which SAP provides a
    personnel assignments within one company. This business function enables the                concurrent employment solution
    employees to record their working times for all personnel assignments in one
    cross-application time sheet (CATS classic).

   HCM, Personnel Actions for Concurrent Employment:                                          Concurrent Employment Customers
    Enhanced transaction PA40 for multiple personnel assignments



   HCM Localization Topics for the Swedish Public Sector:                                     Public sector organizations in Sweden
    SAP ERP HCM localization for the public sector in Sweden
      Concurrent employment
      Collective agreements for PS
      Legal reporting for PS

   HCM Localization Topics for the Italian Public Sector:                                     All Italian public sector organizations: national, regional,
    SAP HCM localization for public sector in Italy                                             and local governments, including defense, public security,
                                                                                                healthcare, and education
Human Capital Management


 Human Capital Management
 Business Functions (4/4)

Description                                                                            Target Customers

   HCM Localization Topics for Spain:                                                    Enhanced payroll processing for Spain
    SAP HCM localization enhancements for Spain
      Off-cycle payroll for Spain



   HCM Localization Topics for Norway:                                                   EDB is an ASP solution provider and a partner company
    SAP ERP HCM localization topics for Norway:                                            to SAP in Norway
    Basics for the municipality sector, which includes multiple position handling in
    master data and the corresponding payroll handling. It also includes pension
    handling with a new infotype and corresponding payroll handling.

   HCM Localization Topics for Japan:                                                    Ajinomoto runs SAP R/3 Enterprise and plans to upgrade
    SAP ERP HCM localization enhancements for Japan:                                       to SAP ERP 2005 in 2008
      Pension (Japan)
      Flexible payroll (Japan)
Index




  Introduction and Overview                          6. Procurement and Logistics Execution
  1. Analytics                                              6.1 Procurement
                                                            6.2 Inbound and Outbound Logistics
          1.1 Financial Analytics
                                                            6.3 Inventory and Warehouse Management
          1.2 Strategic Enterprise Management
  2. Financials                                      7. Product Development and Manufacturing
          2.1    Financial Supply Chain Management          7.1   Life-cycle Data Management
                                                            7.2   Manufacturing Execution
          2.2    Corporate Governance
                                                            7.3   Product Development
          2.3    Financial Accounting
                                                            7.4   Production Planning
          2.4    Treasury
                                                            7.5   General
  3. Human Capital Management
          3.1 Talent Management
                                                     8. Sales and Service
                                                            8.1 General
          3.2 Workforce Process Management
          3.4 General                                       8.2 Sales Order Management
                                                     9. Cross SAP ERP
  4. End-user Service Delivery
  5. Corporate Services
          5.1    Enterprise Asset Management
          5.2    Project and Portfolio Management
          5.3    Quality Management
          5.4    Real Estate Management
          5.5    Travel Management
Human Capital Management > Talent Management


 CA, Appraisals, Evaluations and Surveys 01

Simplification of User Interfaces Based on the Cross-Application Component for Appraisals,
Evaluations, and Surveys
 Benefits                                                                               CA_HAP_CI_1
    Simplified appraisal document overview/entry page for appraisers. As part of the page, mass creation of appraisal documents can be enabled.
    Simplified appraisal document overview/entry page for appraisees.
    Web access for administrators to administer appraisal documents.
    Enhanced process support, easier status handling and changed layout of appraisal documents (example: tab configuration possible).



                                                                                                                          Target Users for this Business
 New Features                 Description
                                                                                                                          Function

 Simplified user interface       This cross-application component can be used as basis for having a WebDynpro               Appraisers, appraisees, and
                                  user interface for Performance Management. Simplification includes:                         administrators who want to
                                   Web entry page to access appraisal documents (work list view). From there appraisal       maintain or view appraisal
                                    documents can be created, accessed, or downloaded. If enabled, mass creation of           documents.
                                    appraisal documents is possible.
                                   Web page for administrators to administer appraisal documents. (Example: It can be
                                    defined which elements to group under which tab in the appraisal template.)
                                   Overview of the appraisal document's progress and easier status handling in the
                                    appraisal document
Human Capital Management > Talent Management > CA, Appraisals, Evaluations and Surveys 01


 Feature: Simplified user interface

Delivered by Business Function CA_HAP_CI_1
     This cross-application component can be used as basis for having a WebDynpro user interface for
      Performance Management. Simplification includes:
         Web entry page to access appraisal documents (work list view). From there appraisal documents can be created,
          accessed, or downloaded. If enabled, mass creation of appraisal documents is possible.
         Possibility for administrators to administer appraisal documents. (Example: It can be defined which elements to group
          under which tab in the appraisal template.)
         Overview of the appraisal document's progress and easier status handling in the appraisal document
                                                                 Line manager Employee

                                                                                                Managing & Aligning Employee
                                                                                                Performance

                   Define goals
                                                *                            Review goals
                                                                                                         *                   Appraise goals
                                                                                                                                                    *
                                                                                                                                     * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                               Business value
     Cumbersome maintenance of appraisal documents: users                                     Customers can choose the simplified user interface, a more
      had difficulties in seeing where they were in the process                                 user-friendly display, and easier use of appraisal documents
      and the next step of the process.
     Layout limitations: note fields were quite small and
      different elements could not be grouped under one tab to
      have a more structured appraisal document
Human Capital Management > Talent Management


 CA, Employee Qualifications for
 Concurrent/Global Employment
Qualification Enablement to Support Concurrent and Global Employment
 Benefits                                                                             CA_PA_CE_GE_QUALI
    Eliminates time-consuming and expensive administrative tasks
    Ensures accurate employee records
    Offers more precise information on an employee's existing qualification


                                                                                                                    Target Users for this Business
 New Features                 Description
                                                                                                                    Function

 Qualifications at person      Qualifications are maintained at person ID level and not for every personnel           Managers and
 ID level                       assignment                                                                              administrators who maintain
                               All authorized employees have access to all qualifications of the employee              or view an employee's
                                (independent of personnel assignment)                                                   qualifications
                               If a qualification is created, changed, delimited, or deleted, the change will be      Employees who maintain or
                                effective for all personnel assignments                                                 view their qualifications
                               Transactions and reports (like profile match-up) dealing with qualifications to
                                show them at the person ID level
Human Capital Management > Talent Management > CA, Employee Qualifications for Concurrent/Global Employment


 Feature: Qualifications at person ID level

Delivered by Business Function CA_PA_CE_GE_QUALI
     Qualifications are maintained at person ID level and not for every personnel assignment
     All authorized employees have access to all qualifications of the employee (independent of personnel
      assignment)
     If a qualification is created, changed, delimited, or deleted, the change will be effective for all personnel
      assignments
     Transactions and reports (like profile match-up) dealing with qualifications to show them at the person
      ID level

                                                                                               Foundation Topic (no process assignment)




 Customer business challenges                                                             Business value
     Cumbersome maintenance of qualifications for                                            Reduction of administration effort; qualifications are not
      concurrently or globally employed employees                                              maintained several times for the same employee
     Incorrect or irritating handling of qualifications in profile                           Applications dealing with qualifications (like profile match-
      match-up in case of concurrently employed employees                                      up) are able to show and maintain qualifications at the
                                                                                               physical person level in a proper and holistic manner
Human Capital Management > Talent Management


 HCM, Core Processes in Talent Management

Empowers Managers, HR, and Talent to Update and Prepare Talent-Related Information
Accurately and Efficiently
 Benefits                                                                             HCM_TMC_CI_1
  Ensures accurate talent data when required in various business processes of talent management
  Allows system-supported decision makingAddresses the needs of casual users involved in the talent management processes through appealing, user-
   friendly services
  Tailored processes for different roles according to context and business need



                                                                                                                          Target Users for this Business
 New Features                 Description
                                                                                                                          Function

 Enhancements in job           The job architecture is enhanced by two new objects, the functional area and the             Talent management
 architecture and               job family. A job family allows users to group one or several jobs (or positions);            specialists
 organizational                 the functional area allows users to group one or more job families. Qualifications
 foundation                     can be stored on each level. Those belonging to a functional area can be inherited
                                to job families; those on a job family to jobs. Qualifications on jobs are inherited to
                                positions.
                               Positions and jobs can be marked as key positions and jobs for succession
                                planning.

 Talent profile                This functionality allows users to update the talent-relevant information of an              Managers
                                employee accurately                                                                          Talent management
                               New and richer information can be entered                                                     specialists
                               Update can be performed by managers, talent management specialists, or                       Employees
                                employees, depending on the context
Human Capital Management > Talent Management


 HCM, Core Processes in Talent Management



                                                                                                                         Target Users for this Business
 New Features                 Description
                                                                                                                         Function

 Talent review                   The functionality of talent reviews allows users to prepare and conduct talent            Managers
                                  review meetings                                                                           Talent management
                                 The preparation allows users to define the participants and easily link talent who         specialists
                                  will be discussed as agenda topics
                                 Before the meeting takes place managers need to assess their talents according to
                                  performance and potential.
                                 In addition, handouts for preparation can be printed
                                 A talent review meeting allows users to discuss and review talents interactively by
                                  viewing talent data
                                 Interactive calibration of talents is allowed as well as the storage of confirmed
                                  results

 Succession planning             This feature allows users to determine key positions                                      Talent management
                                 It allows to view update succession information, such as identifying successors            specialists
                                  for key positions                                                                         Managers
                                 It can rank successors by priority and determine their readiness for a key position
                                 It can compare successors with others and with key position requirements
                                 It provides an ability to monitor the successor bench strength of key positions at a
                                  glance

 Talent development            The development of talent requires development plans to be set up as a follow-up            Managers
                                to review meeting or succession decisions                                                   Talent management
                               Various types of development actions can be set up.                                          specialists
                               Progress and quality can be measured on actions or plans
Human Capital Management > Talent Management > HCM, Core Processes in Talent Management


 Feature: Enhancements in job architecture
 and organizational foundation
Delivered by Business Function HCM_TMC_CI_1
     The job architecture is enhanced by two new objects, the functional area and the job family. A job family
      allows users to group one or several jobs (or positions); the functional area allows users to group one or
      more job families. Qualifications can be stored on each level. Those belonging to a functional area can be
      inherited to job families; those on a job family to jobs. Qualifications on jobs are inherited to positions.
     Positions and jobs can be marked as key positions and jobs for succession planning.


       Head of Line of Business               Talent Management Specialist




           Business design
                                                     Define Objects                                 Assign                        Flag positions or
                  of
           Job Architecture           *             and Qualifications
                                                                                  *               Qualifications
                                                                                                                       *             jobs as key
                                                                                                                                                        *
                                                                                                                                     * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                             Business value
     The previous job architecture lacked additional grouping                               Provides the flexibility to group jobs and positions according
      options and was sometimes considered too static.                                        to more flexible criteria and views
      Customers often considered creating grouping options on
      their own.
Human Capital Management > Talent Management > HCM, Core Processes in Talent Management


 Feature: Talent profile

Delivered by Business Function HCM_TMC_CI_1
     This functionality allows users to update the talent-relevant information of an employee accurately
     New and richer information can be entered
     Update can be performed by managers, talent management specialists, or employees, depending on the
      context



                Employee                                Manager                           Talent Management Specialist       Head of Line of Business




                                                       Review/amend                               Review/amend
             Maintain own                                                                                                             View Talent
             talent profile
                                      *                talent profile of
                                                        direct reports            *               talent profile of
                                                                                                      talents            *              Profile
                                                                                                                                                        *
                                                                                                                                      * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                             Business value
     Inability to keep talent data accurate for critical processes                          Store and update talent data in a single source
      (example: talent reviews)                                                              Ability to retrieve accurate data quickly when required
     Tedious consolidation of data from multiple sources and
      programs
Human Capital Management > Talent Management > HCM, Core Processes in Talent Management


 Feature: Talent review

Delivered by Business Function HCM_TMC_CI_1
  The functionality of talent reviews allows users to prepare and conduct talent review meetings
  The preparation allows users to define the participants and easily link talent who will be discussed as agenda topics
  Before the meeting takes place managers need to assess their talents according to performance and potential.
  In addition, handouts for preparation can be printed
  A talent review meeting allows users to discuss and review talents interactively by viewing talent data
  Interactive calibration of talents is allowed as well as the storage of confirmed results



      Talent Management Specialist                      Manager                                 Management Team             Talent Management Specialist




              Set-up and                               Conduct Talent
                                                                                                 Conduct Talent                    Conduct Follow-
            prepare Talent
            Review Meeting            *               Assessments for
                                                         all Talents              *              Review Meeting
                                                                                                                       *            Up Activities
                                                                                                                                                           *
                                                                                                                                     * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                             Business value
     Time-consuming preparation                                                             Interactively review and calibrate talent and follow the
     Conducting meetings based on paper or with a static                                     changes and agreements on talent with the projected
      presentation                                                                            screens
Human Capital Management > Talent Management > HCM, Core Processes in Talent Management


 Feature: Succession planning

Delivered by Business Function HCM_TMC_CI_1
     This feature allows users to determine key positions
     It allows to view update succession information, such as identifying successors for key positions
     It can rank successors by priority and determine their readiness for a key position
     It can compare successors with others and with key position requirements
     It provides an ability to monitor the successor bench strength of key positions at a glance


        Head of Line of Business                         Manager                                Management Team          Talent Management Specialist




                                                                                                   Review and
                                                         Nominate                                                                   Maintain
               Define Key                                                                           approve
               Positions
                                      *                 Succession
                                                        Candidates                *                Succession
                                                                                                   Candidates       *              approved
                                                                                                                                  Successors            *
                                                                                                                                  * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                             Business value
     Lack of user-friendly, graphically appealing interfaces to                             Address the needs of HR users and managers who wish to
      view and especially to maintain information on succession                               safeguard selected key positions efficiently
Human Capital Management > Talent Management > HCM, Core Processes in Talent Management


 Feature: Talent development

Delivered by Business Function HCM_TMC_CI_1
     The development of talent requires development plans to be set up as a follow-up to review meeting or
      succession decisions
     Development plans can be set for different periods
     Various types of development actions can be set up.
     Progress and quality can be measured on actions or plans


                Employee                                Manager                                 Management Team           Talent Management Specialist




             Maintain career                                                                        Decide on
                                                      Conduct Talent                                                               Maintain
             aspirations and
              talent profile          *                Assessment
                                                                                  *                development
                                                                                                     actions          *        Development Plan
                                                                                                                                                         *
                                                                                                                                   * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                             Business value
     Setting up development actions for special programs                                    Set up and monitor the development of talent
Human Capital Management > Talent Management


 HCM, Enterprise Compensation Management
 01
Additional Functional Enhancements for Enterprise Compensation Management
 Benefits                                                                             HCM_ECM_CI_1
    Customers now have an option to use:
    Enhanced planning and approval functionality
    Additional reporting capabilities
    Enhanced HR administrator functionality

                                                                                                                          Target Users for this Business
 New Features                 Description
                                                                                                                          Function

 Enhanced planning and           A new planning overview screen displays the planning information on an                     The higher level manager
 approval functionality           organizational level, including an overview of the budget information (allocated,           who approves the planning
                                  spent, and deltas). The user can drill down to view data for the organizational             for subordinate managers.
                                  hierarchy, view the status of approval (including tracking of changes made to the
                                  planning by subordinate managers), view the planning data for the employees for
                                  organization(s), and approve on organizational level. Notifications and multilevel
                                  approval process are customizable by the customer.

 Improvements of                                                                                                          Target Users for this Business
                              Description
 existing features                                                                                                        Function

 Additional HR reporting         There are several reports to support HR with administering the compensation                HR and compensation
 capabilities                     process. The reports support the planning process and progress (example: data               administrators
                                  on the status of planning by manager and organization), auditing the process
                                  (example: tracking of infotype 759), and additional administration tasks (example:
                                  changes made to compensation data).

 Enhanced HR                     The HR administrator is provided enhanced functionality to make changes                    HR and compensation
 administration                   (adjustments, deletion, and so on) to certain compensation records en masse.                administrators
 functionality                    Corresponding reports for the functionality is noted in the additional HR reporting
                                  capabilities feature. In addition, functionality supports changes to guideline matrix
                                  values en masse.
Human Capital Management > Talent Management > HCM, Enterprise Compensation Management 01


 Feature: Enhanced planning and approval
 functionality
Delivered by Business Function HCM_ECM_CI_1
     A new planning overview screen displays the planning information on an organizational level, including an
      overview of the budget information (allocated, spent, and deltas). The user can drill down to view data for
      the organizational hierarchy, view the status of approval (including tracking of changes made to the
      planning by subordinate managers), view the planning data for the employees for organization(s), and
      approve on organizational level. Notifications and multilevel approval process are customizable by the
      customer.
                                                                           Manager

                                                                                            Managing Employee Compensation

            Start Central                           Monitor Central                                                               Adjust Central
            Compensation
           Review Process
                                                    Compensation
                                                    Review Process            *                Monitor Budgets
                                                                                                                    *             Compensation
                                                                                                                                 Review Process       *
 Customer business challenges                                                         Business value                               * Improvements
     Lack of flexibility and functionality to support the planning                        Increased flexibility and functionality to support the planning
      and approval process to allow for multilevel approval and                             and approval process that allows for multilevel approval and
      direct changes to the planning by higher level managers.                              direct changes to the planning by higher level managers.
     Lack of budget roll-up and allocation information which is
      needed to supports managers with the planning and
      approval of their organizational hierarchy.
Human Capital Management > Talent Management


 HCM, Learning Solution 02


Simplify Learning Management with SAP Learning Solution
 Benefits                                                                             HCM_LSO_CI_2
 1. Course administrator portal role provides a simpler and more effective means of performing day-to-day training activities.
 2. Managers can actively manage the learning activities of their teams.
 3. Varying training needs of learners with concurrent or global assignments can be effectively managed.
 4. Publishing e-learning content is faster and simpler.
 5. Organizations can report and analyze learners‟ appraisals of courses, and thus use the information to improve training programs.
 6. E-learning courses can be distributed to remote locations with limited network connectivity through CDs and progress can be updated online.


                                                                                                                          Target Users for this Business
 New Features                 Description
                                                                                                                          Function

 Course administrator            Training administrators can perform all their day-to-day activities through an             Training administrators
 portal role                      intuitive and Web-based interface. Activities include:
                                    Scheduling courses
                                    Managing participation
                                    Monitoring resources and capacities
                                    Following up on courses
                                    Managing mandatory course assignments
                                    Managing course-related correspondence
                                    Administrators are also provided and alerted with specific work lists that help
                                     them to keep track of courses' readiness, booking levels, and so on

 Learning management             Managers can manage the learning activities of their team members much more                Managers
 services for managers            effectively. Managers can now manage mandatory course assignments for their
                                  team members: they can assign new mandatory assignments and change or
                                  delete already-specified assignments. They can also track if such courses have
                                  been booked by the team member. They can book their team members for specific
                                  courses directly.
Human Capital Management > Talent Management


 HCM, Learning Solution 02



                                                                                                                      Target Users for this Business
 New Features                 Description
                                                                                                                      Function

 Rapid content publishing        This functionality allows content publishers to publish e-learning content to the      Content administrators and
                                  content repository through a simple Web-based interface. Content developers can         course administrators
                                  store their content in a central FTP folder. The content can then be published
                                  through the interface by providing the FTP address. The status of whether the
                                  content was correctly published can also be checked online.

 Enablement of                   SAP Learning Solution/ SAP Enterprise Learning can now support learning                Learners, course
 concurrent and global            management for employees with multiple or global assignments (concurrent and            administrators, instructors,
 employment                       global employment). Employees having multiple assignments might have varying            and managers
                                  training needs according to each assignment. For instance, they might have
                                  different qualification gap analysis results based on their qualification profile
                                  comparison with each of the position that they hold. That requires them to take
                                  different courses to fill these gaps. Course bookings might need to be authorized
                                  by different managers. SAP Enterprise Learning is now built considering these
                                  points and has appropriate processes from the perspectives of the learner,
                                  administrator, instructor, and manager.

 BI data sources for             Learners can give feedback on courses that they took through the Learning Portal.      Training departments
 course appraisals                The new functionality provides predefined data sources that customers can use to
                                  build their own BI reports to report and analyze feedback data. For instance, the
                                  data can be used to improve specific aspects (such as content, duration, and so
                                  on) or the entire training program.

 Offline course                  The new feature allows e-learning courses to be stored and distributed through         Learners and training
 distribution                     CDs. Learners can take the course from the CDs. Progress can be then                    departments
                                  synchronized online. This method is particularly effective when learners are
                                  located in disparate, remote locations with limited connectivity to a LAN or the
                                  Internet.
Human Capital Management > Talent Management > HCM, Learning Solution 02


 Feature: Course administrator portal role

Delivered by Business Function HCM_LSO_CI_2
     Training administrators can perform all their day-to-day activities through an intuitive and Web-based interface.
      Activities include:
         Scheduling courses
         Managing participation
         Monitoring resources and capacities
         Following up on courses
         Managing mandatory course assignments
         Managing course-related correspondence
         Administrators are also provided and alerted with specific work lists that help them to keep track of courses' readiness, booking levels, and so on

Course Administrator                    Course Administrator                Course Administrator                       Course Administrator




                                                       Track resource                      Monitor course
             Schedule a new                                                                                                            Follow-up
                course
                                     *                  assignments;
                                                      Assign resources       *            capacity; manage
                                                                                            participation          *                   Courses
                                                                                                                                                           *
                                                                                                                                      * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                      Business value
     Training administrative activities are usually performed                         The course administrator portal role provides a simpler
      through SAP GUI interfaces in the SAP Learning Solution                           means of performing regular course administrative activities.
      back end. Working in this manner requires the user to be                          The regular activities of a course administrator are arranged
      well trained on these transactions.                                               in logical work centers that will help them to access
     This new portal role enables training administrators who                          information easily and act on it.
      are not trained in the SAP GUI to perform routine training                       The portal role also includes work lists that help
      administration tasks without extensive training.                                  administrators be aware of course readiness statuses,
                                                                                        resource fulfillment statuses, booking, and capacity-related
                                                                                        alerts.
Human Capital Management > Talent Management > HCM, Learning Solution 02


 Feature: Learning management services for
 managers
Delivered by Business Function HCM_LSO_CI_2
     Managers can manage the learning activities of their team members much more effectively. Managers can
      now manage mandatory course assignments for their team members: they can assign new mandatory
      assignments and change or delete already-specified assignments. They can also track if such courses
      have been booked by the team member. They can book their team members for specific courses directly.



Manager                                   Manager                            Manager                         Team Member




                 View team                                                                                                     Team member
                                                       Book team member                  Assign mandatory
                  member‟s                                                                                                       notified
                qualification
                profile & gaps
                                                       to courses that are
                                                       helpful to him/ her
                                                                             *            courses to team
                                                                                             members
                                                                                                            *              of new assignments
                                                                                                                            in Learning Portal

                                                                                                                             * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                    Business value
     Currently, managers can view the qualification gaps and                       This feature allows managers to take an active role in
      suggested learning courses for their team members, but                         managing their teams' learning activities and thereby
      they cannot book them for such courses directly. With this                     manage the overall talent in their teams.
      feature, managers would be able to do so. They can also
      add courses as mandatory for their team members.
Human Capital Management > Talent Management > HCM, Learning Solution 02


 Feature: Rapid content publishing

Delivered by Business Function HCM_LSO_CI_2
     This functionality allows content publishers to publish e-learning content to the content repository through a
      simple Web-based interface. Content developers can store their content in a central FTP folder. The
      content can then be published through the interface by providing the FTP address. The status of whether
      the content was correctly published can also be checked online.



Content Author                         Course Administrator                Course Administrator             Course Administrator




                                                       Specify content
            Place finished
                                                         location &                   Start publishing                  Track publishing
           content in a FTP/
              Web folder               *                   storage
                                                         destination       *              process
                                                                                                          *                  status
                                                                                                                                           *
                                                                                                                          * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                  Business value
     Content publishing is usually done through the authoring                    Content publishing is made faster and simpler.
      environment tool which is a part of SAP Learning Solution/                  Users do not have to wait till the content is published, but
      SAP Enterprise Learning. Checking in and publishing is a                     can track the status later.
      multistep process that involves several clicks. The new                     The authorization for content publishing can be more
      user interface would allow this activity to be done with a                   controlled. Content designers can simply develop the
      single user interface and with a minimum number of clicks.                   content and store in a central FTP location. They do not
                                                                                   need any online connection to SAP Learning Solution/ SAP
                                                                                   Enterprise Learning. Then, only authorized users can
                                                                                   publish this content to the central repository.
Human Capital Management > Talent Management > HCM, Learning Solution 02


 Feature: Enablement of concurrent and global
 employment
Delivered by Business Function HCM_LSO_CI_2

     SAP Learning Solution/ SAP Enterprise Learning can now support learning management for employees
      with multiple or global assignments (concurrent and global employment). Employees having multiple
      assignments might have varying training needs according to each assignment. For instance, they might
      have different qualification gap analysis results based on their qualification profile comparison with each of
      the position that they hold. That requires them to take different courses to fill these gaps. Course bookings
      might need to be authorized by different managers. SAP Enterprise Learning is now built considering these
      points and has appropriate processes from the perspectives of the learner, administrator, instructor, and
      manager.




 Customer business challenges                                              Business value
     Currently, handling learning activities for a learner with              Learning for learners with multiple assignments can be more
      multiple assignments might need inconvenient procedures                  effectively managed.
      for organizations. For instance, a learner might need                   Learners can get a holistic picture of all their learning
      different logins to view or access learning activities related           activities for all assignments and can differentiate them
      to different assignments. With this feature, such                        based on their assignments.
      inconvenient methods are unnecessary. At every process,                 Administrators and managers can manage and report on the
      users will be able to differentiate between the different                learning activities of specific assignments of learners.
      assignments and will be able to perform activities                      Instructors with multiple assignments can manage the
      pertaining to specific assignments.                                      courses that they conduct as a part of their different
                                                                               assignments.
Human Capital Management > Talent Management > HCM, Learning Solution 02


 Feature: BI data sources for course appraisals

Delivered by Business Function HCM_LSO_CI_2
     Learners can give feedback on courses that they took through the Learning Portal. The new functionality
      provides predefined data sources that customers can use to build their own BI reports to report and
      analyze feedback data. For instance, the data can be used to improve specific aspects (such as content,
      duration, and so on) or the entire training program.




 Customer business challenges                                              Business value
     Currently, there are no standard reports that enable                    Evaluating training feedback is the first level of assessing
      organizations to analyze feedback given on courses.                      training effectiveness (example: Kirkpatrick's model for
                                                                               assessing training effectiveness)
                                                                              Standard data sources that extract all possible information
                                                                               needed for reporting on course appraisals are delivered with
                                                                               the solution. Customers can use these data sources and
                                                                               build BI reports that will suit their business requirements.
                                                                               A BI report developed in this manner can offer valuable
                                                                               information about course effectiveness.
Human Capital Management > Talent Management > HCM, Learning Solution 02


 Feature: Offline course distribution

Delivered by Business Function HCM_LSO_CI_2
     The new feature allows e-learning courses to be stored and distributed through CDs. Learners can take
      the course from the CDs. Progress can be then synchronized online. This method is particularly effective
      when learners are located in disparate, remote locations with limited connectivity to a LAN or the Internet.




Course Administrator                      Course Administrator                 Learner                          Learner




               Prepare the
                                                      Copy content to                    Take course from
            offline content to                                                                                            Update learning
                     be
                distributed             *                removable
                                                      storages devices     *              the removable
                                                                                          storage device    *             progress online
                                                                                                                                            *
                                                                                                                           * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                   Business value
     Limited connectivity or connectivity with low bandwidth                     Courses are distributed and taken offline, overcoming
      capabilities can be a hindrance to implementing a learning                   network limitations.
      strategy that involves e-learning or Web-based learning                     Courses from a CD can be copied to learners‟ PCs and
      methods. For instance, learners might find that it takes a                   taken individually. That saves bandwidth when compared to
      longer time to go through e-learning courses or the                          all learners taking the course online.
      connectivity gets lost in between. This feature allows                      Connectivity is needed only to synchronize learners‟
      organizations to bypass this limitation and still effectively                progress in SAP Enterprise Learning.
      implement e-learning strategies.                                            That is also suitable when it is expected that a group of
                                                                                   learners is to take a set of e-learning courses
                                                                                   at the same time.
Human Capital Management > Talent Management


 HCM, Performance Management 01

Enable Cascading Goals, Enhance Integration with SAP Learning Solution, and Use Simplified
User Interface for a Specific Process
 Benefits                                                                               HCM_OSA_CI_1
    Implementation optimized due to cascading goals functionality as part of performance management.
    Improved process efficiency due to enhanced integration.
    Minimized configuration effort and quick implementation due to a predefined performance management process available.


                                                                                                                        Target Users for this Business
 New Features                 Description
                                                                                                                        Function

 Cascading goals                 Corporate, departmental, and team goals can be created and cascaded to the                Managers at any
                                  corresponding employees.                                                                   organizational level

 Enhanced SAP Learning           Enhanced SAP Learning Solution integration provides the following new                     The user who is responsible
 Solution integration             capabilities:                                                                              for goal setting in an
                                     Courses can be set as mandatory in an appraisal document                               appraisal document
                                                                                                                             (manager or employee)

 Simplified user interface       This user interface is for a specific performance management process.                     Customers looking for a
 for a specific process                                                                                                      specific predefined
                                                                                                                             performance management
                                                                                                                             process with reduced
                                                                                                                             configuration options and
                                                                                                                             fast implementation time
Human Capital Management > Talent Management > HCM, Performance Management 01


 Feature: Cascading goals

Delivered by Business Function HCM_OSA_CI_1
     Corporate goals, core values, and team goals can be created and cascaded to the corresponding
      employees.




                                     TMS                                                       Line manager

                                                                                                           Managing & Aligning Employee
                                                                                                           Performance
                                                        Cascade
           Create corporate
                                                        corporate                            Create team                 Cascade team
              goals and
             core values              *                 goals and
                                                       core values              *               goals
                                                                                                              *             goals
                                                                                                                                           *
                                                                                                                          * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                       Business value
     Process limitations: as part of the yearly performance                           Implementation optimized because now the customers can
      management process often corporate goals, core values                             use performance management for setting up corporate
      and team goals are defined before the individual employee                         goals, core values, and team goals
      goals are set up.
     Lack of an overall view of all goals (strategic and individual
      goals) are displayed in the employee's appraisal
      documents.
Human Capital Management > Talent Management > HCM, Performance Management 01


 Feature: Enhanced SAP Learning Solution
 integration
Delivered by Business Function HCM_OSA_CI_1
     Enhanced SAP Learning Solution integration provides the following new capabilities:
              Courses can be set as mandatory in an appraisal document




      Employee Line manager                         Line manager                        Employee
                                                                                                   Managing & Aligning Employee Performance,
                                                                                                   Managing Enterprise Learning Strategies

                                                         Define
          Define individual                                                                 Book mandatory
               goals
                                                        mandatory
                                                         course                 *               course

                                                                                                                            * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                       Business value
     Process limitations: as part of the employee's goal setting,                     Improved process efficiency due to enhanced integration
      mandatory courses are often defined. To proceed with                              (users can set courses as mandatory)
      that, the user needed to exit the appraisal document to
      jump to another application.
Human Capital Management > Talent Management > HCM, Performance Management 01


 Feature: Simplified user interface for a
 specific process
Delivered by Business Function HCM_OSA_CI_1
     This user interface is for a Pre-defined Performance-Management-Process. For further reference see
      SAP Note 1169489.




 TMS     Line manager Employee                                   Line manager Employee

                                                                                                          Managing & Aligning Employee
                                                                                                          Performance
           Define corporate
          goals, core values
            and employee
                goals                 *                Review goals
                                                                                *            Appraise goals
                                                                                                               *
                                                                                                                         * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                       Business value
     Cumbersome maintenance of appraisal templates:                                   Minimized configuration effort
      customers found it difficult to configure appraisal                              Quick implementation
      templates in the appraisal template catalog due to its
      many and powerful configuration options
Human Capital Management > Talent Management


 HCM, SAP E-Recruiting 2


Streamline the Hiring of Talented Personnel with Enhancements for SAP E-Recruiting
 Benefits                                                                                HCM_ERC_CI_2
    Helps organizations recruit and hire top talent more efficiently
    Improves the recruiter experience and daily work with the SAP E-Recruiting application
    Reduces drop-off rates for applicants
    Guarantees better end-user satisfaction for SAP E-Recruiting, which means better usability for the entire recruiter role

                                                                                                                                Target Users for this Business
 New Features                 Description
                                                                                                                                Function

 Simplified user interface       The new portal role of recruiter includes fast access to and a task overview of all              Lead (senior) recruiters, HR
 for the new role of              necessary activities like candidate or requisition quick searches, requisition                    assistants and prescreeners,
 recruiter                        creation services, fast activity creation options, and so on in the e-recruiting area             and HR consultants.

 Candidate profile               When working with candidates, it is essential for a recruiter to get an overview of              Lead (senior) recruiters, HR
                                  the basic data of a candidate in an easy way, because the recruiter has to decide                 assistants and prescreeners,
                                  about the candidate‟s suitability for a job or the candidate‟s suitability for the                and HR consultants
                                  company and perform according actions on this candidate. Of course, the system
                                  provides a lot of tools to support the recruiter in making decisions, but
                                  nevertheless the recruiter‟s personal rating of the candidate is also required. In
                                  addition, the recruiter has to get an easy overview about the actions that have
                                  already performed on the candidate to decide about the next steps.

 Candidate selection list        The main objective of recruiters is to hire the best people for an organization as               Lead (senior) recruiters, HR
                                  quickly and efficiently as possible. At the same time, recruiters needs to keep a                 assistants and prescreeners,
                                  record of what actions or activities have been carried out on candidates: they need               and HR consultants
                                  to perform applicant tracking. On average, recruiters are processing 15-25
                                  requisitions at the same time, each with between 5 and 500 applicants, depending
                                  on the position in question. That means that recruiters have a lot of data to
                                  manage at the same time and a lot of information to keep track of, all while they
                                  are performing applicant tracking, evaluating candidates, coordinating with hiring
                                  managers, and so on.
Human Capital Management > Talent Management


 HCM, SAP E-Recruiting 2



                                                                                                                            Target Users for this Business
 New Features                 Description
                                                                                                                            Function

 Activity management for         Activity management (or applicant tracking) is the core of any recruiting system.            Lead (senior) recruiters, HR
 applicant tracking               As part of the recruiting process, recruiters carry out different actions or activities       assistants and prescreeners,
                                  with candidates as they evaluate them and take them through the recruiting                    and HR consultants
                                  process. These activities need to be recorded or tracked, to ensure that the proper
                                  process is being followed. This is important for a couple of reasons. The first is for
                                  legal compliance reasons. In many countries companies need to be able to prove
                                  that they are recruiting fairly, and they therefore need to keep track of all
                                  interactions with candidates. Another reason is for reporting.

 Work center for the role      Recruiters and their supporting colleagues need to rely on a variety of tools that             Lead (senior) recruiters, HR
 of recruiter                   support them in reacting quickly and smoothly to the requirements of their daily                assistants and prescreeners,
                                work.                                                                                           and HR consultants
                               To ensure fast and smooth access to their necessary daily activities, recruiters
                                need an appropriate system entry page like a pilot has when looking into a
                                airplane‟s cockpit. As a support for the fast access and task overview needed, an
                                organized work center with the necessary access possibilities to various activities
                                like candidate or requisition quick searches, requisition creation services, or fast
                                activity creation possibilities, is strongly desired. All these functionalities should
                                be triggered from the work center.

 Requisition                   This functionality includes the creation of requisitions and postings and                      Lead (senior) recruiters, HR
 management                     maintenance as well as an improved approval scenario. Also, new and easy status                 assistants and prescreeners,
                                handling for the requisitions is included.                                                      and HR consultants
                               Simplification of the user interface and improvement of usability concerning
                                requisition creation and maintenance by replacing sequences by tabs reduces the
                                number of fields that are necessary to give all required information and groups
                                several containers into one tab.
Human Capital Management > Talent Management


 HCM, SAP E-Recruiting 2



                                                                                                                           Target Users for this Business
 New Features                 Description
                                                                                                                           Function

 Simplified user interface       In many processes during the overall recruitment cycle, an online system                    System administrator of SAP
 for the new role of              recruiting administrator is needed to support end users involved in the                      E-Recruiting
 recruiting administrator         recruitment cycle with questions about user administration, system errors, central
                                  data maintenance, and so on. The role is typically used by a customer‟s system
                                  support groups (who support external as well as internal end users) or from HR
                                  system power users.

 Search                          SAP E-Recruiting provides functionality that helps companies find new                       Lead (senior) recruiters, HR
                                  employees, employ them in positions that suit their capabilities, promote their              assistants and prescreeners,
                                  professional development, and retain them in the long term. The application                  and HR consultants
                                  handles almost the entire process chain, from planning and budgeting, through
                                  attracting, hiring, and retaining employees. The diversity of functions includes
                                  electronic screening, filtering, sorting, ranking, monitoring of activities and so on.
                                  A lot of functionalities have to be covered by the search solution.
Human Capital Management > Talent Management > HCM, SAP E-Recruiting 2


 Feature: Simplified user interface for the new
 role of recruiter
Delivered by Business Function HCM_ERC_CI_2
     The new portal role of recruiter provides a quick overview of information relevant to the recruiter, such as
      the number of candidates in each process of each requisition, number of outstanding postings, etc. It also
      enables fast access to all necessary activities, like candidate or requisition quick searches, requisition
      creation services, fast activity creation options, and so on in the e-recruiting area.




AR clerk
                                                                                   Managing Recruiting


                                                                 New Portal Role: Recruiter
                                                                                                *
                                                                                                                          * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                 Business value
     One central page where users (recruiters) find their work                   The goal of the main user (recruiter) as such is to see all
      and tasks                                                                    relevant information guiding their daily work at a glance:
                                                                                   open requisitions, new applications, as well as fast access
                                                                                   to a quick search. Further, the recruiters need fast and direct
                                                                                   access from the work center to the tasks carried out within
                                                                                   the system.
Human Capital Management > Talent Management > HCM, SAP E-Recruiting 2


 Feature: Candidate profile

Delivered by Business Function HCM_ERC_CI_2
     When working with candidates, it is essential for a recruiter to get an overview of the basic data of a
      candidate in an easy way, because the recruiter has to decide about the candidate‟s suitability for a job or
      the company and perform take action on the candidate. Therefore we provide a short and long candidate
      profile for the recruiter. The system also provides a lot of tools to support the recruiter in making decisions
      (e.g. ranking, questionnaires, creation of activities…). This new candidate profile for recruiter also provides
      the ability to store notes. You also get an overview of all requisition activities or Talent Relationship
      Management activities. You also have an overview of all requisition and talent group assignments.
AR clerk
                                                                                       Managing Recruiting


               Search for candidate                                           View                                      Change
                via email or name
                                                  *                      candidate Profile
                                                                                                 *                  candidate profile
                                                                                                                                         *
                                                                                                                           * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                     Business value
     The candidate‟s data is easy to find, easy to read, and                         Smooth and easily understandable candidate profile, which
      easy to understand                                                               can be reached from separate components of
                                                                                       SAP E-Recruiting
Human Capital Management > Talent Management > HCM, SAP E-Recruiting 2


 Feature: Candidate selection list

Delivered by Business Function HCM_ERC_CI_2
     The main objective of recruiters is to hire the best people for an organization as quickly and efficiently as
      possible. At the same time, recruiters needs to keep a record of what actions or activities have been
      carried out on candidates: they need to perform applicant tracking. With this candidate selection list they
      can manage a lot of information at the same time. With the new candidate selection list recruiters have the
      possibility to personalize their lists, they have quick activity buttons available and many new features like
      evaluating candidates, coordinating with hiring managers, questionnaire handling and so on. The
      performance of large lists is improved through data structure enhancements.
AR clerk
                                                                                 Managing Recruiting

                                                                                     Track applicant
                                                      View candidate                                                    Date Transfer
              Work Center
                                      *                selection list
                                                                         *             and create
                                                                                        activities        *               to HCM
                                                                                                                                            *
                                                                                                                         * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                Business value
     Recruiters and the roles that support them, such as pre-                  Making relevant information readily available and easily
      screeners, need an efficient way to organize their tasks                   accessible will help recruiters do their job more efficiently
      and to get information about their requisitions and
      candidates quickly. They need, for example, an overview
      of how many candidates have either applied or been
      assigned to the requisitions they are working on and how
      the candidates are distributed among the different stages
      in the recruiting process.
Human Capital Management > Talent Management > HCM, SAP E-Recruiting 2


 Feature: Activity management for applicant
 tracking
Delivered by Business Function HCM_ERC_CI_2
     Activity management is the core of any recruiting system. As part of the recruiting process, recruiters
      carry out different activities with candidates as they take them through the recruiting process. These
      activities can be recorded using the activity wizard to ensure that the proper process is being followed.
      Many companies need to be able to prove that they are recruiting fairly, and they therefore need to keep
      track of all interactions with candidates. The new activity wizard gives recruiters a graphical
      representation of the process template, and includes the ability to create and edit activities as well as see
      which activities are planned or completed. It is also possible to combine activity types where it makes
      sense.
AR clerk
                                                                                 Managing Recruiting

                                                                                             View and Change activities via
                     View and Change activities via
                   Activity Wizard in Candidate Profile
                                                                         *                               Activity
                                                                                            Wizard in Candidate Selection List            *
                                                                                                                          * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                Business value
     Many recruiters view activity management as purely                        Simplified activity management, including the combining of
      administrative work that does not help them with their                     multiple activities into one makes it more likely recruiters will
      primary goal of finding and hiring the best people as                      follow the company policy and record activities as required.
      quickly as possible. That sometimes leads to recruiters                    This also reduces risk for the company if they are ever
      doing a large portion of their recruiting work outside of a                audited.
      recruiting system and then only later recording the
      minimum of activities to satisfy management and legal
      compliance.
Human Capital Management > Talent Management > HCM, SAP E-Recruiting 2


 Feature: Work center for the role of recruiter

Delivered by Business Function HCM_ERC_CI_2
     Recruiters and their supporting colleagues need to rely on a variety of tools that support them in reacting
      quickly to the requirements of their daily work. With this new Work Center (Recruiter‟s cockpit) it is
      possible to ensure fast smooth access to their daily activities. Recruiters need such an appropriate system
      entry page as to give them a quick overview of and access to their tasks. They can organize and
      personalize their work center to have access to various activities like candidate or requisition quick
      searches, requisition creation services, fast activity creation possibilities and so on. All these functionalities
      are now available from the Work Center (Recruiter‟s cockpit).
AR clerk
                                                                                 Managing Recruiting

                                                                                     Left hand                        Dashboards for
                                                       Quick Search
              Work Center
                                      *                functionality
                                                                         *         navigation for
                                                                                 Recruiting services     *              Recruiter‟s
                                                                                                                      daily work load      *
                                                                                                                        * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                Business value
     The primary goal of this work center is to provide the                    The purpose of the recruiter's work center is to bundle
      recruiter with better and more usable access to and a                      functionalities that are needed by recruiters to do their work
      faster overview of daily tasks via a work center.                          as quickly and efficiently as possible
     All other HR-relates personas which were evaluated
      during the roll-in project, that is lead (senior) recruiters,
      HR assistants and pre-screeners, can have access later
      on to their own role-specific data needed in their daily
      business through the work center due to the
      comprehensive role definition for the recruiter
Human Capital Management > Talent Management > HCM, SAP E-Recruiting 2


 Feature: Requisition management

Delivered by Business Function HCM_ERC_CI_2
     This functionality includes the creation and maintenance of requisitions and postings. Requisitions can be
      created either from scratch or by position. Also, new and easy status handling for the requisitions is
      included.
     The creation and maintenance of requisitions has been simplified by combining data onto fewer tabs and
      reducing the number of fields that are necessary to provide all required information.


AR clerk
                                                                                     Managing Recruiting

             Creation of Requisitions
                                                                     Create / change posting                    Search for candidates
               (from scratch or by
                     position                     *                     texts and publish
                                                                                                *                (Search and Match)
                                                                                                                                         *
                                                                                                                           * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                    Business value
     Problem with existing usability in the requisition area.                      New process for requisition management. New UI for
      Customers often regard creating and maintaining                                requisition management. The main value comes from
      requisitions and postings as too complex in the current                        simplifying the recruiters‟ front end while changing from BSP
      solution. The fact that the process is divided up into three                   to Web Dynpro technology to get straightforward navigation
      parts (requisition, publication, and posting) confuses                         in the requisition management process.
      customers. They do not want to jump into another
      container sequence for publication and posting.
Human Capital Management > Talent Management > HCM, SAP E-Recruiting 2


 Feature: Simplified user interface for the new
 role of recruiting administrator
Delivered by Business Function HCM_ERC_CI_2
     In many processes during the overall recruitment cycle, a recruiting system administrator is needed to
      support end users involved in the recruitment cycle with questions about user administration, system
      errors, central data maintenance, and so on. The role is typically used by a customer‟s system support
      groups (who support external as well as internal end users) or from HR system power users.




AR clerk
                                                                               Managing Recruiting


                                                           New Portal Role: Administrator
                                                                                                *
                                                                                                                      * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                             Business value
     Cumbersome maintenance of recruiting system:                            The purpose of the recruiting work center is to bundle
      customers had difficulties in configuring recruiting data in             functionalities and services that are needed by recruiting
      SAP E-Recruiting due to its complex and powerful                         administrators to work as quickly and efficiently as possible.
      configuration options.                                                  Minimal configuration effort
                                                                              Quick implementation
Human Capital Management > Talent Management > HCM, SAP E-Recruiting 2


 Feature: Search

Delivered by Business Function HCM_ERC_CI_2
     SAP E-Recruiting provides functionality that helps companies find new employees, employ them in
      positions that suit their capabilities, promote their professional development, and retain them in the long
      term. The search application is reachable from multiple entry points (e.g. quick search from work center,
      requisition management, candidate selection lists). It is now also possible to search and match during
      requisition creation. The search output lists are possible to personalize. The search application also
      provides the functionality to exclude candidates from the search.

AR clerk
                                                                                 Managing Recruiting

               Work Center:                                                            Requisition                       Candidate
              Quick Search for                            Search for
                                                                                      Management:                        Selection
                candidates,
                requisition,
                 postings               *                 candidates
                                                        in Talent Pool   *             Search for
                                                                                       Candidates        *            List: Search for
                                                                                                                        Candidates         *
                                                                                                                        * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                Business value
     The existing search UI is not user-friendly and is very                   This new UI is greatly simplified, thus making it easier for
      complex. The existing UI is unusable for a the recruiter or                recruiters to perform meaningful searches and find better
      pre-screener.                                                              candidates.
Index




  Introduction and Overview                          6. Procurement and Logistics Execution
  1. Analytics                                              6.1 Procurement
                                                            6.2 Inbound and Outbound Logistics
          1.1 Financial Analytics
                                                            6.3 Inventory and Warehouse Management
          1.2 Strategic Enterprise Management
  2. Financials                                      7. Product Development and Manufacturing
          2.1    Financial Supply Chain Management          7.1   Life-cycle Data Management
                                                            7.2   Manufacturing Execution
          2.2    Corporate Governance
                                                            7.3   Product Development
          2.3    Financial Accounting
                                                            7.4   Production Planning
          2.4    Treasury
                                                            7.5   General
  3. Human Capital Management
          3.1 Talent Management
                                                     8. Sales and Service
                                                            8.1 General
          3.2 Workforce Process Management
          3.4 General                                       8.2 Sales Order Management
                                                     9. Cross SAP ERP
  4. End-user Service Delivery
  5. Corporate Services
          5.1    Enterprise Asset Management
          5.2    Project and Portfolio Management
          5.3    Quality Management
          5.4    Real Estate Management
          5.5    Travel Management
Human Capital Management > Workforce Process Management


 CATS classic for Concurrent Employment


Enhanced CATS Classic with Concurrent Employment Functionality
 Benefits                                                                        CA_CATS_CE
  Optimizes business processes across concurrent employment (CE)
  Streamline basic time management processes for employees who have several personnel assignments and thus reduce the administrative burden in
   time management for employees, decentral time administrators, and the central human resources department
  Offers more precise and efficient personnel assignments
  Ensures accurate employee records



                                                                                                                   Target Users for this Business
 New Features                 Description
                                                                                                                   Function

 Enhanced CATS classic         Provides concurrently employed end users and decentralized time administrators        Employees, decentralized
 with concurrent                with a person-related view for CATS classic                                            time administrators, and a
 employment                    Allows time entry on multiple personal assignment in one person view                   central human resources
 functionality                                                                                                         department
Human Capital Management > Workforce Process Management > CATS classic for Concurrent Employment


 Feature: Enhanced CATS classic with
 concurrent employment functionality
Delivered by Business Function CA_CATS_CE
     Provides concurrently employed end users and decentralized time administrators with a person-related
      view for CATS classic
     Allows time entry on multiple personal assignment in one person view




Employee     HR Admin                    Employee                                   Manager
                                                                                                   Managing Employee Time and Attendance
                                                                                                   Recording Time and Labor Data
                                                          Release                                   Review and
               Record                                                                                                          Transfer data to
             Working Time
                                      *                 Working time
                                                         (optional)
                                                                                                     approve
                                                                                                   Working times
                                                                                                                              Target application


                                                                                                                                 * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                           Business value
     No option for concurrently employed employees and                                     Streamline basic time management processes for
      decentralized time administrators to enter time data within                            employees who have several personnel assignments and
      CATS classic for several personal assignments in one                                   thus reduce the administrative burden in time management
      person view                                                                            for employees, decentralized time administrators, and the
                                                                                             central human resources department
                                                                                            Offers more precise and efficient personnel assignments
Human Capital Management > Workforce Process Management


 HCM, Administrative Services 02

HCM Processes and Forms Goes for Mass Processes and Maintenance of the Organizational
Structure
 Benefits                                                                            HCM_ASR_CI_2
    Enhanced process approach to organizational processes
    Allow mass start of processes
    Allow mass maintenance of employee data through the portal role of HR administrator


                                                                                                                   Target Users for this Business
 New Features                 Description
                                                                                                                   Function

 Execute PD processes            Allows users to execute processes based on SAP Interactive Forms on PD objects      Occasional users
 with SAP HCM                     like organizational units, positions, and jobs
 processes and forms

 Mass processes for              Allows users to execute multiple employee processes with SAP HCM processes          Portal roles of manager and
 employees with SAP               and forms without a need to start multiple instances                                 HR administrator
 HCM processes and
 forms

 Fast data entry for             Maintenance of master data of multiple employees                                    HR administrators
 employee data through
 the portal
Human Capital Management > Workforce Process Management


 HCM, Administrative Services 02



                                                                                                                          Target Users for this Business
 New Features                 Description
                                                                                                                          Function

 Execute employee                This feature allows users to start an employee process. Only a process step after          Managers
 processes without                the start technically assigns the employee for whom data will be updated in the
 starting object (SAP             form-based process.
 HCM processes and
 forms)

 Customer-defined                With this feature, users can replace rather technical statuses for processes (in           All target roles of SAP HMC
 business statuses:               process, finished, and so on) with customer-defined statuses (bonus payment                 processes and forms
 processes with SAP               requested, bonus paid, and so on)
 HCM processes and
 forms

 Step-specific work item         This features allows users to define (per process step) if the work item is delivered      All target roles of SAP HCM
 delivery (UWL or mail)           through the UWL or through an e-mail with a link                                            processes and forms
 in SAP HCM processes
 and forms
Human Capital Management > Workforce Process Management > HCM, Administrative Services 02


 Feature: Execute PD processes with SAP HCM
 processes and forms
Delivered by Business Function HCM_ASR_CI_2
     Allows users to execute processes based on SAP Interactive Forms on PD objects like organizational
      units, positions, and jobs




Manager                                                 Higher Manager                                HR Clerk
                                                                                                                    Administering Employee HR
                                                                                                                    Data
                 Request Change in                                        Approve Change in
                                                                                                                           Do technical check an
                   Organizational
                    Management                  *                           Organizational
                                                                             Management                  *                     trigger update
                                                                                                                                                    *
                                                                                                                                     * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                               Business value
     Through this feature user can now maintain the                                           Maintenance of organizational structure by users with less
      organizational structure through the back-end system and                                  training
      the portal
Human Capital Management > Workforce Process Management > HCM, Administrative Services 02


 Feature: Mass processes for employees with
 SAP HCM processes and forms
Delivered by Business Function HCM_ASR_CI_2
     Allows users to execute multiple employee processes with SAP HCM processes and forms without a need
      to start multiple instances




                                                      Higher Manager 1                      HR Clerk      1
                                                          Higher Manager 2                       HR Clerk   2
Manager                                                       Higher Manager 3                        HR Clerk 3
                                                                                                                    Administering Employee HR
                                                                                                                    Data
             Request employee data
                                                                          Approve Change of                                Do technical check an
              change for multiple
                  empoyees                       *                          employee data                                      trigger update


                                                                                                                                     * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                           Business value
     The customer does not need anymore to start single                                       The benefit is especially for managers, who gain time
      instances of processes for employees, but can do a mass                                   through the mass start and avoid handling multiple
      start for a group of employees                                                            employees.
Human Capital Management > Workforce Process Management > HCM, Administrative Services 02


 Feature: Fast data entry for employee data
 through the portal
Delivered by Business Function HCM_ASR_CI_2
     Maintenance of master data of multiple employees




Manager




                                             Execute employee data change for multiple empoyees
                                                                                                                                *
 Customer business challenges                                                               Business value
     Allows users to maintain the HR master data of multiple                                  The customer can now maintain multiple employees through
      employees simultaneously through a portal feature                                         the portal and is not forced to use the back end for this
                                                                                                activity
Human Capital Management > Workforce Process Management > HCM, Administrative Services 02


 Feature: Execute employee processes without
 starting object (SAP HCM processes and forms)
Delivered by Business Function HCM_ASR_CI_2
     This feature allows users to start an employee process. Only a process step after the start technically
      assigns the employee for whom data will be updated in the form-based process.




Manager                                                                                                         Higher
                                                        HR Clerk
                                                                                                               Manager
                                                                                                                            Administering Employee
                                                                                                                            HR Data
               Request Change for
                                                                             Assign request
              employee belonging to
                 other manager                   *                            to employee
                                                                                                         *                   Approve Change
                                                                                                                                                  *
                                                                                                                                     * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                               Business value
     The challenge was especially for managers. Only they                                     Easy implementation for project organization situations
      could start processes for their employees, which is                                       without the need to change the long-term relationships and
      inadequate in a project organization, for example.                                        authorizations in organizational management
Human Capital Management > Workforce Process Management > HCM, Administrative Services 02


 Feature: Customer-defined business statuses:
 processes with SAP HCM processes and forms
Delivered by Business Function HCM_ASR_CI_2
     With this feature, users can replace rather technical statuses for processes (in process, finished,
      and so on) with customer-defined statuses (bonus payment requested, bonus paid, and so on)




Manager                                              Higher Manager                                            HR Clerk
                                                                                                                           Administering Employee
                                                                                                                           HR Data
                                                                          Process Status:                                    Process Status:
                 Process Status:
              Requested by Manager
                                                 *                    Approved or Rejected by
                                                                          Higher Manager
                                                                                                          *                    Controlled
                                                                                                                            and Data changed
                                                                                                                                                    *
                                                                                                                                     * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                               Business value
     The previous technical status didn't allow business-related                              Up-to-date and business-related process status information
      information about the processing of a process
Human Capital Management > Workforce Process Management > HCM, Administrative Services 02


 Feature: Step-specific work item delivery
 (UWL or mail) in SAP HCM processes and forms
Delivered by Business Function HCM_ASR_CI_2
     This features allows users to define (per process step) if the work item is delivered through the UWL or
      through an e-mail with a link

                                                         Work Item by                                Work Item by
                  Request
                                                            Mail
                                                                                  *                     UWL
                                                                                                                          *
Manager                                                 Employee                                               HR Clerk
                                                                                                                              Administering Employee
                                                                                                                              HR Data

                        Request                                          Work Item by Mail
                                                                                                          *                Work Item by UWL
                                                                                                                                                     *
                                                                                                                                     * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                               Business value
     Previously, delivery of the work items could be defined                                  The technical implementation of the step-specific behavior
      only through the technical object workflow task, which did                                can be achieved much quicker and more easily
      not allow a customizing fitting to the technical needs of the
      recipients of the work items (manager: UWL; employee: e-
      mail and so on)
Human Capital Management > Workforce Process Management


 HCM, Personnel Actions for Concurrent
 Employment
Handle Personnel Actions (Hiring, Termination, or Long-Term Absences) for Employees with
Multiple Personnel Assignments
 Benefits                                                                           HCM_CE_PA_PA
    Streamline processes for employees who have multiple personnel assignments and thus reduce the administrative burden of the HR department




                                                                                                                      Target Users for this Business
 New Features                 Description
                                                                                                                      Function

 Organizational change           When changing organizational data that results in a change of the legal employer,      Customers using concurrent
                                  the system now supports the process of terminating the old personnel assignment         employment
                                  and creating a new one with an option to transfer data into it.

 Termination                     This functionality supports the process of terminating assignments for employees       Customers using concurrent
                                  with multiple assignments. When executing a termination action, the system now          employment
                                  provides an option to reassign data from a terminated assignment to a remaining
                                  assignment. The termination action can also be connected to the transactions for
                                  quota corrections and remunerations and to the benefits workbench.

 Payroll area change             A system switch has been established for keeping the payroll area in synch within      Customers using concurrent
                                  concurrent employment for multiple personnel assignments.                               employment

 Leave of absence                This functionality supports the process for leave of absence (LoA) for employees       Customers using concurrent
                                  with multiple assignments. When executing a LoA action the system now                   employment
                                  considers all personnel assignments. The LoA action can also be connected to the
                                  transactions for quota corrections and remunerations and to the benefits
                                  workbench.
Human Capital Management > Workforce Process Management > HCM, Personnel Actions for Concurrent Employment


 Feature: Organizational change

Delivered by Business Function HCM_CE_PA_PA
     When changing organizational data that results in a change of the legal employer, the system now
      supports the process of terminating the old personnel assignment and creating a new one with an option to
      transfer data into it.




 HR Administrator




                                                                                                               Administering
                   Workforce Process Management
                                                                                                             Employee HR Data
                                                                                                                                         *
                                                                                                                                  * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                           Business value
     In the present release of the concurrent employment                                   The process for an organizational change resulting in a
      functionality, the system requires a user to process two                               change of the legal employer has been simplified and
      personnel actions for an organizational change that results                            enhanced with functionality to assure master data accuracy,
      in a change of a legal employer without an option to                                   data consistency, and enhanced usability.
      transfer data. This system limitation is inefficient and could
      have a negative impact on data accuracy.
Human Capital Management > Workforce Process Management > HCM, Personnel Actions for Concurrent Employment


 Feature: Termination

Delivered by Business Function HCM_CE_PA_PA
     This functionality supports the process of terminating assignments for employees with multiple
      assignments. When executing a termination action, the system now provides an option to reassign data
      from a terminated assignment to a remaining assignment. The termination action can also be connected to
      the transactions for quota corrections and remunerations and to the benefits workbench.



 HR Administrator




                                                                                                               Administering
                   Workforce Process Management
                                                                                                             Employee HR Data
                                                                                                                                       *
                                                                                                                                * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                           Business value
     In the present release of the concurrent employment                                   The process of terminating personnel assignments within
      functionality, the system requires a user to process a PA40                            concurrent employment has been simplified and enhanced
      termination action on each and every personnel                                         with functionality to assure master data accuracy, data
      assignment of an employee to terminate all personnel                                   consistency, and enhanced usability.
      assignments completely. The system limitation of
      terminating one personnel assignment at a time is
      inefficient and could have a negative impact on data
      accuracy.
Human Capital Management > Workforce Process Management > HCM, Personnel Actions for Concurrent Employment


 Feature: Payroll area change

Delivered by Business Function HCM_CE_PA_PA
     A system switch has been established for keeping the payroll area in synch within concurrent
      employment for multiple personnel assignments.




 HR Administrator




                                                                                                               Administering
                   Workforce Process Management
                                                                                                             Employee HR Data
                                                                                                                                          *
                                                                                                                                   * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                           Business value
     In the current release, users can change the payroll area                             Keeping the payroll area in synch for multiple personnel
      with transaction PA30 for only one of an employee's                                    assignments assures master data accuracy and data
      personnel assignments. During the payroll run, the system                              consistency.
      will reject all the employee‟s personnel assignments.
Human Capital Management > Workforce Process Management > HCM, Personnel Actions for Concurrent Employment


 Feature: Leave of absence

Delivered by Business Function HCM_CE_PA_PA
     This functionality supports the process for leave of absence (LoA) for employees with multiple
      assignments. When executing a LoA action the system now considers all personnel assignments. The
      LoA action can also be connected to the transactions for quota corrections and remunerations and to the
      benefits workbench.



 HR Administrator




                                                                                                               Administering
                   Workforce Process Management
                                                                                                             Employee HR Data
                                                                                                                                        *
                                                                                                                                 * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                           Business value
     In the present release of the concurrent employment                                   The process of inactivating personnel assignments within
      functionality, the system requires a user to process a PA40                            concurrent employment has been simplified and enhanced
      LoA action on each and every personnel assignment of an                                with functionality to assure master data accuracy, data
      employee to deactivate all personnel assignments                                       consistency, and enhanced usability.
      completely. The system limitation of editing one personnel
      assignment at a time is inefficient and could have a
      negative impact on data accuracy.
Human Capital Management > Workforce Process Management


 HCM, Time and Labor Management for
 Concurrent Employment
Handle Time Entry, Time Evaluation, and Management of Time Quotas for Employees with
Several Personnel Assignments
 Benefits                                                                          HCM_CE_PT
  Streamline basic time management processes for employees who have several personnel assignments and thus reduce the administrative burden in
   time management for employees, decentral time administrators, and the central human resources department
  Offers more precise and efficient personnel assignments
  Ensures accurate employee records


                                                                                                                    Target Users for this Business
 New Features                 Description
                                                                                                                    Function

 Time entry on multiple        Provides concurrent employed employees with a person-related view for CATS             Employees
 personnel assignments          regular
 via CATS regular              Allows time entry on multiple personal assignment in one person view

 Enhancements to time            Provides decentralized time administrators with a person-related view for TMW        Decentralized time
 manager's workplace             Allows time data maintenance on multiple personal assignment in one person view       administrators and central
 (TMW)                                                                                                                  human resource department

 Enhanced time quota             Provides concurrent employed employees with a person-related view and                Employees
 service and new leave            information on shared quotas in SAP Employee Self-Service service time quotas
 overview service                 and SAP Employee Self-Service service leave overview

 Enablement of further           Enablement of further functions and operation in RPTIME01 for CE                     Time administrators, central
 functions and operation                                                                                                human resource department,
 in RPTIME01 for CE                                                                                                     and system administrators
Human Capital Management > Workforce Process Management > HCM, Time and Labor Management for Concurrent Employment


 Feature: Time entry on multiple personnel
 assignments via CATS regular
Delivered by Business Function HCM_CE_PT
     Provides concurrent employed employees with a person-related view for CATS regular
     Allows time entry on multiple personal assignment in one person view




Employee                                 Employee
                                                          Employee Self-Service, Recording Time and Labor data
                                                                                   Manager




                                                                                                 Review and                 Transfer Working
           Record Working                            Release Working
               Times
                                      *              Times (optional)
                                                                                *
                                                                                                  approve
                                                                                                Working times
                                                                                                                                Times to
                                                                                                                           Target application

                                                                                                                               * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                         Business value
     No possibility for concurrent employed employees to enter                           Streamline basic time management processes for
      time data within CATS regular for several personal                                   employees who have several personnel assignments and
      assignments in one person view                                                       thus reduce the administrative burden in time management
                                                                                           for employees
                                                                                          Offers more precise and efficient personnel assignments
Human Capital Management > Workforce Process Management > HCM, Time and Labor Management for Concurrent Employment


  Feature: Enhancements to time manager's
  workplace (TMW)
Delivered by Business Function HCM_CE_PT
      Provides decentralized time administrators with a person-related view for TMW
      Allows time data maintenance on multiple personal assignment in one person view




HR time administrator
                                                                                           Managing Employee Time and Attendance

                                                                                                                            Check time records
                 Record                              Review approve                              Evaluate time
                Time data
                                      *                Time data
                                                                                *                    data
                                                                                                                     *
                                                                                                                             And correct any
                                                                                                                                 errors

                                                                                                                                * Improvements
  Customer business challenges                                                        Business value
      No possibility for decentralized time administrators to                            Streamline basic time management processes for
       enter time data within TMW for several personal                                     employees who have several personnel assignments and
       assignments in one person view                                                      thus reduce the administrative burden in time management
                                                                                           for decentralized time administrators and the central human
                                                                                           resources department
                                                                                          Offers more precise and efficient personnel assignments
Human Capital Management > Workforce Process Management > HCM, Time and Labor Management for Concurrent Employment


 Feature: Enhanced time quota service and
 new leave overview service
Delivered by Business Function HCM_CE_PT
     Provides concurrent employed employees with a person-related view and information on shared quotas in
      SAP Employee Self-Service service time quotas and SAP Employee Self-Service service leave overview




Employee                                                                            Manager
                                                                                                           Employee Self-Service, Managing
                                                                                                           Employee Time and Attendance

                    Enter absence/ Attendance and                                                                Approve absence/
                           access time data
                                                                        *                                           attendance

                                                                                                                                * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                         Business value
     No possibility for concurrent employed employees and                                Streamline basic time management processes for
      view time quotas and leave overview for several personal                             employees who have several personnel assignments
      assignments in one person view                                                      Offers more precise and efficient personnel assignments
Human Capital Management > Workforce Process Management > HCM, Time and Labor Management for Concurrent Employment


 Feature: Enablement of further functions and
 operation in RPTIME01 for CE
Delivered by Business Function HCM_CE_PT
     Enablement of further functions and operation in RPTIME01 for CE




                                                                                           Managing Employee Time and Attendance


                                                                     Evaluate time data
                                                                                                                     *
                                                                                                                               * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                         Business value
     Missing functions and operations for RPTIME01 for CE                                Streamline basic time management processes for
                                                                                           employees who have several personnel assignments and
                                                                                           thus reduce the administrative burden in time management
                                                                                           for system administrators, time administrators, and the
                                                                                           central human resources department
                                                                                          Offers more precise and efficient personnel assignments
Agenda




  Introduction and Overview                          6. Procurement and Logistics Execution
  1. Analytics                                              6.1 Procurement
                                                            6.2 Inbound and Outbound Logistics
          1.1 Financial Analytics
                                                            6.3 Inventory and Warehouse Management
          1.2 Strategic Enterprise Management
  2. Financials                                      7. Product Development and Manufacturing
          2.1    Financial Supply Chain Management          7.1   Life-cycle Data Management
                                                            7.2   Manufacturing Execution
          2.2    Corporate Governance
                                                            7.3   Product Development
          2.3    Financial Accounting
                                                            7.4   Production Planning
          2.4    Treasury
                                                            7.5   General
  3. Human Capital Management
          3.1 Talent Management
                                                     8. Sales and Service
                                                            8.1 General
          3.2 Workforce Process Management
          3.4 General                                       8.2 Sales Order Management
                                                     9. Cross SAP ERP
  4. End-user Service Delivery
  5. Corporate Services
          5.1    Enterprise Asset Management
          5.2    Project and Portfolio Management
          5.3    Quality Management
          5.4    Real Estate Management
          5.5    Travel Management
Human Capital Management > General


 HCM Localization Topics for Japan


 New Flexible Payroll for Japan Enables Monthly, Weekly, Biweekly, and Semimonthly Payment
 Benefits                                                                            HCM_LOC_CI_3
    New flexible payroll for Japan enables monthly, weekly, biweekly, and semimonthly payment




                                                                                                                      Target Users for this Business
 New Features                 Description
                                                                                                                      Function

 Rehiring (retirement)           The project objective is elimination of legal noncomplaince of the HR/Payroll          Payroll administrator
                                  Japanese solution concerning calculation of retirement and rehiring payment

 Japan: flexible payroll         New solution of JP flexible payroll that enables monthly, weekly, biweekly, and        Payroll administrator
                                  semimonthly payment

 Corporate pension               The corporate pension that corresponds to the third tier is a generic name of the      Payroll administrator
                                  following pension systems among private pensions, which are designed and
                                  managed by companies based on the law.
                                   1. Pension fund
                                   2. Tax qualified pension plan
                                   3. Defined benefit corporate pension
                                   4. Defined contribution pension
Human Capital Management > general > HCM Localization Topics for Japan


 Feature: Rehiring (retirement)

Delivered by Business Function HCM_LOC_CI_3
     The project objective is elimination of legal non-compliance of the HR/Payroll Japanese solution
      concerning calculation of retirement and rehiring payment




                                                                      View
                                                                     Salary
                                                                   Statement   *       Administering Employee HR Data,
                                                                                       Managing Global and Localized Payroll
                                                                                          Transfer                                   Transfer
          Maintain                                                   Send                                    Post Payroll
                                         Run                                           information                                analysis data
          Payroll
           Data         *               Payroll
                                                      *              Salary
                                                                   Statement
                                                                                        to external
                                                                                          bodies      *        Data to
                                                                                                             Accounting
                                                                                                                            *      to reporting
                                                                                                                                      system      *
                                                                                                                            * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                      Business value
     Current HR/Payroll Japanese solution is not compliant                           Mitigates the risk of legal compliance of HR/Payroll
      with legal requirements concerning calculation of                                Japanese solution concerning calculation of retirement and
      retirement and rehiring payment                                                  rehiring payment
Human Capital Management > general > HCM Localization Topics for Japan


 Feature: Japan: flexible payroll

Delivered by Business Function HCM_LOC_CI_3
     New solution of JP flexible payroll that enables monthly, weekly, biweekly, and semimonthly payment




                                                                      View
                                                                     Salary
                                                                   Statement   *       Managing Global and Localized Payroll

                                                                                          Transfer                                    Transfer
          Maintain                                                   Send                                     Post Payroll
                                         Run                                           information                                 analysis data
          Payroll
           Data         *               Payroll
                                                      *              Salary
                                                                   Statement   *        to external
                                                                                          bodies      *         Data to
                                                                                                              Accounting
                                                                                                                             *      to reporting
                                                                                                                                       system      *
                                                                                                                             * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                      Business value
     'the current payroll solution does not support weekly,                          New solution of JP Flexible payroll enables monthly, weekly,
      biweekly, and semimonthly payment                                                biweekly, and semimonthly payment
Human Capital Management > general > HCM Localization Topics for Japan


 Feature: Corporate pension

Delivered by Business Function HCM_LOC_CI_3
     The corporate pension that corresponds to the third tier is a generic name of the following pension systems
      among private pensions, which are designed and managed by companies based on the law.
         1. Pension fund
         2. Tax qualified pension plan
         3. Defined benefit corporate pension
         4. Defined contribution pension


                                                                      View
                                                                     Salary
                                                                   Statement   *       Administering Employee HR Data,
                                                                                       Managing Global and Localized Payroll
                                                                                          Transfer                                             Transfer
          Maintain                                                   Send                                          Post Payroll
                                         Run                                           information                                          analysis data
          Payroll
           Data         *               Payroll
                                                      *              Salary
                                                                   Statement   *        to external
                                                                                          bodies        *            Data to
                                                                                                                   Accounting
                                                                                                                                  *          to reporting
                                                                                                                                                system      *
                                                                                                                                    * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                      Business value
     In the current functionality of SAP ERP HCM, the data                           The two key points in offering the solution covering the
      model does not consider the corporate pension as a whole                         entire corporate pension scheme of Japan with SAP ERP
                                                                                       HCM:
                                                                                          1. Support for a new pension plan (defined benefit corporate pension
                                                                                           and defined contribution pension)
                                                                                          2. Enhancement of the supporting system for the existing corporate
                                                                                           pension scheme (pension fund)
Human Capital Management > General


 HCM Localization Topics for Norway


 Enable Existing Municipality Sector Organizations in Norway to Use SAP ERP HCM
 Benefits                                                                               HCM_LOC_CI_7
    Using the business function will enable the customers to use the standard municipality sector solution for Norway.




                                                                                                                          Target Users for this Business
 New Features                 Description
                                                                                                                          Function

 Municipality sector             This functionality will enable customers to maintain master data for employees             Municipality sector
 functionality for HCM            belonging to the municipality sector and the corresponding payroll handling in              employees in Norwegian
 Norway                           payroll for Norway.                                                                         companies
Human Capital Management > general > HCM Localization Topics for Norway


 Feature: Municipality sector functionality for
 HCM Norway
Delivered by Business Function HCM_LOC_CI_7
     This functionality will enable customers to maintain master data for employees belonging to the
      municipality sector and the corresponding payroll handling in payroll for Norway.




                                                                      View
                                                                     Salary        Managing Global and Localized Payroll
                                                                   Statement

          Maintain                                                   Send             Transfer                                   Transfer
                                         Run                                       information           Post Payroll
                                                                                                                              analysis data
          Payroll
           Data          *              Payroll
                                                      *              Salary
                                                                   Statement
                                                                                    to external
                                                                                      bodies
                                                                                                           Data to
                                                                                                         Accounting
                                                                                                                               to reporting
                                                                                                                                  system

                                                                                                                        * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                  Business value
     Customers had no solution for municipality sector                           Manage master data and payroll handling for municipality
      employees in Norway.                                                         sector employees
Human Capital Management > General


 HCM Localization Topics for Spain


 Enable Off-Cycle Payroll Execution for Bonus Payments and Special Payments in Spain
 Benefits                                                                              HCM_LOC_CI_5
    For bonus payments and special payments in Spain, a payroll specialist can run additional payroll processes before the scheduled regular payroll run.
     Separate pay slips will be generated for each off-cycle run.




 Improvements of                                                                                                            Target Users for this Business
                              Description
 existing features                                                                                                          Function

 Off-cycle payroll for           A payroll specialist can run the payroll for bonus payments and special payments             Payroll specialists
 Spain for bonus                  in Spain separately before the scheduled regular payroll run.
 payments and special
 payments
Human Capital Management > General


 HCM Localization Topics for the
 Italian Public Sector
 Enable Specific Legal Reporting for the Italian Public Sector
 Benefits                                                                                 HCM_LOC_CI_4
    Complete solution to make the Italian public sector organization legally compliant
    Payroll processing adapted for Italian public sector needs
    Severa legal reports adapted for public sector needs


                                                                                                                       Target Users for this Business
 New Features                 Description
                                                                                                                       Function

 Legal reporting for             It provides main legal reports for the Italian public sector, including:                HR administrators for public
 Italian public sector                Social security report (DMA/INPDAP)                                                 sector organizations
                                      Yearly financial declaration (F24)
                                      Contributive form (CUD)




 Improvements of                                                                                                       Target Users for this Business
                              Description
 existing features                                                                                                     Function

 Concurrent employment           It enables the concurrent employment functionality at the master data level. That       HR administrators (public
 PS Italy                         means use of the person_id as an upper link of different pernrs in the same              sector)
                                  system. It thus enables the customer to change the pernrs of their system,
                                  maintaining a link with the employee through the person_id and giving capabilities
                                  at the navigation and query levels.
Human Capital Management > general > HCM Localization Topics for the Italian Public Sector


 Feature: Legal reporting for Italian public
 sector
Delivered by Business Function HCM_LOC_CI_4
     It provides main legal reports for the Italian public sector, including:
         Social security report (DMA/INPDAP)
         Yearly financial declaration (F24)
         Contributive form (CUD)




                                                                         View
                                                                        Salary
                                                                      Statement         *        Administering Employee HR Data,
                                                                                                 Managing Global and Localized Payroll
                                                                                                    Transfer                                   Transfer
          Maintain                                                       Send                                           Post Payroll
                                           Run                                                   information                                analysis data
          Payroll
           Data           *               Payroll
                                                        *                Salary
                                                                       Statement        *         to external
                                                                                                    bodies      *         Data to
                                                                                                                        Accounting
                                                                                                                                             to reporting
                                                                                                                                                system

                                                                                                                                       * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                                Business value
     Enables them to be legally compliant with Italian public                                  Enables public sector companies to be legally compliant with
      sector legislation                                                                         Italian public sector legislation
Human Capital Management > General


 HCM Localization Topics for the Swedish
 Public Sector
 Enable Existing Public Sector Organizations in Sweden to Use SAP ERP HCM
 Benefits                                                                                HCM_LOC_CI_6
    Public sector organizations in Sweden can perform personnel administration and payroll and legal reporting that is compliant with legislation valid for
     them.



 Improvements of                                                                                                               Target Users for this Business
                              Description
 existing features                                                                                                             Function

 PS functionality for HCM      A. Public sector customers can use concurrent employment (CE) functionality                       Customers in PS sector in
 Sweden                        B. Payroll calculation algorithms specific to the public sector are available                      Sweden: state offices,
                               C. Legal reports specific to the public sector are delivered                                       municipalities, schools, and
                                                                                                                                   universities
Human Capital Management > General


 TNM/LSO Integration


 Training Needs Management Enabled for SAP Learning Solution Objects
 Benefits                                                                           HCM_LOC_CI_8
    Training needs can be defined for SAP Learning Solution objects: curriculum types (DC) and program courses (EK)




                                                                                                                       Target Users for this Business
 New Features                 Description
                                                                                                                       Function

 Training needs                Training administrators can plan training needs and valuate costs for curriculum          Training administrators
 management for                 types and program courses
 curriculum types and          Basically all the functionality of TNM is supported for SAP Learning Solution
 program courses                objects
Human Capital Management > general > TNM/LSO Integration


 Feature: Training needs management for
 curriculum types and program courses
Delivered by Business Function HCM_LOC_CI_8
     Training administrators can plan training needs and valuate costs for curriculum types and program
      courses
     Basically all the functionality of TNM is supported for SAP Learning Solution objects




AR clerk
                                                                                Managing Enterprise Learning Strategies

                                                  Create,
       Create              Integrate            manage and     Manage          Central        Approve                          Monitor
                                                                                                              Follow up
      training
      catalog
                 *          External
                            training
                                       *          publish
                                                 training
                                                 planning  *   collabo-
                                                                ration
                                                                              booking
                                                                              activities
                                                                                              booking
                                                                                              activities
                                                                                                               training
                                                                                                                              learning
                                                                                                                              progress


                                                                                                                     * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                             Business value
     Full functionality of SAP Learning Solution is unavailable              Training needs management is available for the full
      in TNM                                                                   spectrum of SAP Learning Solution objects
     No training needs management possible for advanced
      trainings like curriculum types and program courses
Index




  Introduction and Overview                          6. Procurement and Logistics Execution
  1. Analytics                                              6.1 Procurement
                                                            6.2 Inbound and Outbound Logistics
          1.1 Financial Analytics
                                                            6.3 Inventory and Warehouse Management
          1.2 Strategic Enterprise Management
  2. Financials                                      7. Product Development and Manufacturing
          2.1    Financial Supply Chain Management          7.1   Life-cycle Data Management
                                                            7.2   Manufacturing Execution
          2.2    Corporate Governance
                                                            7.3   Product Development
          2.3    Financial Accounting
                                                            7.4   Production Planning
          2.4    Treasury
                                                            7.5   General
  3. Human Capital Management
          3.1 Talent Management
                                                     8. Sales and Service
                                                            8.1 General
          3.2 Workforce Process Management
          3.4 General                                       8.2 Sales Order Management
                                                     9. Cross SAP ERP
  4. End-user Service Delivery
  5. Corporate Services
          5.1    Enterprise Asset Management
          5.2    Project and Portfolio Management
          5.3    Quality Management
          5.4    Real Estate Management
          5.5    Travel Management
End-User Service Delivery > End-User Service Delivery


 End-User Service Delivery
 Business Functions

Description                                                                                       Target Customers

   Continuous Improvement Employee Interaction Center: A new concept for security,                  Customers with a strong need for security constraints
    authorization, and user separation to restrict handling and access to service                     and data protection to restrict access to sensitive activity
    tickets for user roles in the employee interaction center (EIC). Enhanced print                   data
    function, new portal content for EIC roles, expanded employee search function,                   Customers with a strong need to differentiate
    and flexible custom views.                                                                        authorization levels for user accountability and
                                                                                                      responsibility
                                                                                                     Customers with a demand for flexible customizing
                                                                                                      options to create custom data views and print activities

   HCM Localization Topics for Russia: - Additional off-cycle payroll calculations,                 All payroll customers in Russia
    such as vacation, reconciliation for the termination of contracts, off-cycle bonus
    payments, and retirement
        Additional localization of SAP Employee Self-Service country-specific data maintenance
         and approval based on HCM processes and forms
End-User Service Delivery > End-User Service Delivery


 Continuous Improvement Employee
 Interaction Center
 Maximize Data Security, Protection, and Process Control with Enhanced Authorization for
 Activity Access and Handling
 Benefits                                                                                HCM_EIC_CI_2
    Enhance data security and protection for user access to activity data
    Enhance customer flexibility to define and display custom views (employee search and activity)
    Improve employee search capabilities with additional search field criteria
    Strengthen risk and compliance management with new activity print capabilities
    Simplify data administration with new portal content for EIC role
    Increase operational efficiency and improve end-user experience with usability enhancements

                                                                                                                           Target Users for this Business
 New Features                    Description
                                                                                                                           Function

 Enhanced print                     This function provides the ability to print an activity data summary in an easy-to-      All EIC agents or EIC
 capabilities with the               read, print-friendly format (Adobe PDF) that can be tailored and customized to fit        managers (end users) who
 activity print function             your company's business needs                                                             have access to the EIC
                                                                                                                               application and can view or
                                                                                                                               maintain activity data

 Expanded data field                The function provides customers with greater flexibility to create, display, and         EIC agents or EIC managers
 options with flexible               store their own activity data fields using custom views in the EIC application            (end users) who have
 custom views                                                                                                                  access to the EIC
                                                                                                                               application and can view
                                                                                                                               and maintain activity data


 Improvements of                                                                                                           Target Users for this Business
                                 Description
 existing features                                                                                                         Function

 Enhanced data security             This functionality introduces a new concept for security and authorization to            EIC agents and EIC
 and authorization for               restrict user accesses and handling of activity data for different user roles             managers (end users) who
 activity-handling                                                                                                             can access the EIC
                                                                                                                               application and view or
                                                                                                                               maintain activity data
End-User Service Delivery > End-User Service Delivery > Continuous Improvement Employee Interaction Center


 Feature: Enhanced print capabilities with the
 activity print function
Delivered by Business Function HCM_EIC_CI_2
     This function provides the ability to print an activity data summary in an easy-to-read, print-friendly format
      (Adobe PDF) that can be tailored and customized to fit your company's business needs




EIC Agent
                                                                                                   Operating an Employee Interaction Center

                Create and
                                                               Select                                Adobe PDF Print                  Print Activity
                  Save
               New Activity
                                                            Print Button
                                                                                *                    Form Displayed
                                                                                                                       *               Summary
                                                                                                                                                       *
                                                                                                                                      * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                                Business value
   Customers require the ability to produce a hard-copy                                        Increase convenience and minimize risk by enabling a print
    document and summary of activity data                                                        summary and hard copy document of activity data
   Customers require the ability to restrict print capabilities if                             Enhance flexibility and personalization options by allowing
    EIC agents are not authorized to view and maintain                                           customers to modify and customize the print template to fit
    activity data                                                                                their business needs
                                                                                                Improve the end-user experience by providing the ability to
                                                                                                 save and download activity data for future retrieval and
                                                                                                 storage
                                                                                                Maintain high security by restricting print capabilities to
                                                                                                 unauthorized users
End-User Service Delivery > End-User Service Delivery > Continuous Improvement Employee Interaction Center


 Feature: Expanded data field options with
 flexible custom views
Delivered by Business Function HCM_EIC_CI_2
     The function provides customers with greater flexibility to create, display, and store their own activity data
      fields using custom views in the EIC application




EIC Agent
                                                                                                   Operating an Employee Interaction Center

                                                          Select Activity
               Create New                                                                                    View Data                Input Activity
                 Activity
                                                               Tab
                                                          (custom view)              *                         Fields
                                                                                                                         *                Data
                                                                                                                                                         *
                                                                                                                                       * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                                Business value
   Limited ability to add and display additional employee data                                 Greater flexibility for customers to create and define custom
    fields from the employee search view and activity view                                       views that meet their business needs
   More flexibility is required to define data field options                                   Enhanced capability to define the most relevant and useful
    which meet customers' business needs                                                         data fields for business users (end users)
                                                                                                Enhanced usability and reporting capabilities with additional
                                                                                                 data field options for employee search and activity view
End-User Service Delivery > End-User Service Delivery


 HCM Localization Topics for Russia

 Additional Localization of Off-Cycle Payroll Calculation and Data Maintenance in SAP Employee
 Self-Service
 Benefits                                                                                  HCM_LOC_CI_2
    New off-cycle payroll functions for fully legally compliant calculations and reporting of vacations, stopping of labor contract, retirement, and bonuses.
    Enhanced functions of master data management available for employees via employee self-service portal.



                                                                                                                                Target Users for this Business
 New Features                    Description
                                                                                                                                Function

 New off-cycle processes            Customer can run off-cycle payroll calculations including vacation calculation,               All payroll customers in
 in payroll                          reconciliation by finish of labor contract, off-cycle bonus payment, and calculation           Russia
                                     only on retirement date.

 Support for New                    Employees can maintain their travel passport of RF citizen and education                      Employees
 Scenarios with SAP                  information with SAP Employee Self-Service
 Employee Self-Service
End-User Service Delivery > End-User Service Delivery > HCM Localization Topics for Russia


 Feature: New off-cycle processes in payroll

Delivered by Business Function HCM_LOC_CI_2
     Customer can run off-cycle payroll calculations including vacation calculation, reconciliation by finish of
      labor contract, off-cycle bonus payment, and calculation only on retirement date.




                                                                      View Salary
                                                                       Statement
                                                                                                 Managing Global and Localized Payroll

                                                                                                     Transfer               Post                   Transfer
           Maintain                                                      Send
                                            Run                                                   information              Payroll              analysis data
           Payroll
            Data          *                Payroll
                                                        *                Salary
                                                                       Statement         *         to external
                                                                                                     bodies      *        Data to
                                                                                                                         Accounting   *          to reporting
                                                                                                                                                    system      *
                                                                                                                                         * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                                Business value
     Require a work-around solution to run off-cycle payroll                                   Allows running off-cycle payroll calculations including
      calculations including vacation calculation, reconciliation                                vacation calculation, reconciliation by finish of labor contract,
      by finish of labor contract, off-cycle bonus payment, and                                  off-cycle bonus payment, and calculation only on retirement
      calculation only on retirement date.                                                       date without work-around solutions.
End-User Service Delivery > End-User Service Delivery > HCM Localization Topics for Russia


 Feature: Support for New Scenarios with SAP
 Employee Self-Service
Delivered by Business Function HCM_LOC_CI_2
     Employees can maintain their travel passport of RF citizen and education information with SAP Employee
      Self-Service

                              Initiate HR data                                                           View posted
                                                                      Process data
                              change request                                                               data by
                                                                     change request
                                by employee                                                               employee



                                                                                                 Administering Employee HR Data, Employee Self-
                                                                                                 Service


               Initiate HR data change                                             Process data                              View posted data
                request by employee
                                                       *                          change request
                                                                                                            *                  by employee
                                                                                                                                                     *
                                                                                                                                     * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                                Business value
     SAP Employee Self-Service not offered for the above                                       Allows employees to maintain their travel passport of RF
      scenarios for Russia with the standard product                                             citizen and education information with SAP Employee Self-
                                                                                                 Service
Agenda




  Introduction and Overview                          6. Procurement and Logistics Execution
  1. Analytics                                              6.1 Procurement
                                                            6.2 Inbound and Outbound Logistics
          1.1 Financial Analytics
                                                            6.3 Inventory and Warehouse Management
          1.2 Strategic Enterprise Management
  2. Financials                                      7. Product Development and Manufacturing
          2.1    Financial Supply Chain Management          7.1   Life-cycle Data Management
                                                            7.2   Manufacturing Execution
          2.2    Corporate Governance
                                                            7.3   Product Development
          2.3    Financial Accounting
                                                            7.4   Production Planning
          2.4    Treasury
                                                            7.5   General
  3. Human Capital Management
          3.1 Talent Management
                                                     8. Sales and Service
                                                            8.1 General
          3.2 Workforce Process Management
          3.4 General                                       8.2 Sales Order Management
                                                     9. Cross SAP ERP
  4. End-user Service Delivery
  5. Corporate Services
          5.1    Enterprise Asset Management
          5.2    Project and Portfolio Management
          5.3    Quality Management
          5.4    Real Estate Management
          5.5    Travel Management
Corporate Services


 Corporate Services
 Business Functions (1/3)
    Value Proposition for SAP ERP Corporate Services enhancements within SAP Enhancement Package 4 for SAP ERP
    Corporate Services enhancements include simplified administration of property portfolio and leases through enhanced commercial real
    estate management capabilities, full expense management delivering self-service automation for daily travelers including and
    maintenance execution without boundaries through superior time zone support. Enhancements also include sophisticated recycling
    administration capabilities and an improved quality-notification process.


Description                                                                                  Target Customers

   Configuration Control Innovations:                                                          New and installed base in asset-oriented industries, such
    Archiving support for iPPE nodes, ECM, and object-dependency support for LRUs;               as A&D, mining, oil & gas, utilities, and so on
    simultaneous usage of MPLs in different installation locations, changing visibility of
    iPPE nodes in a complete check, and a new MPL profile

   REA, SAP Recycling Administration:                                                          SAP ERP customers in all industries with regulatory
    SAP Recycling Administration handles environmental fees related to EU Directives             reporting needs resulting from packaging, electric, and
    on Packaging (94/62), Batteries (2006/66), Electric Electronic Waste (WEEE:                  electronic waste (WEEE) and batteries legislation or who
    2002/96), and similar global regulatory regulations. It calculates environmental fees        need to meet specific industry standards, like packaging
    and generates required declarations to environmental authorities.                            sustainability scorecards, in Europe and around the world.

 Enterprise Asset Management - Enhanced Warranty Management:                                   New and installed base in asset-oriented industries, such
  Integration of warranty management with PS order                                               as A&D, mining, oil & gas, utilities, and so on
 Availability of the entire A&D warranty solution outside of business function set
  DIMP

   Enterprise Asset Management: Continuous Improvements:                                       Customers using enterprise asset management to
    Continuous improvements for fleet and vehicle management, maintenance orders,                optimize their processes for fleet and vehicle
    task lists, maintenance plans, and so on                                                     management, maintenance cost management, and
                                                                                                 inspections

   Enterprise Asset Management: Time Zone Support:                                             Customers with asset an maintenance organization who
    Time zone support in the enterprise asset management area for notification, work             have various locations, systems, or business partners in
    order, and confirmation                                                                      different time zones
Corporate Services


 Corporate Services
 Business Functions (2/3)

Description                                                                                   Target Customers

 Maintenance Event Builder and Logbook Innovations:                                             New and installed base in asset-oriented industries, such
  Enhancements in the authorization concept for the maintenance event builder                     as A&D, mining, oil & gas, utilities, and so on
 Enhancement in aircraft logbook

   Refurbishment and Subcontracting:                                                            New and installed base in asset-oriented industries, such
    Making parts of the A&D subcontracting and refurbishment order solution are                   as A&D, mining, oil & gas, utilities, and so on
    available without using business function set DIMP. These features will help
    manage in-house or subcontracted repairs and overhaul of parts and equipment.


   Project System: Handling Large Projects - Master Data:                                       Customers handling large project structures with project
    Using the new project editor transaction users can maintain separate subsets of               system
    master data of large project structures in a high-performance manner and benefit
    from a more flexible locking concept. Certain project changes can be saved as
    drafts and be compared with each, other later on.

   Travel Management 2:                                                                         Customers using SAP Travel Management and those
    Web application express expense sheet for daily travelers; integration of travel              who have already upgraded their back-end system to
    planning and expense management with event management tools; travel planning                 SAP ERP 6.0.
    with airfare matrix, mixed air/rail availability, and multiple airport search; employee
    self-service travel management for public sector (DE).

   Quality Management: Enhanced Functions in Q-Notifications:                                   Employees entering (customer, vendor, or other)
    Multiple assignments of objects (batches, serial numbers, and so on)                          complaints, problems, or any type of notification.
       Extended mail sending functionality for notifications with attachments                    Employees who are involved in the problem-solving
       Extended partner selection in reports                                                     (corrective and preventive actions or CAPA) process,
       Flexible adjustment of list output for reports                                            perform evaluations, and report on given problems,
                                                                                                  defects, and issues. Not industry-specific; usable for any
                                                                                                  type of application to document issues and problems,
                                                                                                  even in terms of regulatory compliance.
Corporate Services


 Corporate Services
 Business Functions (3/3)

Description                                                                        Target Customers

   Corporate Real Estate:                                                            Corporate real estate managers
    Contains new functionality in the area of space and room management that
    broadens and supplements the functionality of EhP2.

   Real Estate 2:                                                                    Commercial real estate managers and lease
    Contains new functionality in the area of commercial real estate management,       administrators
    especially for reporting and analytics.

   RE-FX Localization Topics for Portugal:                                           Current SAP Real Estate Management customers will
    RE-FX localization for Portugal (SAP Real Estate Management for Portugal)          migrate to flexible real estate along with important new
                                                                                       customers from industries such as engineering and
                                                                                       construction, telco, public sector, insurance, banking,
                                                                                       retail, services, and transportation
Corporate Services


 Corporate Services
 Es Bundles
Description

   Travel Management:
    This ES bundle offers the required enterprise services in order to automate travel and expenses management processes, event management,
    providing information on travel policy, fraud prevention as well as establishing and enhancing the communication and negotiation with travel
    agencies and travel suppliers.

   Asset Configuration:
    This ES bundle covers the support for the processes of creation of an entire new asset system within an ERP system using data from a
    service provider. This initial reference structure represents the baseline configuration for the entire fleet which is then put into change control
    from that point forward. The future changes to the baseline reference structure is also part of this ES bundle. It is closely related to the
    Maintenance Service Collaboration ES bundle.

   Maintenance Processing:
    This ES bundle clusters enterprise services in the area of SAP ERP 6.0 enterprise asset management from maintenance planning to
    maintenance execution. The ES bundle will enable SAP, customers, and partners to enhance their offerings in the area of web-based service
    processes with respect to performance, usability, and user productivity.

   Maintenance Service Collaboration:
    This ES bundle covers identification, planning and execution of maintenance to technical systems. This functionality is important because the
    completion of maintenance activities is key to restoring equipment systems to operational fitness and ensuring that they are configured
    properly to meet operational requirements. Some or all of the activities in the process could be contracted out to a service provider. The data
    should be available either in the service provider system or the customer system, depending on the contractual agreements. This ES bundle
    could be the basis for processes to support Performance Based Logistics (PBL) scenarios. It is closely related to the Asset Configuration ES
    bundle.

   Real Estate – Room Reservation:
    This ES bundle enables the reservation of meeting rooms and other facilities, for one-time or recurring events. You can request a room with
    specified equipment, book additional services such as lunch or catering, and allocate the costs in controlling.

 Easy Inspection Planning:
  The ES bundle provides enterprise services for the creation and maintenance of QM inspection plans and QM master inspection
  characteristics.
 The enterprise services provided support the customer in their Advanced Product Quality Planning (APQP) process, which is a mandatory
  methodology demanded by the ISO TS 16949 industry standard in discrete industry. In addition, it shall enable the update of an inspection
  plan with critical quality characteristics determined through a Failure Mode and Effect Analysis (FMEA).
Corporate Services


 ES Bundle – Travel Management



       Integrates the different process steps of travel and event management partner solutions into
        one complete process. From the creation, approval, operational handling, online travel
        booking, and expense reporting of employees up to the analytics part, the complete data can
        be captured as an SAP cost object. This will be the container for all “event related costs.”

Travel/Event           Travel/Event          Travel/Event                                                       CFO/Travel
  Manager                Manager               Manager              Employee               Employee              Manager




       Request,                  Retrieve                                      Register               Book or
      approve &                   master              Invite
                                data from
                                                                                 for                  expense            Analyze
        finalize                                   participants
                               SAP systems                                      event                  travel
        event
Backend     Partner             ERP 6.0                 Partner              Partner             ERP 6.0                ERP 6.0
System      System               EhP4     SAP           System               System               EhP4                   EhP4
                                          CRM

Business Value                                                       Use Cases
   Covering the complete process from approval to analytics            Export HCM master data from SAP HCM system to external
    will allow customers to get a complete picture on their spend        meeting and event management systems.
    for meetings/events and enable them to save based on                Customers today have no control over their meeting and event
    better vendor negotiation and elimination of manual process          spending and how it is spent. Approximately 30 to 40 percent
    steps.                                                               of total travel and entertainment expenditures is spent on
                                                                         meetings and events.
                                                                        Strategic Meeting programs give companies the possibility to
                                                                         leverage transient travel volume when negotiating with service
                                                                         providers. Integration of such tools with the
                                                                         ERP landscape can save companies up to 5 percent.
Corporate Services


 ES Bundle – Asset Configuration



       The management of the configuration for complex systems like ships, vehicles or aircraft can be done by
        the asset user alone, by a contractor or manufacturer alone, and at every point in between.
       This ES bundle supports the processes to create new reference structures for assets as well as the
        maintenance (change/update) of these reference structures on dependence of the contract, in the
        customer and/or in the service provider system

Manufacturer                     Engineering                     Manufacturer                        Engineering
                                  Authority                                                           Authority




                                               Create / update                                                     Create / update
           Create / establish                                                  Create / update
                                                 Reference                                                              Maint.
            Initial structure                                                 allowed structure
                                                 Structure                                                           Requirem.



Business Value                                                       Use Cases
 By using reference structures, the relevant master data for           Creation and establishing of initial structure to exchange asset
  each individual system (e.g., each aircraft in a fleet) could be       related data / information
  created much easier. This leads to a significant reduction of         Creation of reference structures for complex system structures
  time to create the data (from months to days) and minimizes           Maintenance / change management for complex structures
  potential error in the data                                           Creation / maintenance of so-called “allowed” structures
 Some or all of the activities around asset construction,              Creation / changes for maintenance requirements for complex
  creation of reference structure, or maintenance of reference           structures
  structure could be contracted out to a service provider
Corporate Services


 ES Bundle – Maintenance Processing



       This ES bundle provides enterprise services for exchanging maintenance planning, asset configuration,
        and notification data between SAP Service and Asset Management and other EAM systems
       The enterprise services can be consumed by external third-party systems or composite applications, such
        as RCMO (Reliability Centered Maintenance & Optimization) to integrate external
        EAM systems with SAP Service and Asset Management

Development                      CAD                   CAE                        Engineering              Production
  Engineer                     Engineer              Engineer                      Manager                  Engineer




                                                                 Checks
             Creates                                                                            Releases                Creates
                                           Designs              Mechanical
             Concept                                                                             Design                  BOM
                                                                 Strength

Backend              ERP 6.0              ERP 6.0               ERP 6.0                     ERP 6.0                     ERP 6.0
System                EhP4                 EhP4                  EhP4                        EhP4                        EhP4


Business Value                                                      Use Cases
   Increase accuracy and speed of development and design                Viewer Integration: Third-party viewer
    process                                                              Real-Time Design Collaboration Tool Integration
   Seamless integration of documents from non-SAP Systems               Computer Aided Engineering Software Integration
    in SAP ERP (CAE tools)                                               Integration of niche CAD systems
   Elimination of redundant data within the company through             Partner composites facilitating the copying from documents in
    centralization                                                        a non-SAP system to DMS and the usage of those documents
   Secure document storage                                               within SAP ERP processes
Corporate Services


 ES Bundle – Real Estate – Room Reservation



       This ES bundle enables the reservation of meeting rooms and other facilities, for one- time or
        recurring events. You can request a room with specified equipment, book additional services
        such as lunch or catering, and allocate the costs in controlling.


                                                                                          Corporate Real
        Employee                                                                          Estate Manager



                                           Search for and                  Request
               Schedule                                                                                    Assign and
                                               Book                       Additional
             Meeting / Event                                                                               Settle Costs
                                          Room / Location                  Aervices

Backend         ERP 6.0 EhP4                   ERP 6.0 EhP4                ERP 6.0 EhP4                     ERP 6.0 EhP4
System            RE-FX                          RE-FX                       RE-FX                            RE-FX


Business Value                                                Use Cases
   Simplified and optimized organization of meetings            Employee self-service for room reservation
   Higher utilization of meeting rooms                           (one-time or recurring meeting)
   Improved cost transparency and awareness                     Employee self-service for ordering additional services
   Reduced administrative and processing costs
Corporate Services


 ES Bundle – Easy Inspection Planning



       Facilitates the maintenance of quality management master data in SAP ERP
       Covers new business objects such as inspection characteristic and inspection plan
       Supports quality planning within the product development process
       Distributing and printing the inspection plans
       Addresses all manufacturing industries

Quality Engineer                           Quality Planner                         Quality Inspector




                     Identifies critical                      Maintains                                  Displays
                        inspection                           inspection                                 inspection
                      characteristics                           plan                                   specifications



Business Value                                                    Use Cases
 Enables flexible and easy inspection planning, e.g., by using    Creation and update of “Critical-to-Quality” (CTQ)
  new user interfaces for plan maintenance                          characteristics, e.g., triggered from a Failure Mode and Effect
 Delivers new functionality, e.g., enables the external update     Analysis (FMEA)
  of QM inspection plans and specifications or the creation of     Creation and update of inspection plans with inspection
  inspection plans from CAD drawings                                characteristics and other data
 Allows closed loop inspection planning                           Download inspection master data to external systems (e.g.,
 Supports industry standards such as ISO TS 16949 (APQP)           Manufacturing Execution Systems or QM Systems)
                                                                   Distribute inspection master data across system borders
Index




  Introduction and Overview                          6. Procurement and Logistics Execution
  1. Analytics                                              6.1 Procurement
                                                            6.2 Inbound and Outbound Logistics
          1.1 Financial Analytics
                                                            6.3 Inventory and Warehouse Management
          1.2 Strategic Enterprise Management
  2. Financials                                      7. Product Development and Manufacturing
          2.1    Financial Supply Chain Management          7.1   Life-cycle Data Management
                                                            7.2   Manufacturing Execution
          2.2    Corporate Governance
                                                            7.3   Product Development
          2.3    Financial Accounting
                                                            7.4   Production Planning
          2.4    Treasury
                                                            7.5   General
  3. Human Capital Management
          3.1 Talent Management
                                                     8. Sales and Service
                                                            8.1 General
          3.2 Workforce Process Management
          3.4 General                                       8.2 Sales Order Management
                                                     9. Cross SAP ERP
  4. End-user Service Delivery
  5. Corporate Services
          5.1    Enterprise Asset Management
          5.2    Project and Portfolio Management
          5.3    Quality Management
          5.4    Real Estate Management
          5.5    Travel Management
Corporate Services > Enterprise Asset Management


 Configuration Control Innovations

 Enhanced Configuration Control Ensures that Users Can Create Consistent Master Data
 Without Work-Arounds
 Benefits                                                                                     LOG_EAM_CC
    Enhanced master data maintenance process with engineering change management and object dependencies can reduce the number of duplicated nodes for LRU and
     SRU. This enhancement reduces errors and improves the accuracy of data.



                                                                                                                                    Target Users for this Business
 New Features                   Description
                                                                                                                                    Function

 Enhancements for                  Configuration control application can be used by maintenance or service                            Engineering manager
 configuration control              organizations to manage technical objects that have a high risk because of safety,                 Maintenance manager
                                    environment, or production. It has two components:
                                      1. Master parts list that manages the engineering information. Master parts list depicts
                                       all the possible valid combinations of parts that can be installed at different locations.
                                      2. Configuration control check transaction identifies whether the actual technical
                                       structure has valid parts as described in the master parts list.
Corporate Services > Enterprise Asset Management > Configuration Control Innovations


 Feature: Enhancements for configuration
 control
Delivered by Business Function LOG_EAM_CC
     Configuration control application can be used by maintenance or service organizations to manage
      technical objects that have a high risk because of safety, environment, or production. It has two
      components:
          1. Master parts list that manages the engineering information. Master parts list depicts all the possible valid combinations
           of parts that can be installed at different locations.
          2. Configuration control check transaction identifies whether the actual technical structure has valid parts as described in
           the master parts list.

AR clerk
                                                                                               Technical Asset Management

                Maintain                                                                              Maintain                     Check validity of
           specifications and
             requirements
             of new assets
                                                         Maintain detailed
                                                         engineering data
                                                                                       *         functional location
                                                                                                        and
                                                                                                  equipment details
                                                                                                                                   technical assets
                                                                                                                                   with engineering
                                                                                                                                        details          *
                                                                                                                                      * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                              Business value
     Customer who requires a better connection between                                       Better integration between engineering and maintenance
      engineering information and actual maintenance practice.                                 ensures a safe and efficient process to manage a technical
      That can improve data consistency of a technical                                         object.
      structure.                                                                              Flexible modeling of master parts list allows a more realistic
     To reduce the chances of incorrect installation of a part,                               depiction of engineering information for the technical object.
      and thereby reduce operational risk and improve safety to
      work caused by an incorrect installation, customers need
      more flexible and proper modeling of the master parts list.
Corporate Services > Enterprise Asset Management


 Enterprise Asset Management - Enhanced
 Warranty Management
 Integrate Warranty with PM and CS Orders
 Benefits                                                                                             LOG_EAM_WTY
    Improves visibility of warranty claim starting from its creation until its settlement. Improved visibility reduces processing time and allows detailed analysis of all claims.




                                                                                                                                                Target Users for this Business
 New Features                     Description
                                                                                                                                                Function

 Integration of warranty             Integration between warranty claim process with maintenance and service                                      Maintenance manager
 claims with maintenance              processing allows better visibility regarding claimable work performed by the                                Procurement manager
 and service processing               maintenance team and improves collection of claims
                                                                                                                                                   Financial officer
Corporate Services > Enterprise Asset Management > Enterprise Asset Management - Enhanced Warranty Management


 Feature: Integration of warranty claims with
 maintenance and service processing
Delivered by Business Function LOG_EAM_WTY
     Integration between warranty claim process with maintenance and service processing allows better
      visibility regarding claimable work performed by the maintenance team and improves collection of claims




AR clerk
                                                                                              Maintenance Planning and Scheduling

                                             Create &                                                                                 Create and
             Create                                                              Perform
                                              manage                                                            Complete the           manage
           Maintenance
           notification       *             maintenance
                                               order              *            Maintenance
                                                                                   task
                                                                                                                  order
                                                                                                                               *       warranty
                                                                                                                                        claim      *
                                                                                                                                   * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                            Business value
     Because the maintenance process and claim process are                                Improved communication between maintenance team and
      independently managed by different teams, the claim                                   warranty processing team
      processor does not have the details needed to create                                 Reduced errors in claims
      proper claim                                                                         Reduced time to collect and approve the claims
     OEM and vendors do not approve a claim if it is not                                  Improved return parts process
      substantiated with proper documentation .That results in
      long delays to collect claims
     Returnable parts are not linked to warranty claim or
      maintenance process ,so the warranty clerk can‟t
      efficiently communicate with vendors
Corporate Services > Enterprise Asset Management


 Enterprise Asset Management: Continuous
 Improvements
 Streamlined Processes for Maintenance Planning, Execution, and Optimization
 Benefits                                                                                 LOG_EAM_CI_3
    Fleet maintenance planners can make knowledge-based decisions with improved reports and simplified transactions.
    Improved framework of simplified reporting allows usage of transactional data along with extracted information.
    Standard inspection rounds solution allows definition of a task list that can used to plan and execute inspection or operator rounds.
    Reduced time and effort to view documents.
    Easy reporting along a multilevel list improves the information presented to maintenance planners thereby improving the productivity of maintenance
     planners

 New Features                   Description                                                                        Target Users for this Business Function

 Improvement in fleet              Basic order view has been enhanced with fields for fleet maintenance. To          Maintenance planners who are
 maintenance                        enable better reporting for fleet maintenance, SAP NetWeaver BI content            managing a large fleet of vehicles
 functionality                      has been improved for better reporting features required for maintaining a         will benefit from simplified
                                    fleet of vehicles.                                                                 reporting and transactions

 Improved maintenance              Proper reporting can drastically change the way that people can make              Maintenance planners from
 reports                            business decisions. The following reports support maintenance planners             organizations that have very large
                                    and supervisors in making informed decisions.                                      technical assets and need to
                                      1. POWER list for maintenance plans                                             maintain them at optimal efficiency
                                      2. POWER list for service and maintenance orders
                                      3. Simplified reports for maintenance cost and maintenance backlog

 Planning and execution            Up to now, there has been no way to plan and process routes for operator-         Maintenance planners from a
 of inspection rounds               based maintenance or inspection rounds in an easy way. Enhanced                    organizations that have very large
                                    features can support possibilities to define routes for operator-based             technical assets and need to
                                    maintenance and streamline execution of the routes.                                maintain them at optimal efficiency

 Improved work                     Complex assets require functionality to view and verify current and normal        Maintenance planners from a
 clearance management               operational conditions for a group of logically related technical objects.         organizations that have very large
 with line-up                       The line-up functionality provides a mechanism by which planners can               technical assets and need to
                                    update the current operational conditions for a group of logically related         maintain them to run them at
                                    technical objects en masse.                                                        optimal efficiency
Corporate Services > Enterprise Asset Management


 Enterprise Asset Management: Continuous
 Improvements

 New Features                   Description                                                                      Target Users for this Business Function

 Power list for                    The new POWL Maintenance Plan is used as a worklist to get an overview          Maintenance Planner; Maintenance
 Maintenance Plan                   of the maintenance plan. It contains information on all call off objects         Supervisor; Service Delivery
                                    (documents), which are created through a maintenance plan.                       Manager
                                     Display of contracts
                                     Display of service orders
                                     Display of notifications
                                     Display of purchase orders
                                     Display and Change of maintenance plan

 Improvements in                   It is now possible to define whether the preventive maintenance order will      Maintenance planners from a
 automatic release of               be released automatically                                                        organizations that have very large
 orders                                                                                                              technical assets and need to
                                                                                                                     maintain them to run at optimal
                                                                                                                     efficiency

 View document attached            It is possible to attach documents to technical objects directly using          Maintenance planners from a
 using generic object               generic object services. These documents can be viewed during                    organizations that have very large
 services                           transaction processing. Most of the transactions of maintenance                  technical assets and need to
                                    processing are enhanced to show the availability of documents                    maintain them to run at optimal
                                                                                                                     efficiency

 List report for                   Multilevel list reports are enhanced to select and view maintenance plan        Maintenance planners from a
 maintenance plan items             items                                                                            organizations that have very large
                                                                                                                     technical assets and need to
                                                                                                                     maintain them to run them at
                                                                                                                     optimal efficiency

 Improved material                 It is possible for maintenance planner to indicate when the vendor should       Maintenance planners from a
 planning integration with          deliver a part                                                                   organizations that have very large
 maintenance order                                                                                                   technical assets and need to
                                                                                                                     maintain them to run them at
                                                                                                                     optimal efficiency
Corporate Services > Enterprise Asset Management


 Enterprise Asset Management: Continuous
 Improvements


 Improvements of
                                Description                                                                         Target Users for this Business Function
 existing features

 Improvements to                 It is now possible to record change pointers for maintenance task list. This         Maintenance planners from a
 maintain and use task            new feature allows tracking changes that may occur for a maintenance task             organizations that have very large
 list                             list.                                                                                 technical assets and need to
                                 Task lists maintenance is enhanced so that fields like unloading point and            maintain them to run them at
                                  recipient can be maintained in a task list, and the details are copied to             optimal efficiency
                                  orders if the task list is used to create the order.

 Power List for Service            You can use this new worklist to get an overview of the maintenance and            Maintenance Planner, Service
 and Maintainance                   service orders with all related follow-up documents for the service delivery.       Delivery Manager
 Orders                              Display and Change of service and maintenance orders
                                     Display of equipmentsDisplay of customers
                                     Display of SD documents
                                     Display of notifications
Corporate Services > Enterprise Asset Management > Enterprise Asset Management: Continuous Improvements


 Feature: Improvement in fleet maintenance
 functionality
Delivered by Business Function LOG_EAM_CI_3
     Basic order view has been enhanced with fields for fleet maintenance. To enable better reporting for fleet
      maintenance, SAP NetWeaver BI content has been improved for better reporting features required for
      maintaining a fleet of vehicles.




AR clerk
                                                                                                Fleet Management

                                                         Transportation                                                              Fleet Information
                  Fleet                                                                           Fleet Maintenance

                                                                                                                                 *                                 *
                                                            Logistics                              ( Notications, Work Orders,       ( Performance Analysis and
              Administration                              (Routing, scheduling,                   and Warranty Management )             transportation logistics
                                                           and GPS Tracking)                                                                  analysis)


                                                                                                                                         * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                             Business value
     Vehicle maintenance solution should be very simple and                                   Maintenance planners can make knowledge-based
      have adaptable reporting features                                                         decisions with improved reports and simplified transactions
Corporate Services > Enterprise Asset Management > Enterprise Asset Management: Continuous Improvements


 Feature: Improved maintenance reports

Delivered by Business Function LOG_EAM_CI_3
     Proper reporting can drastically change the way that people can make business decisions. The following
      reports support maintenance planners and supervisors in making informed decisions.
          1. POWER list for maintenance plans
          2. POWER list for service and maintenance orders
          3. Simplified reports for maintenance cost and maintenance backlog



AR clerk
                                                                                                Maintenance Planning and Scheduling

                                              Create &
             Create                                                                                           Confirm Work
                                               manage
           Maintenance
           notification
                                             maintenance
                                                order            *             Execute Order
                                                                                                     *          (capture
                                                                                                                history)
                                                                                                                                           Analysis
                                                                                                                                                      *
                                                                                                                                      * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                             Business value
     Current SAP NetWeaver BI content works only after                                        Improved framework of simplified reporting allows usage of
      extracting data from a transactional system, so that the                                  transactional data along with extracted information. That
      reports have only historical details                                                      enables near-real-time reporting with a large volume of data.
Corporate Services > Enterprise Asset Management > Enterprise Asset Management: Continuous Improvements


 Feature: Planning and execution of inspection
 rounds
Delivered by Business Function LOG_EAM_CI_3
     Up to now, there has been no way to plan and process routes for operator-based maintenance or
      inspection rounds in an easy way. Enhanced features can support possibilities to define routes for
      operator-based maintenance and streamline execution of the routes.




AR clerk
                                                                                                Maintenance Planning and Scheduling

                                                                                   Create
                                                                                                                Create &
                                                                                Maintenance/
             Planning
                              *                Inspection
                                                                 *                 Repair
                                                                                 notification
                                                                                                               manage work
                                                                                                                  order
                                                                                                                                        Execute Order


                                                                                                                                      * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                             Business value
     Without a standard solution, customers do not use core                                   Standard inspection rounds solution allows definition of a
      SAP ERP for inspection rounds, reducing their chances to                                  task list that can used to plan and execute inspection or
      improve the performance of assets based on the observed                                   operator rounds. Technical objects that need an inspection
      and actual performance of the assets.                                                     and measurement point that are used to record actual
                                                                                                inspection results are linked together to prepare inspection
                                                                                                rounds.
Corporate Services > Enterprise Asset Management > Enterprise Asset Management: Continuous Improvements


 Feature: Improved work clearance
 management with line-up
Delivered by Business Function LOG_EAM_CI_3
     Complex assets require functionality to view and verify current and normal operational conditions for a
      group of logically related technical objects. The line-up functionality provides a mechanism by which
      planners can update the current operational conditions for a group of logically related technical objects en
      masse.



AR clerk
                                                                                                Work Clearance Management

                                                Create
                                                                                Create &
           Maintenance                       Maintenance/
            Planning
                              *                 Repair
                                              notification
                                                                               manage work
                                                                                  order
                                                                                                              Execute Order              Confirm work
                                                                                                                                                        *
                                                                                                                                       * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                             Business value
     Currently, the operational condition of a technical object                               Improved productivity of planner and technician in the field
      has to be updated individually, resulting in lost time
Corporate Services > Enterprise Asset Management > Enterprise Asset Management: Continuous Improvements


 Feature: Power list for Maintenance Plan

Delivered by Business Function LOG_EAM_CI_3
     The new POWL Maintenance Plan is used as a worklist to get an overview of the maintenance plan. It
      contains information on all call off objects (documents), which are created through a maintenance plan.
          Display of contracts
          Display of service orders
          Display of notifications
          Display of purchase orders
          Display and Change of maintenance plan

AR clerk
                                                                                                Maintenance Planning and Scheduling

                                                Create
                                                                                Create &
           Maintenance                       Maintenance/
            Planning
                              *                 Repair
                                              notification
                                                                               manage work
                                                                                  order
                                                                                                              Execute Order             Confirm work


                                                                                                                                      * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                             Business value
     The new POWL Maintenance Plan provides a simplified                                      Improve productivity and effectiveness of a Service Delivery
      view on Maintenance Plans. In this view, service delivery                                 Manager and/or Maintenance Planner
      manager (and/or a maintenance planner) can find all call
      off objects (documents), which are created through a
      maintenance plan at a glance. From this work list he can
      easily evaluate, for instance, the costs of each planned
      order and the other information for coordination needs.
Corporate Services > Enterprise Asset Management > Enterprise Asset Management: Continuous Improvements


 Feature: Improvements in automatic release
 of orders
Delivered by Business Function LOG_EAM_CI_3
     It is now possible to define whether the preventive maintenance order will be released automatically




AR clerk
                                                                                                Maintenance Planning and Scheduling

                                              Create &                                                                                    Create and
             Create                                                               Perform
                                               manage                                                          Complete the                manage
           Maintenance
           notification
                                             maintenance
                                                order            *              Maintenance
                                                                                    task
                                                                                                                  order                    warranty
                                                                                                                                            claim
                                                                                                                                      * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                             Business value
     It is not always possible to release an order automatically.                             With these enhancements, the planner can review the
      Some may require additional planning.                                                     planning cycle after setting up the new maintenance plans.
                                                                                                Once the order created by maintenance plans are stable,
                                                                                                the planner can set the feature of automatic release of order.
Corporate Services > Enterprise Asset Management > Enterprise Asset Management: Continuous Improvements


 Feature: View document attached using
 generic object services
Delivered by Business Function LOG_EAM_CI_3
     It is possible to attach documents to technical objects directly using generic object services. These
      documents can be viewed during transaction processing. Most of the transactions of maintenance
      processing are enhanced to show the availability of documents




AR clerk
                                                                                                Maintenance Planning and Scheduling

                                                Create
                                                                                Create &
             Planning                        Maintenance/
           (technical Objects)                  Repair
                                              notification
                                                                               manage work
                                                                                  order
                                                                                                             Execute Order
                                                                                                                             *         Confirm work


                                                                                                                                     * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                             Business value
     Currently, it is tedious to view the documents attached to a                             New development will reduce time and effort to view
      technical objects. Most of the time, technicians and                                      documents
      planners refer to paper documents that are old.
Corporate Services > Enterprise Asset Management > Enterprise Asset Management: Continuous Improvements


 Feature: List report for maintenance plan
 items
Delivered by Business Function LOG_EAM_CI_3
     Multilevel list reports are enhanced to select and view maintenance plan items




AR clerk
                                                                                                Maintenance Planning and Scheduling

                                                Create
                                                                                Create &
           Maintenance                       Maintenance/
            Planning
                              * *               Repair
                                              notification
                                                                               manage work
                                                                                  order
                                                                                                             Execute Order            Confirm work


                                                                                                                                    * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                             Business value
     Currently, there are no reports to view maintenance plan,                                Easy reporting along a multilevel list improves the
      maintenance items, and calls together for a given set of                                  information presented to maintenance planners, thereby
      technical objects                                                                         improving the productivity of maintenance planners
Corporate Services > Enterprise Asset Management > Enterprise Asset Management: Continuous Improvements


 Feature: Improved material planning
 integration with maintenance order
Delivered by Business Function LOG_EAM_CI_3
     It is possible for maintenance planner to indicate when the vendor should deliver a part




AR clerk
                                                                                                Maintenance Planning and Scheduling

                                                Create
                                                                                Create &
           Maintenance                       Maintenance/
            Planning
                              *                 Repair
                                              notification
                                                                               manage work
                                                                                  order
                                                                                                             Execute Order             Confirm work


                                                                                                                                     * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                             Business value
     Currently, the requirement date for parts needed for an                                  More accurate material planning reduces disruption of
      order gets calculated based on a scheduled date for the                                   maintenance work
      operation and lead time of the part. Many times, this date
      may be incorrect because of the buffer needed for internal
      and external factors. That results in a disruption in
      maintenance execution because of the nonavailability of
      parts.
Corporate Services > Enterprise Asset Management


 Enterprise Asset Management: Time Zone
 Support
 Maintenance Execution Without Boundaries
 Benefits                                                                                LOG_EAM_TZS_1
    Enhanced time zone management ensures that each maintenance document can be consistently managed independently of the location of a technical
     object and the location of a user's workplace



                                                                                                                              Target Users for this Business
 New Features                   Description
                                                                                                                              Function

 Enhanced time zone                Time zone support supports two different system or business constellations:                  Maintenance planner,
 management for                      1. Distributed system landscape where all systems are working with the same time zone       maintenance supervisor,
 maintenance processing              2. Central system landscape (only one system) where users from various time zones are       and maintenance technician
                                      working in the central system
                                   "Time Zone Support" supports two system or business constellations:
                                     1. Distributed system landscape where every system is working with the same time
                                      zone.
                                     2. Central system landscape (only one system) where users from various time zones are
                                      working on this central system.
Corporate Services > Enterprise Asset Management > Enterprise Asset Management: Time Zone Support


 Feature: Enhanced time zone management for
 maintenance processing
Delivered by Business Function LOG_EAM_TZS_1
     Time zone support supports two different system or business constellations:
          1. Distributed system landscape where all systems are working with the same time zone
          2. Central system landscape (only one system) where users from various time zones are working in the central system
     "Time Zone Support" supports two system or business constellations:
          1. Distributed system landscape where every system is working with the same time zone.
          2. Central system landscape (only one system) where users from various time zones are working on this central system.


AR clerk
                                                                                                Maintenance Planning and Scheduling

                                                Create
                                                                                 Create & „
           Maintenance                       Maintenance/
            Planning
                              *                 Repair
                                              notification       *              manage work
                                                                                   order            *         Execute Order              Confirm work
                                                                                                                                                        *
                                                                                                                                      * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                              Business value
     Users in different time zones encounter difficulties when                                Enhanced time zone management ensures that each
      they require maintenance work on the same or different                                    maintenance document can be consistently managed
      parts of a technical object. Manual calculation of the                                    independently of the location of a technical object and the
      corresponding time consumes too much labor time and                                       location of a user's workplace
      effort and sometimes causes data inconsistency. Time-
      based information is critical for analysis, like turn-around
      and mean time between two repairs.
Corporate Services > Enterprise Asset Management


 Maintenance Event Builder and Logbook
 Innovations
 Improved Authorization Checks and Visibility of Log Books Within One Hierarchy
 Benefits                                                                               LOG_EAM_POM_2
    The authorization enhancement for the maintenance event builder improves information security and compliance of technical objects.
    Enterprise asset management is enhanced to provide user log books with all the technical objects that belong to one hierarchy. That improves the
     visibility of information and the productivity of technicians.


 Improvements of                                                                                                           Target Users for this Business
                                Description
 existing features                                                                                                         Function

 Enhancements in                 It improves the authorization aspects of the information displayed by using the             Maintenance planner
 maintenance event                maintenance event builder.                                                                  Maintenance supervisor
 builder                         It also populates the WBS element on the location tab of maintenance and service
                                                                                                                              Maintenance technician
                                  orders.

 Enhanced electronic               The logbook is an application that is used to record and track the discrepancies,         Maintenance planner
 logbook                            readings taken, and events that occur during line maintenance operations. This            Maintenance supervisor
                                    tool provides the staff operating the assets with the functions to log defects and
                                    enter operational data. It provides maintenance personnel, such as maintenance
                                    engineers and technicians, with functions that ensure the timely and reliable
                                    execution of their maintenance tasks.
Corporate Services > Enterprise Asset Management


 REA, SAP Recycling Administration


 Simplification and Optimization of Regulatory Compliance Processes
 Benefits                                                                                J_7L_REA_CORE
  Ensure regulatory compliance with country-specific requirements
  Increased efficiency through automated and integrated processes (people and know-how) and central master data storage
  Accuracy and savings through higher transparency in quantity-flow- racking of packaging, products, devices, and batteries in circulation due to improved
   data quality, extensive reporting options, and audit trail
  Ensure meeting other product-related standards (example: retail packaging sustainability)


                                                                                                                           Target Users for this Business
 New Features                   Description
                                                                                                                           Function

 Environmental fee                 SAP Recycling Administration helps enterprises meet regulatory requirements               Environmental compliance
 calculation and reporting          from environmental directives regarding packaging, batteries, or waste electric            officers, financial analysts,
                                    and electronic equipment (WEEE). It helps them monitor, calculate, and settle              and corporate accountants
                                    corresponding recycling fees with recycling partners or compliance schemes. It
                                    accurately verifies quantity flows from SD and MM. It generates required, exact
                                    environmental declarations cross-country and helps reduce costs and provide
                                    transparency due to accounting precision and comprehensive cost analysis
                                    functionality. It automatically generates condition records for price calculation in
                                    SD and accruals for financial accounting in FI. It tracks regulatory amendments
                                    and supports audits.
Corporate Services > Enterprise Asset Management > REA, SAP Recycling Administration


 Feature: Environmental fee calculation and
 reporting
Delivered by Business Function J_7L_REA_CORE
     SAP Recycling Administration helps enterprises meet regulatory requirements from environmental directives regarding
      packaging, batteries, or waste electric and electronic equipment (WEEE). It helps them monitor, calculate, and settle
      corresponding recycling fees with recycling partners or compliance schemes. The solution accurately verifies quantity flows
      from SD and MM. Recycling Administration generates required, exact environmental declarations cross-country and helps
      reduce costs and provides transparency due to accounting precision and comprehensive cost analysis functionality. It
      automatically generates condition records for price calculation in SD and accruals for financial accounting in FI. It tracks
      regulatory amendments and supports audits.

AR clerk                                                                                   Environmental Fee Calculation
                                                                                           and Reporting

                                                                                             Calculate payment,
                                                       Setup compliance                      generate & control               Run internal &
           Setup master data
                                                           schemes                              compliance
                                                                                                 declaration
                                                                                                                             external reporting
                                                                                                                                                   *
                                                                                                             * Integrated compliance process
 Customer business challenges                                                          Business value
     Time-consuming generation of environmental declarations                             Ensure regulatory compliance with country-specific
      and verification; risk of inaccurate sales and master data;                          requirements. Increased efficiency thanks to automated and
      cumbersome generation of cross-country reporting;                                    integrated processes (people and know-how) and central
      expensive to ensure local regulatory tracking; difficult to                          master data storage. Accuracy and savings through higher
      ensure regulatory compliance and transparency when                                   transparency in quantity-flow tracking of products, devices,
      data is stored in legacy systems; and redundancy of                                  and batteries due to improved data quality and extensive
      multiple local systems that need to be maintained and                                reporting options. Audit trail. Ensure meeting additionally
      extended.                                                                            other product-related standards (example: retail packaging
                                                                                           sustainability).
Corporate Services > Enterprise Asset Management


 Refurbishment and Subcontracting


 Enhancement for Refurbishment Orders and Subcontracted Repair Processing
 Benefits                                                                                  LOG_EAM_ROTSUB
    Visibility and tracking of all parts that are under repair or refurbishment. Helps streamline order planning and execution. This enhancement simplifies the
     process steps and improves the availability of proper transactional data.



                                                                                                                               Target Users for this Business
 New Features                   Description
                                                                                                                               Function

 Enhancements in                   Refurbishment orders are used to repair or overhaul a serialized or nonserialized             Material planners
 refurbishment order                spare part for equipment. Refurbishment orders have been enhanced in the                      Maintenance planners
                                    following areas:
                                     1. Refurbishment order has been enhanced to manage material upgrade
                                     2. Refurbishment orders can be assigned with one or more notifications
                                     3. Conversion of planned order into refurbishment order from the MRP list
                                   These enhancements ensure proper planning of refurbishment work and better
                                    visibility of parts being repaired or refurbished

 Enhancements in                 When performing maintenance or providing maintenance services to customers,                     Maintenance planner
 subcontracting                   serialized or nonserialized parts can be sent to a vendor. Enhancement in                       Material planner
                                  subcontracting process allows integration between the maintenance process and
                                  the procurement processes.
                                 The subcontracting solution allows integrated management of maintenance or
                                  service order processing with procurement processes to purchase services from
                                  an external vendor. It also ensures visibility of parts throughout the time when it is
                                  outside the organization, enabling the planner to concentrate on reducing
                                  operation costs at reduced inventory.
Corporate Services > Enterprise Asset Management


 Refurbishment and Subcontracting



 Improvements of                                                                                                      Target Users for this Business
                                Description
 existing features                                                                                                    Function

 Enhanced stock                    Stock determination enhancement simplifies the stock determination process. It       Maintenance planner
 determination for                  uses predeternimed rules to issue parts for orders so that the planner does not      Material planners
 maintenance and                    need to define the stock type during an early stage.
 service processing
Corporate Services > Enterprise Asset Management > Refurbishment and Subcontracting


 Feature: Enhancements in refurbishment order

Delivered by Business Function LOG_EAM_ROTSUB
     Refurbishment orders are used to repair or overhaul a serialized or nonserialized spare part for equipment.
      Refurbishment orders have been enhanced in the following areas:
         1. Refurbishment order has been enhanced to manage material upgrade
         2. Refurbishment orders can be assigned with one or more notifications
         3. Conversion of planned order into refurbishment order from the MRP list
     These enhancements ensure proper planning of refurbishment work and better visibility of parts being
      repaired or refurbished




        Manage                                                                         Control                             Subcontr           Complete
                                  Create                     Plan                                       Execute
        demand                                                                        repair &                                act            the repair
        to repair
          parts
                      *          scope of
                                   work
                                                            refurb.
                                                             Order
                                                                          *            refurb.
                                                                                        work
                                                                                                 *      repair &
                                                                                                         refurb.
                                                                                                                           repair &
                                                                                                                            refurb
                                                                                                                                                 or
                                                                                                                                            refurb order
                                                                                                                                                           *
                                                                                                                             work
                                                                                                                                     * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                             Business value
     Customers who want visibility into the work load on repair                           1. These enhancements ensure proper planning of
      parts and an option to evaluate problems in technical                                   refurbishment work
      objects.                                                                             2. Better visibility of parts being repaired or refurbished
                                                                                           3. Streamlined internal repair process
                                                                                           4. Option to upgrade parts after repair or refurbishment
Corporate Services > Enterprise Asset Management > Refurbishment and Subcontracting


 Feature: Enhancements in subcontracting

Delivered by Business Function LOG_EAM_ROTSUB
     When performing maintenance or providing maintenance services to customers, serialized or nonserialized
      parts can be sent to a vendor. Enhancement in subcontracting process allows integration between the
      maintenance process and the procurement processes.
     The subcontracting solution allows integrated management of maintenance or service order processing
      with procurement processes to purchase services from an external vendor. It also ensures visibility of parts
      throughout the time when it is outside the organization, enabling the planner to concentrate on reducing
      operation costs at reduced inventory.
AR clerk                                                                                                                  Rotable Management


        Manage                                                                         Control                           Subcontr          Complete
                                  Create                     Plan                                      Execute
        demand                                                                        repair &                              act           the repair
        to repair
          parts
                                 scope of
                                   work
                                                            refurb.
                                                             Order
                                                                          *            refurb.
                                                                                        work
                                                                                                 *     repair &
                                                                                                        refurb.
                                                                                                                         repair &
                                                                                                                          refurb
                                                                                                                                    *         or
                                                                                                                                         refurb order
                                                                                                                                                        *
                                                                                                                           work
                                                                                                                                   * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                             Business value
     Companies want to track inventory availability with                                  1. Improved visibility of parts that are under repairs or
      subcontractors                                                                          refurbishment by subcontractors; reduces inventory
                                                                                              needed to maintain an asset.
                                                                                           2. Better information flow between maintenance and
                                                                                              procurement team reduces turn-around time to repair a
                                                                                              part
                                                                                           3. Reduced turn-around time improves service level and
                                                                                              reduces cost because of inventories
Agenda




  Introduction and Overview                          6. Procurement and Logistics Execution
  1. Analytics                                              6.1 Procurement
                                                            6.2 Inbound and Outbound Logistics
          1.1 Financial Analytics
                                                            6.3 Inventory and Warehouse Management
          1.2 Strategic Enterprise Management
  2. Financials                                      7. Product Development and Manufacturing
          2.1    Financial Supply Chain Management          7.1   Life-cycle Data Management
                                                            7.2   Manufacturing Execution
          2.2    Corporate Governance
                                                            7.3   Product Development
          2.3    Financial Accounting
                                                            7.4   Production Planning
          2.4    Treasury
                                                            7.5   General
  3. Human Capital Management
          3.1 Talent Management
                                                     8. Sales and Service
                                                            8.1 General
          3.2 Workforce Process Management
          3.4 General                                       8.2 Sales Order Management
                                                     9. Cross SAP ERP
  4. End-user Service Delivery
  5. Corporate Services
          5.1    Enterprise Asset Management
          5.2    Project and Portfolio Management
          5.3    Quality Management
          5.4    Real Estate Management
          5.5    Travel Management
Corporate Services > Project and Portfolio Management


 Project System: Handling Large Projects -
 Master Data
 Efficient Master Data Maintenance of Large Project Structures
 Benefits                                                                               OPS_PS_HLP_1
    Users can maintain separate subsets of project master data in a high-performance manner with the new project editor
    A flexible locking concept can be used in the project editor to enable parallel changes to project master data
    Master data changes can be saved as drafts in the project editor and analyzed or compared with other drafts in the new draft workbench
    Users can access the project editor using a new project work list based on their access control list authorizations
    Data can be uploaded to a cache to improve the performance of master data changes in the project editor



                                                                                                                           Target Users for this Business
 New Features                    Description
                                                                                                                           Function

 Master data changes of             The project editor allows users to work on subsets of master data of large projects      Users responsible for
 large project structures            in a high-performance manner                                                              master data maintenance of
                                    A more flexible locking concept allows users to work in parallel on project master        large projects
                                     data if required or save project master data changes as drafts                           Administrators responsible
                                    A new draft workbench can be used to edit drafts or compare drafts before saving          for project system
                                     the project master data changes                                                           performance
                                    The project editor can be accessed directly or using a user specific project work
                                     list (based on ACL authorization)
                                    A cache upload can be used to yield additional performance improvements of
                                     master data maintenance in the project editor
Corporate Services > Project and Portfolio Management > Project System: Handling Large Projects - Master Data


 Feature: Master data changes of large project
 structures
Delivered by Business Function OPS_PS_HLP_1
  The project editor allows users to work on subsets of master data of large projects in a high-performance manner
  A more flexible locking concept allows users to work in parallel on project master data if required or save project master data
   changes as drafts
  A new draft workbench can be used to edit drafts or compare drafts before saving the project master data changes
  The project editor can be accessed directly or using a user specific project work list (based on ACL authorization)
  A cache upload can be used to yield additional performance improvements of master data maintenance in the project editor



                                                           Project Planning with PS


                                                                                                                                         Plan Dates,
              Create Project                               Work on Project                                   Manage
                Structure                                   Master Data
                                                                                   *                        Documents
                                                                                                                        *                  Resour-
                                                                                                                                      ces, Financials, ...

                                                                                                                                         * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                                  Business value
     Performance of maintaining master data of large project                                      Allows users to work on subsets of project master data,
      structures                                                                                    such as organizational data, control data, user and customer
     Restrictive locking concept                                                                   data, and so on, improving the performance of data
                                                                                                    maintenance
                                                                                                   Master data changes can be performed without locking
                                                                                                    objects if required
Index




  Introduction and Overview                          6. Procurement and Logistics Execution
  1. Analytics                                              6.1 Procurement
                                                            6.2 Inbound and Outbound Logistics
          1.1 Financial Analytics
                                                            6.3 Inventory and Warehouse Management
          1.2 Strategic Enterprise Management
  2. Financials                                      7. Product Development and Manufacturing
          2.1    Financial Supply Chain Management          7.1   Life-cycle Data Management
                                                            7.2   Manufacturing Execution
          2.2    Corporate Governance
                                                            7.3   Product Development
          2.3    Financial Accounting
                                                            7.4   Production Planning
          2.4    Treasury
                                                            7.5   General
  3. Human Capital Management
          3.1 Talent Management
                                                     8. Sales and Service
                                                            8.1 General
          3.2 Workforce Process Management
          3.4 General                                       8.2 Sales Order Management
                                                     9. Cross SAP ERP
  4. End-user Service Delivery
  5. Corporate Services
          5.1    Enterprise Asset Management
          5.2    Project and Portfolio Management
          5.3    Quality Management
          5.4    Real Estate Management
          5.5    Travel Management
Corporate Services > Quality Management


 Quality Management: Enhanced Functions in
 Q-Notifications
 Enhanced Notification Process for Improved Problem Management with Flexible Assignment
 Objects; Improved Sending and Reporting Capabilities
 Benefits                                                                                 OPS_QM_NOTIFICATION
    Reduced number of notifications for the same issues and different objects (example: same problem for different batches)
    Reduced effort and processing time for issues due to fewer notifications
    Improved information flow and security due to enhanced mail process with attachments
    Reduced effort due to improved selection capability in reports
    Reduced software maintenance costs due to improved standard functionality instead of need for customer-specific coding
    Improved data visibility due to the enhancement flexibility that is provided

                                                                                                                          Target Users for this Business
 New Features                   Description
                                                                                                                          Function

 Multiple assignments of           With the functionality, employees can assign multiple objects of the same type,           Employees who record
 objects at notification            such as several batches, serial numbers, inspection lots, and so on to one                 issues and notifications
 item level                         particular notification at the item level.                                                 such as customer
                                                                                                                               complaints. Employees who
                                                                                                                               are part of a CAPA process.

 Enhanced e-mail                   The enhancement enables an improved e-mail process for notifications in terms             Employees participating in a
 process for notifications          of:                                                                                        CAPA or any issue- or
                                     Sending the notification as PDF documents                                                complaints-recording
                                     Attaching documents assigned to the notification and others                              process.
                                     Using the assigned partners (task-responsible employees)
                                     Using distribution lists based on assigned partners
                                     Documenting the transmission information in notification tasks


 Improved partner                The enhancement provided an extended partner selection for quality notifications:           Employees dealing with
 selection capability and         notifications and tasks can now be selected via several partner roles and multiple           issues, complaints, and
 list output for notification     partners.                                                                                    notification processing,
 reports                         In addition, a business add-in allows adjustment of the list output for quality              such as in a CAPA process
                                  notifications in terms of adding further columns such as text fields for customer or
                                  vendor name.
 Corporate Services > Quality Management > Quality Management: Enhanced Functions in Q-Notifications


   Feature: Multiple assignments of objects at
   notification item level
 Delivered by Business Function OPS_QM_NOTIFICATION
       With the functionality, employees can assign multiple objects of the same type, such as several batches,
        serial numbers, inspection lots, and so on to one particular notification at the item level.




Sales clerk in complaints                                Quality Improvement - Example: customer complaint
department
                                                         (CAPA Process)
                                                                                                                                                QA person
                                                                                                                                                and others

              Create quality
                                                                                                       Assign returned               Perform CAPA
              notification for                          Describe defect in
                customer
                complaint
                                                            an item
                                                                                                        batches to the
                                                                                                         given defect    *          process (trigger
                                                                                                                                    tasks, inform…)

                                                                                                                                       * Improvements
   Customer business challenges                                                               Business value
       Today, customers need to create several notifications if                                  Improved corrective and preventive actions (CAPA) process.
        they want to record issues or complaints for several                                      Reduced number of notifications for recording issues and
        objects like a number of defective batches. That leads to                                  complaints for several given objects - example: one
        great effort in maintaining the data and during evaluation                                 notification for 10 batches instead of 10 separate
        of the information.                                                                        notifications.
                                                                                                  Reduced effort for maintaining the data.
                                                                                                  Increased visibility due to clearer structures.
                                                                                                  Simplified analysis during a CAPA process.
Corporate Services > Quality Management > Quality Management: Enhanced Functions in Q-Notifications


 Feature: Enhanced e-mail process for
 notifications
Delivered by Business Function OPS_QM_NOTIFICATION
     The enhancement enables an improved e-mail process for notifications in terms of:
         Sending the notification as PDF document
         Attaching documents assigned to the notification and others
         Using the assigned partners (task-responsible employees)
         Using distribution lists based on assigned partners
         Documenting the transmission information in notification tasks

                                                        Quality Improvement – Example: internal problem during production
QA person
                                                                                                                                                         QA person
                                                                                                                                                         and others

            Create Qnotification                        Attach documents to                           Send notification with
                     to                                   describe current                            attachments via e-mail                  Perform CAPA
            record quality issue
             during production
                                                          situation, assign
                                                              partners
                                                                                                         to all partners to
                                                                                                               inform          *               process …


                                                                                                                                               * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                                Business value
     With SAP ERP, employees could only send the notification                                   Improved communication between related partners during a
      itself by e-mail and send attached documents separately.                                    CAPA process via:
      An automatic proposal of assigned partners was missing,                                            Enhanced usability of the e-mail process
      as was a clear documentation of the transmission                                                   Automatic proposal of assigned partners
      information. The sending process was not compliant with                                            Guidance through the sending procedure
      any regulations in terms of preventing information from                                            Flexible selection of additional recipients and documents
      being changed afterward.                                                                           Clear documentation of transmission information and status of
                                                                                                          the notification data
                                                                                                         Prevention from forgetting to inform people
                                                                                                         Automatic proposal of attached documents
Corporate Services > Quality Management > Quality Management: Enhanced Functions in Q-Notifications


 Feature: Improved partner selection capability
 and list output for notification reports
Delivered by Business Function OPS_QM_NOTIFICATION
     The enhancement provides an extended partner selection for quality notifications: notifications and tasks
      can now be selected via several partner roles and multiple partners.
     In addition, a business add-in allows adjustment of the list output for quality notifications in terms of adding
      further columns such as text fields for customer or vendor name.


QA people, purchasing clerk                             Quality Improvement – Example: Analyze status of CAPA Process
           ……                             Quality Manager




               Perform CAPA                                                                            Search for notifications
                                                        Check current status
                   process                                                                               related to a distinct           Analyze status
               for complaints
               against vendor
                                                         of different CAPA
                                                             processes
                                                                                                        vendor and different
                                                                                                      internal people involved    *       and details
                                                                                                                                                          *
                                                                                                                                         * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                                Business value
     With earlier versions, analyzing notifications or complaints                               Improved reporting capabilities for quality notifications
      for a number of involved partners required multiple runs of                                Reduced number of runs for the same investigation for
      the same report, such as for a number of task-responsible                                   different partners
      people, meaning great effort and time for researching and                                  Extended visibility of information
      consolidating the information.                                                             Flexible adjustment capability of reports
     Extensions of the list output were possible only by copying
      the reports and making adjustments, which meant a great
      IT maintenance effort and effort for checking updates via
      SAP notes.
Agenda




  Introduction and Overview                          6. Procurement and Logistics Execution
  1. Analytics                                              6.1 Procurement
                                                            6.2 Inbound and Outbound Logistics
          1.1 Financial Analytics
                                                            6.3 Inventory and Warehouse Management
          1.2 Strategic Enterprise Management
  2. Financials                                      7. Product Development and Manufacturing
          2.1    Financial Supply Chain Management          7.1   Life-cycle Data Management
                                                            7.2   Manufacturing Execution
          2.2    Corporate Governance
                                                            7.3   Product Development
          2.3    Financial Accounting
                                                            7.4   Production Planning
          2.4    Treasury
                                                            7.5   General
  3. Human Capital Management
          3.1 Talent Management
                                                     8. Sales and Service
                                                            8.1 General
          3.2 Workforce Process Management
          3.4 General                                       8.2 Sales Order Management
                                                     9. Cross SAP ERP
  4. End-user Service Delivery
  5. Corporate Services
          5.1    Enterprise Asset Management
          5.2    Project and Portfolio Management
          5.3    Quality Management
          5.4    Real Estate Management
          5.5    Travel Management
Corporate Services > Real Estate Management


 Corporate Real Estate

 Increase the Value of Your Property Portfolio Through Optimized Corporate Real Estate
 Management in an Integrated Environment
 Benefits                                                                              RE_CRE_MISC
    You can use this business function to optimize your corporate real estate management in an integrated environment. It allows your organization to
     simplify space and move management as well as room reservation.



                                                                                                                            Target Users for this Business
 New Features                  Description
                                                                                                                            Function

 Long-term seating              Definition of different degrees of occupancy, so that various quotes of workplaces            Managers of corporate real
 arrangement and move            can be assigned to an occupant (1/2, 1, 2, and so on)                                          estate
 planning                       Reports on vacancy and degrees of occupancy on a given a period or key date                   Facility managers
                                Reversal of postings for reservation and continuous occupancy and improved                    Business users
                                 posting run
                                Optimized handling of different move dates (move-in or move-out) within one
                                 single move plan
Corporate Services > Real Estate Management > Corporate Real Estate


 Feature: Long-term seating arrangement and
 move planning
Delivered by Business Function RE_CRE_MISC
     Definition of different degrees of occupancy, so that various quotes of workplaces can be assigned to an
      occupant (1/2, 1, 2, and so on)
     Reports on vacancy and degrees of occupancy on a given a period or key date
     Reversal of postings for reservation and continuous occupancy and improved posting run
     Optimized handling of different move dates (move-in or move-out) within one single move plan


                                      Business Partner                Corporate RE manager                      Employee




          Master data                                                                               Post                      Move
                                                 Create                 Enter
               for                                                                               continuous                 planning
          architectural
              view
                                                business
                                                 partner
                                                                      continuous
                                                                      occupancy      *           occupancy
                                                                                                   to CO        *              and
                                                                                                                           realization      *
                                                                                                                       * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                Business value
     Optimized space utilization is difficult to achieve within an              Increased space utilization and reduced operating costs
      organization due to a lack of transparency and rapid                       Improved investment decisions through comprehensive
      changes of demand                                                           analysis of space demand and offer
                                                                                 Full transparency and allocation of costs and revenues to
                                                                                  departments
Corporate Services > Real Estate Management


 Real Estate 2

 Simplify Administration of Your Property Portfolio and Leases Through Enhanced Processes in
 Commercial Real Estate Management
 Benefits                                                                                     RE_GEN_CI_2
 This business function delivers:
    Improved options for comprehensive analytics
    Better insight and transparency in existing data
    Increased and optimized efficiency for cost efficiency analysis
    Legal requirements according to FASB 13


                                                                                                                            Target Users for this Business
 New Features                    Description
                                                                                                                            Function

 Considering requested              The setting of a requested notice date allows the real estate search to offer an          Managers of commercial and
 notice date in real estate          object according to that date, although the contractual notice date goes into effect       residential real estate
 search                              at a later time                                                                           Lease administrators

 Cost efficiency analysis:          Allowing mass changes of current expense items along with periodic changes,               Managers of residential real
 mass change of current              such as changes in flat fees for management and maintenance costs                          estate, especially public
 expense items and                  Hanging expense items depending on the age of an object; maintenance costs                 housing
 reporting                          terminating expense items
                                    Reporting of all data for one or more cost efficiency analysis
                                    Reporting cross-references for current expenses and financing types

 Increased insight:                 Optimized SAP NetWeaver BI content for real estate management:                            Managers of commercial and
 enhancements in SAP                    Time dependency for master data attribute (where missing)                              corporate real estate
 NetWeaver Business                     Assignment of business partners
 Intelligence                           Evaluating reasons for notice and vacancy, as well as fluctuation
                                        New report for architectural view
                                        Delta updates
                                        MultiCube for conditions and measurements
Corporate Services > Real Estate Management


 Real Estate 2



                                                                                                                        Target Users for this Business
 New Features                   Description
                                                                                                                        Function

 Extended functionality          Report of option rate ratios for real estate objects                                     Managers of commercial and
 through various                 New selection criteria, condition type and condition purpose, for periodic postings       corporate real estate
 enhancements                    Editable time-slot filter within report
                                 Reports for sales-based settlement were changed technically to the RE reporting
                                  framework
                                 Copy architectural and usage objects in RE navigator via drag-and-drop

 Improved land                   Simplified handling of parcel number (freely definable in one single field or            Managers of land and
 management and                   automatic assignment)                                                                     property.
 extended analytics              Additional and freely definable classification due to new function field in the
                                  general data tab
                                 New infosystem reports: land registers, parcel objects, area analysis of
                                  possession areas, classifications in real estate cadastre, and usage of parcels


 Improvements of                                                                                                        Target Users for this Business
                                Description
 existing features                                                                                                      Function

 Taking possession               The possession dates (start and end dates) represent the period in which a lessee        Managers of commercial real
 dates for straight-lining        obtains control of the leased property.                                                   estate
 according to FASB 13            According to FASB 13, this is the period that is relevant for straight-line              Lease administrators
 into account                     calculations.
                                 New possession dates fields in the real estate contract make this possible.
Corporate Services > Real Estate Management > Real Estate 2


  Feature: Considering requested notice date in
  real estate search
Delivered by Business Function RE_GEN_CI_2
     The setting of a requested notice date allows the real estate search to offer an object according to that
      date, although the contractual notice date goes into effect at a later time




Old Tenant                       Prospect                     Lease Manager                                                        New Tenant




                                                  Create
             Give notice                                         Search for
                                                real estate                                     Create                      Create
             to existing
              contract         *                  search
                                                 request
                                                                  offered
                                                                  objects          *         contract offer
                                                                                                               *         new contract
                                                                                                                                            *
                                                                                                                      * Improvements
  Customer business challenges                                          Business value
     Limited functionality in real estate search                            Better consideration of customers' requests
                                                                             Higher flexibility of real estate search and contract offer
Corporate Services > Real Estate Management > Real Estate 2


 Feature: Cost efficiency analysis:
 mass change of current expense items and reporting

Delivered by Business Function RE_GEN_CI_2
     Allowing mass changes of current expense items along with periodic changes, such as changes in flat fees
      for management and maintenance costs
     Hanging expense items depending on the age of an object; maintenance costs
     terminating expense items
     Reporting of all data for one or more cost efficiency analysis
     Reporting cross-references for current expenses and financing types

                                                                         Real Estate Manager




                                                              Change rules                      Execute mass                Analyze reports
              Create cost
          efficiency analysis
                                                               for current
                                                                expenses       *                  change for
                                                                                               current expenses   *        for cost efficiency
                                                                                                                                analysis         *
                                                                                                                              * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                        Business value
     Significant administration effort when changing expense                            Gaining efficiency thanks to mass change process
      items for a huge number of cost efficiency analysis                                Gaining insight and transparency
     Lacking reporting tools for analytics
Corporate Services > Real Estate Management > Real Estate 2


 Feature: Increased insight: enhancements in
 SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence
Delivered by Business Function RE_GEN_CI_2
     Optimized SAP NetWeaver BI content for real estate management:
          Time dependency for master data attribute (where missing)
          Assignment of business partners
          Evaluating reasons for notice and vacancy,
          New report for architectural view
          Delta updates
          MultiCube for conditions and measurements

AR clerk
                                                                               Real Estate Analysis Reporting SAP BI

                                                          Change Real
              Execute Real                                                        Load Real Estate              Execute Real Estate
                                                             Estate
            Estate Queries in                                                        Data to BI                  Queries in BI with
                                                          Data in Source
                   BI                                                                 System                      up-to-date data
                                                             System


 Customer business challenges                                              Business value
     Missing information in SAP NetWeaver Business                           Improved options for comprehensive analytics
      Intelligence, especially regarding architectural views                  Better insight and transparency in existing data
     Performance issues due to missing delta updates                         Improved performance
Corporate Services > Real Estate Management > Real Estate 2


 Feature: Extended functionality through
 various enhancements
Delivered by Business Function RE_GEN_CI_2
     Report of option rate ratios for real estate objects
     New selection criteria, condition type and condition purpose, for periodic postings
     Editable time-slot filter within report
     Reports for sales-based settlement were changed technically to the RE reporting framework
     Copy architectural and usage objects in RE navigator via drag-and-drop


                                                               Real Estate Manager




                                                                  Make periodic                               Analyze reports for
                Manage master data
                                                     *        postings for contracts
                                                                   and vacancy              *               sales-based settlement
                                                                                                               and option rates      *
 Customer business challenges                                              Business value
     Lack of external audit requirements regarding option rate                Increased usability
      ratios                                                                   More flexibility and individual adaptability
     Limited capabilities regarding selections for periodic                   Better insight and transparency
      postings
Corporate Services > Real Estate Management > Real Estate 2


 Feature: Improved land management and
 extended analytics
Delivered by Business Function RE_GEN_CI_2
     Simplified handling of parcel number (freely definable in one single field or automatic assignment)
     Additional and freely definable classification due to new function field in the general data tab
     New Infosystem reports: land registers, parcel objects, area analysis of possession areas, classifications in
      real estate cadastre, and usage of parcels



                                                                           Real Estate Manager




             Master Data of                                                                      Handle land                   Analyze land
                                                         Enter cadastral
              parcels and
             land registers
                                                         classifications
                                                                                                 registers for
                                                                                                    parcel
                                                                                                                             management and
                                                                                                                              cadastral data     *
 Customer business challenges                                                       Business value                              * Improvements
     Lack of country-specific requirement for property taxes in                        More flexibility in the handling of land master data
      SAP for Public Sector, particularly in Canada                                     Improved options for comprehensive analytics
                                                                                        Better insight into and transparency of existing data
Corporate Services > Real Estate Management


 RE-FX Localization Topics for Portugal


 Enhance the Business Processes of Flexible Real Estate Management
 Benefits                                                                                   FIN_LOC_CI_3
    New country-specific functionalities will be available to customers. Legal compliance.




                                                                                                                              Target Users for this Business
 New Features                  Description
                                                                                                                              Function

 Rent adjustment                The standard rent adjustment reports (for example: REAJPR) shall be used to                     Customers using business
                                 calculate the new rent adjustment for the current contracts. This solution could be              processes in the area of real
                                 done via a BADI implementation of interface IF_EX_REAJ_ADJUSTMENT.                               estate management in
                                The BADI checks customizing to see which type of condition or reason could be                    Portugal
                                 used for a single contract

 Stamp tax                        The stamp tax has two bases:                                                                  Customers using business
                                       1.Stamp on documents (of specific operations)                                             processes in the area of real
                                       2.Stamp on operations, purchases and sales, rentals, credit utilizations, and so on       estate management in
                                In the context of real estate context, it is a one-time tax based on the original                Portugal
                                 conditions of the contracts or on the differences from adjustments, specifically on
                                 rental and property transfer contracts. The tax to apply is determined by the
                                 official stamp tax table.
                                Calculation depends on a condition that varies in percentage and is based on the
                                 amount of another condition.
Corporate Services > Real Estate Management > RE-FX Localization Topics for Portugal


 Feature: Rent adjustment

Delivered by Business Function FIN_LOC_CI_3
     The standard rent adjustment reports (for example: REAJPR) shall be used to calculate the new rent
      adjustment for the current contracts. This solution could be done via a BADI implementation of interface
      IF_EX_REAJ_ADJUSTMENT.
     The BADI checks customizing to see which type of condition or reason could be used for a single contract.




                                                                                                 Corporate Real Estate Management

         Create master                                                                                            Post
                                                  Create                                 Enter                                         Move plannin
            data for                                                                                           continuous
         architectural
             view
                                                 business
                                                  partner
                                                                                       continuous
                                                                                       occupancy      *       occupancy to
                                                                                                                   CO         *            and
                                                                                                                                        realization   *
                                                                                                                                    * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                               Business value
     Recent legal changes in Portugal established special rent                                 Automatic adjustment enabling and legal compliance
      adjustment methods for older contracts (contract start date
      before 1990). Recent contracts are adjusted based on the
      consumer price index that is published each year.
     The main goal of these changes is to rehabilitate old
      buildings and define a fairer system rule for the real estate
      market and lease in and out processes.
Corporate Services > Real Estate Management > RE-FX Localization Topics for Portugal


 Feature: Stamp tax

Delivered by Business Function FIN_LOC_CI_3
     The stamp tax has two bases:
           1.Stamp on documents (of specific operations)
           2.Stamp on operations, purchases and sales, rentals, credit utilizations, and so on
     In the context of real estate context, it is a one-time tax based on the original conditions of the contracts or on the
      differences from adjustments, specifically on rental and property transfer contracts. The tax to apply is determined by the
      official stamp tax table.
     Calculation depends on a condition that varies in percentage and is based on the amount of another condition.


                                                                                                 Corporate Real Estate Management

          Create master                                                                                                    Post
                                                  Create                                 Enter                                                           Move plannin
             data for                                                                                                   continuous
          architectural
              view
                                                 business
                                                  partner
                                                                                       continuous
                                                                                       occupancy          *            occupancy to
                                                                                                                            CO               *               and
                                                                                                                                                          realization              *
                                                                                                                                                     * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                               Business value
     In the context of real estate, the triggering event                                       Calculation                                        Tax rates
                                                                                              Periodicity                                          In case of
      corresponds to the moment of contract signature in cases                                                                                          Acquisition contracts: 0.8%
                                                                                              Single-time tax: it is applied only once
      of:                                                                                      with the public deed of the contract                     Lease-out contracts: 1.0%
         Acquisition of the ownership or of other rights to real estate                        Taxable base                                           Rise of conditions in lease-out
                                                                                                                                                         contracts: 0.0%
         Lease or sublease of real estate                                                          Property taxable value in case of
                                                                                                     acquisition contracts                          Postings
         Changing agreement conditions related to increasing the basic rent
                                                                                                    Total of conditions in rent agreement          Payment
          amount                                                                                    Difference in conditions when the              Reporting
                                                                                                                                                        Month
                                                                                                                                                        Annual
Index




  Introduction and Overview                          6. Procurement and Logistics Execution
  1. Analytics                                              6.1 Procurement
                                                            6.2 Inbound and Outbound Logistics
          1.1 Financial Analytics
                                                            6.3 Inventory and Warehouse Management
          1.2 Strategic Enterprise Management
  2. Financials                                      7. Product Development and Manufacturing
          2.1    Financial Supply Chain Management          7.1   Life-cycle Data Management
                                                            7.2   Manufacturing Execution
          2.2    Corporate Governance
                                                            7.3   Product Development
          2.3    Financial Accounting
                                                            7.4   Production Planning
          2.4    Treasury
                                                            7.5   General
  3. Human Capital Management
          3.1 Talent Management
                                                     8. Sales and Service
                                                            8.1 General
          3.2 Workforce Process Management
          3.4 General                                       8.2 Sales Order Management
                                                     9. Cross SAP ERP
  4. End-user Service Delivery
  5. Corporate Services
          5.1    Enterprise Asset Management
          5.2    Project and Portfolio Management
          5.3    Quality Management
          5.4    Real Estate Management
          5.5    Travel Management
Corporate Services > Travel Management


 Travel Management 2


 Streamline and Simplify Your Travel Management Process
 Benefits                                                                                FIN_TRAVEL_2
  Full self-service automation for daily travelers: acceleration of data entry, greater adoption of travel and expenses self-services across all business units
   and traveler types, acceleration for booking and expense reporting for corporate event management processes, reduced direct travel costs due to
   transparency and comparability of air and rail fares at time of booking, reduced process costs for meeting and event travel.
  For public sector organizations: self-service travel request, automated pretrip approval, budget encumbrances and pretrip cost transparency for
   managers, automated expense reporting for faster reimbursement processes, and improved cash flow.

                                                                                                                               Target Users for this Business
 New Features                  Description
                                                                                                                               Function

 Express expense sheet            The express expense sheet allows fast entry of expense reports per week, month,                Daily travelers (sales staff
                                   or custom period. Especially for countries with per-diem based reimbursement                    and service technicians)
                                   rules for travel expenses, the solution now offers a fast and efficient way to                  who have many short trips a
                                   capture expenses in a single user interface. Standard travel management features                week or month
                                   like receipt imaging, credit card clearing, simulation, and mass print are also
                                   supported. Customers can benefit from great flexibility of configuration of user
                                   interface content, so the mass entry really meets the needs of staff that travels a
                                   great deal.

 Employee self-services           The new self-service applications of create travel request and create expense                  Employees and travelers
 of travel management              report are especially designed for the needs of public sector organizations:
 for public sector                 explicit approval of means of transportation and accommodation, detailed
                                   estimated costs for precise budget encumbrance and cost transparency for
                                   managers, standard travel authorization for specific travel activities, expense
                                   report with full compliance with German statutory requirements on a federal level
                                   and state (Bundesland) level. However, the enhancements can also be used by
                                   other industries and countries.
Corporate Services > Travel Management


 Travel Management 2



                                                                                                                            Target Users for this Business
 New Features                   Description
                                                                                                                            Function

 Travel planning with              The air availability in travel planning now offers the following enhancements:             Travelers and employees
 airfare matrix and mixed           interactive airfare matrix for easy comparison and selection of available flights and
 air/rail availability              fares, premium economy class, search at multiple airports, and comparison of air
                                    and rail connections in a mixed display.

 ES bundle: integration of         The ES bundle integrates the different process steps of travel and event                   Corporate Travel Managers;
 SAP Travel                         management (partner solutions) into one complete process. From the creation,                Corporate Meeting & Event
 Management and SAP                 approval, operational handling, online travel booking, and expense reporting of             Managers; Corporate
 Event Management                   employees up to the analytics part the complete data can be captured on an SAP              Purchaser
                                    cost object. That will be the container for all event-related costs.
Corporate Services > Travel Management > Travel Management 2


 Feature: Express Expense Sheet

Delivered by Business Function FIN_TRAVEL_2
     The Express Expense Sheet allows fast entry of expense reports per week, month, or custom period.
      Especially for countries with per-diem based reimbursement rules for travel expenses, the solution now
      offers a fast and efficient way to capture expenses in a single user interface. Standard travel management
      features like receipt imaging, credit card clearing, simulation, and mass print are also supported.
      Customers can benefit from great flexibility of configuration of user interface content, so the mass entry
      really meets the needs of staff that travels a great deal.

Traveler
                                                                             Online Self-Service for Travel Expenses


                 Travel Request and                            Travel Planning /                       Online Self-Service for
                  Pre-Trip Approval                             Online Booking                           Travel Expenses
                                                                                                                                 *
                                                                                                                 * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                           Business value
     Previously, the Web-based self-services did not offer a               Process automation for expense management, reduced
      mass entry function for countries and industries with per-             process costs (indirect travel expenses), accelerated
      diem reimbursements. That implied that daily travelers like            reimbursement processes, controlled compliance with travel
      maintenance technicians had to use the road map-guided                 policy, and reduced approval items for managers.
      self-service of create expense report and enter one
      expense report per day, which took too long.
Corporate Services > Travel Management > Travel Management 2


 Feature: Employee Self-Services of Travel
 Management for Public Sector
Delivered by Business Function FIN_TRAVEL_2
     The new self-service applications of create travel request and create expense report are especially
      designed for the needs of public sector organizations: explicit approval of means of transportation and
      accommodation, detailed estimated costs for precise budget encumbrance and cost transparency for
      managers, standard travel authorization for specific travel activities, expense report with full compliance
      with German statutory requirements on a federal level and state (Bundesland) level. However, the
      enhancements can also be used by other industries and countries.

Traveler
                                                                             Travel Request and Pre-Trip Approval
                                                                             Online Self-Service for Travel Expenses

                 Travel Request and                            Travel Planning /                        Online Self-Service for
                  Pre-Trip Approval
                                                 *              Online Booking                            Travel Expenses
                                                                                                                                  *
                                                                                                                   * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                           Business value
     Public sector organizations must follow a clear pretrip               Travelers in public sector organizations can now: get online
      approval process, which is still mainly handled in paper-              approval for planned business trip and send reservation
      based processes with manual signatures - triggering                    request to travel agent (if approved), complete repopulated
      enormous process and material costs. Approvers never                   expense reports in an intuitive Web application. Managers
      had full transparency of the costs that would arise with a             can now preview the estimated costs, explicitly approve
      trip they approve to be taken. For use as self-service                 customizable travel categories, and review expense reports
      scenario, no Web application was available so far.                     online. Travel experts can now concentrate on real
                                                                             fulfillment tasks such as search for cost efficient
                                                                             transportation and exception checks.
Corporate Services > Travel Management > Travel Management 2


 Feature: Travel Planning with airfare matrix
 and mixed air/rail availability
Delivered by Business Function FIN_TRAVEL_2
     The air availability in travel planning now offers the following enhancements: interactive airfare matrix for
      easy comparison and selection of available flights and fares, premium economy class, search at multiple
      airports, and comparison of air and rail connections in a mixed display.




Traveler
                                                                             Travel Planning / Online Booking


                 Travel Request and                            Travel Planning /                        Online Self-Service for
                  Pre-Trip Approval                             Online Booking
                                                                                      *                   Travel Expenses


                                                                                                                   * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                           Business value
     Travelers need more information on the available fares                All new features will further help companies reduce direct
      and their conditions, and the differences between the fares            travel costs, because travelers and travel arrangers can
      available for one flight connection to make the right choice           make better decisions on the lowest available fare and
      for their travel schedules and to save direct travel costs.            means of transportation that still meets the traveler's
      Also, when choosing between air and rail connections,                  requirements for flexibility, rebooking, and meeting schedule.
      travelers have had to look up different availability pages to
      compare duration and fares.
Corporate Services > Travel Management > Travel Management 2


 Feature: ES bundle: Integration of SAP Travel
 Management and Event Management
Delivered by Business Function FIN_TRAVEL_2
     The ES bundle integrates the different process steps of travel and event management (partner solutions)
      into one complete process. From the creation, approval, operational handling, online travel booking, and
      expense reporting of employees up to the analytics part the complete data can be captured on a SAP cost
      object. That will be the container for all event-related costs.



Traveler
                                                                             Travel Request and Pre-trip approval
                                                                             Travel Planning / Online Booking
                                                                             Online Self Service for Travel Expenses

                 Travel Request and                            Travel Planning /                       Online Self-Service for
                  Pre-Trip Approval
                                                 *              Online Booking
                                                                                      *                  Travel Expenses


                                                                                                                  * Improvements
                                                                                                                                 *
 Customer business challenges                                           Business value
     Customers today have no control of their meeting and                  Strategic meeting programs give companies the option to
      event spending and how it is spent. Approximately 30% to               leverage transient travel volume when negotiating with
                                                                             service providers. Integration of such tools with SAP Travel
      40% of total travel and entertainment expenditures is
                                                                             Management and the SAP ERP landscape can save
      spent on meetings and events. The data relevant for                    companies up to 5% of their costs. Covering the complete
      negotiations with suppliers is missing.                                process from approval to analytics allows customers to get a
                                                                             complete picture of their spend for meetings and events and
                                                                             enable them to save money based on better vendor
                                                                             negotiation and elimination of manual process steps.
Agenda




  Introduction and Overview                          6. Procurement and Logistics Execution
  1. Analytics                                              6.1 Procurement
                                                            6.2 Inbound and Outbound Logistics
          1.1 Financial Analytics
                                                            6.3 Inventory and Warehouse Management
          1.2 Strategic Enterprise Management
  2. Financials                                      7. Product Development and Manufacturing
          2.1    Financial Supply Chain Management          7.1   Life-cycle Data Management
                                                            7.2   Manufacturing Execution
          2.2    Corporate Governance
                                                            7.3   Product Development
          2.3    Financial Accounting
                                                            7.4   Production Planning
          2.4    Treasury
                                                            7.5   General
  3. Human Capital Management
          3.1 Talent Management
                                                     8. Sales and Service
                                                            8.1 General
          3.2 Workforce Process Management
          3.4 General                                       8.2 Sales Order Management
                                                     9. Cross SAP ERP
  4. End-user Service Delivery
  5. Corporate Services
          5.1    Enterprise Asset Management
          5.2    Project and Portfolio Management
          5.3    Quality Management
          5.4    Real Estate Management
          5.5    Travel Management
Procurement and Logistics Execution


 Procurement and Logistics Execution
 Business Functions (1/2)
     Value Proposition for Procurement and Logistics Execution enhancements within SAP Enhancement Package 4 for
     SAP ERP
     In Procurement, SAP Enhancement Package 4 reinforces the integration between the procure-to-pay process and financials and
     materials management processes. The key enhancements delivered also extend the strategic sourcing functionality available in SAP
     SRM to SAP ERP to ensure better compliance with negotiated terms. In addition, procurement of services is significantly enhanced to
     simplify the management of complex requirements.
     Key enhancements: Integration of MM and FI / SAP SRM Integration / Extended Service Procurement
     In Logistics Execution, SAP Enhancement Package 4 further simplifies the integration of external warehouse management systems into
     the SAP landscape to allow integrated logistics management. The key enhancements delivered also broaden the Extended Warehouse
     Management functionality into the manufacturing environment ensuring end-to-end process coverage. In addition, new functionalities
     further automate the Vendor Management Inventory (VMI) process to reduce stock-outs and improve delivery service levels.
     Key enhancements: Integration of External Warehouse Management System / Extended Warehouse Management Integration with
     Manufacturing / VMI/ Cross-Industry RFID Enabled Core Logistics


 Description                                                                            Target Customers

    Procure-to-Pay - SAP SRM Integration:                                                 Customers interested in using a central contract
     Enhancements for joint procurement processes between SAP SRM and SAP ERP,              repository with enhanced contract life-cycle management
     including central contract usage, usage of RFx functionality, new and enhanced         capabilities
     processes for service procurement, and a harmonized user interface for SAP SRM        Customers interested in using RFx functionality in
     and SAP ERP functionality.                                                             combination with operational purchasing processes
                                                                                            taking place in SAP ERP
                                                                                           Customers interested in enhanced service procurement
                                                                                            capabilities

    MM, Multiple Account Assignment:                                                      For multiple account assignment with valuated goods
     Enables use of multiple account assignments with amount-based distribution even        receipt: all customers who have materials management in
     when valuated goods receipt is activated. It affects the complete procure-to-pay       place across industries (a legal requirement in several
     cycle from purchasing of goods and services to inventory management and invoice        countries). For multiple account assignment with amount
     verification.                                                                          based distribution: public sector (U.S. Federal) and other
                                                                                            customers and industries.
Procurement and Logistics Execution


 Procurement and Logistics Execution
 Business Functions (2/2)
 Description                                                                                                    Target Customers

    MM, Integration of MM and FI:                                                                                 Customers procuring high-value goods or services who want to
     Integration of procure-to-pay processes into financials and materials management,                              use down-payment and retention functionalities
     including down-payment creation, clearing, and retentions

    Functional Improvements in MM for EM and ExD:                                                                 Beverage companies that use empties management
     Improvements for empties management in purchasing (beverage industry):                                         functionality from SAP in purchasing and that need an overview
     provision of an empties account for each supplier                                                              of empties accounts for their different suppliers

    Serial Numbers in Purchasing:                                                                                 Serial number-handling in procurement
     Serial numbers in purchase requisitions and purchase orders

    Vendor-Managed Inventory:                                                                                     Customer who wants to use a complete, integrated SAP ERP-
         1) Integrated SAP ERP-SAP APO consignment vendor-managed inventory (VMI) process                          SAP APO VMI process that supports parallel consigned and
         2) Parallel consignment and non consignment models                                                        non consigned models, automation of VMI process with an
         3) Improved VMI master data integration                                                                   automatic ATP check for VMI shipments created in SAP APO,
         4) Automatic ATP check when TLB shipment is transferred to SAP ERP before creation of the                 and automatic creation of VMI master data
          corresponding sales order

    Item Unique Identification:                                                                                   Defense organizations which need to support IUID in their
     IUID is a functionality which is based on a US DOD (Department of Defense) policy and which is                 supply process and suppliers who are oblidged to support IUID
     adressed in a NATO Stanag (Standardization agreement). These documents require that all serialized             because they delver to defense organizations.
     items which are dedicated to be identified in a globally unique manor are assigned to a so called UII
     (unique item identifier) which is a globally unique number for an item and which is assigned to the item
     when it is produced and remains assigned to the item until it is scrapped.

  For details please refer to industry presentation (chapter Defense & Security)
    EDI Monitors:                                                                                                 Enables core customers using the EDI monitors who have
     Enables a core customer to use the EDI monitors for forecast schedules, the EDI                                installed the DIMP stack, but don't want to switch on business
     monitor for ORDERS IDocs, and the EDI monitor for inbound ASNs.                                                function set DIMP. That means they use the benefit of
                                                                                                                    functionality delivered by DIMP without activating DIMP.

    Outsourced Manufacturing: New subcontracting cockpit                                                          Customers who want to optimize collaboration with their
         Tracking of external production                                                                           subcontractors and who are striving for better visibility
         Collect subcontracting WIP costs on production orders                                                     Customers with a demand for on-time information flow and
         In-time consumption of component                                                                          improved control of the outsourced manufacturing process
         Stock-in transfer to track shipment
         Consumption/scrap report
Procurement and Logistics Execution


 Procurement and Logistics Execution
 ES Bundles (1/2)
 Description

    Cross-Industry RFID Enabled Core Logistics:
     This ES bundle provides an initial set of enterprise services to enable RFID-enabled core logistics processes that affect delivery, handling
     unit, and selected goods movement objects in SAP ERP and for objects of SAP Auto-ID Infrastructure

    Integration of External Warehouse Management System:
     This ES bundle enables the usage of SAP ERP 6.0 for integrated logistics processes with an external, decentralized WMS (non-SAP or SAP).
     Replication of business objects and messages from SAP ERP 6.0 and the retrieval from an external WMS via enterprise services.

    Inventory Management:
     The ES bundle provides enterprise services for managing inventory by quantity and value, planning and data entry of goods movements (incl.
     inventory optimization), physical inventory (especially for inventory managed by non SAP systems). Completes logistic bundles Integration of
     TMS and Integration of WM and focuses on after the fact triggered changes on inventory.
     This bundle reuses a lot of already existing services and complements them where necessary in the areas of
      Goods Movements;
      Physical Inventory;
      Product Data Maintenance: Material (Master).
     There are a lot of synergies with other bundles e.g. Store Fresh Item Management (Physical Inventory), Integration of WM (Material Master),
     PLM connectivity, etc.

    Procure To Pay:
     This ES bundle service-enables the main purchasing-related business documents: Purchase Request, Purchase Order, Purchasing Contract,
     Inbound Delivery, Invoice and Supplier and Material master data. The bundle allows integration of external solutions (A2A integration) as well
     as collaboration with suppliers and intercompany business (B2B integration).
Procurement and Logistics Execution


 Procurement and Logistics Execution
 ES Bundles (2/2)
 Description

    Trade & Commodity Management:
     Commodity management comprises purchasing, selling, trading, logistics, and financial planning and execution of commodities, including
     the handling of related secondary costs (expenses)

    Central Contract Management:
      Will distribute SRM Central Contract to ERP Backend Systems
      Backend Source of Supply Determination leverages SRM Central Contract
      Offer ERP Backend Systems the most actual price calculation by calling the SRM pricing routine at runtime
      Update SRM Central Contract with release information and release history from all ERP Backend Systems

    Supplier Collaboration for Supply Chain Management:
     This ES bundle focuses on the supplier collaboration functionality delivered with SAP ICH 5.0 (SAP ICH is now known as SAP Supply Network
     Collaboration or SAP SNC). With supplier collaboration processes, you can cooperate with suppliers of all sizes to reduce transactional costs
     by replacing fax and email as primary modes of communication. The B2B integration between systems is performed using enterprise
     services. In this way, smaller suppliers without specialized EDI infrastructures can integrate into the supply network by setting up web access
     to SAP ICH in their software landscapes. All they need is Internet access and web browsers. You can deploy SAP ICH as a standalone
     application or further integrate it with SAP or non-SAP back-end solutions on the customer and supplier sides using the delivered enterprise
     services.

    Outsourced Manufacturing :
     Outsourced Manufacturing requires effective communication and accurate information sharing with supply chain partners to assure on-time
     delivery of quality products at agreed upon cost. Procuring the right components (per approved manufacturer parts list) at the right price is
     critical. With manufacturing outsourced, the ability to convey desired product configuration to contract manufacturers and instruct them
     which component batches to consume becomes essential. By providing necessary enterprise services, we will enable our customers to
     collaborate with their contract manufacturers/component suppliers by sharing vital information.

    Service Procurement:
      Improves integration between Materials Management (ERP) and Supplier Self-Services (SUS) inside the SRM Solution to also support Service
       procurement
      Will allow the use of an external supplier collaboration system
      Allows customers and industry solutions to create user interfaces on top of the core business logic
Procurement and Logistics Execution


 ES Bundle – Cross-Industry RFID Enabled Core
 Logistics

     This ES bundle provides an initial set of RFID-enabled Core Logistics Services
     Facilitates the implementation of RFID-enabled Core Logistics Services through cross-component (SAP AII and ERP)
      service implementations
     Facilitates the custom creation of enterprise service based user interfaces and xApps
     Facilitates the usage of systems which generate, scan and print Unique Identifiers (such as Electronic Product Codes or
      EPC) for products and logistics units


Shop-Floor Worker                     Shop-Floor Worker                 Shop-Floor Worker                  Shop-Floor Worker




               Mass Tag                               RFID-enabled                          RFID-enabled                       RFID-enabled
           Commissioning of                             Inbound                              Outbound                             Goods
           Products to Stock                           Processing                            Processing                         Movements

Backend                                                    ERP 6.0                          ERP 6.0                             ERP 6.0
                 SAP AII 7.1
System                                                      EhP4                             EhP4                                EhP4

                                                          SAP AII 7.1                   SAP AII 7.1                            SAP AII 7.1


Business Value                                                                 Use Cases
   Seamless integration of RFID-enabled core logistics                           Mass Tag (Auto-ID Label) Commissioning of homogenous
    processes with ERP delivery and Handling Units                                 Product Pallets to Stock
   Automation with RFID                                                          RFID-enabled Outbound Processing
   Lower TCO and Easy service based integration of RFID-                         RFID-enabled Inbound Processing
    enabled Core Logistics Processes                                              RFID-enabled Goods Receipt with reference to PO
Procurement and Logistics Execution


 ES Bundle – Integration of External Warehouse
 Management System

       This bundle as associated version w/ Ehp4 serves as „round-off‟ to previous scope in order to complement
        communication channel to / from ERP with an external Warehouse Management System on eSOA
        manner. Not only delivery based message choreography is an option but also master data and planning
        data exchange / error handling are other capabilities.


Warehouse                             Warehouse                Warehouse                       Warehouse
  clerk                                 clerk                   planner                        supervisor




                 Inbound/                           Master                    Warehouse
                                                                                                              Error
                Outbound                             Data                       Volume
                                                                                                            Handling
                Processing                        Processing                   Forecast

Backend           ERP 6.0                          ERP 6.0                       ERP 6.0                         ERP 6.0
System             EhP4                             EhP4                          EhP4                            EhP4


Business Value                                                     Use Cases
   Increase accuracy and speed of warehouse communication            Inbound Delivery Processing
   Service enabling in needed ERP applications                       Outbound Delivery Processing
   Simplify data communication if data access from outside is        Master Data replication
    needed                                                            Preview of Warehouse volume
                                                                      Goods Movement / Stock Transfer Booking
Procurement and Logistics Execution


 ES Bundle – Inventory Management



       The ES bundle provides enterprise services for managing inventory by quantity and value, planning and
        data entry of goods movements (incl. inventory optimization), physical inventory (especially for inventory
        managed by non SAP systems). It complements other logistic bundles around transportation and
        warehousing. In addition, it allows for a consistent view on the material master information related to
        inventory management.

Logistic / Warehouse          Logistic / Warehouse                Sales                     Product Manager         Logistic / Warehouse
        Clerk                      Supervisor                 Representative                                                Clerk




                                                                                                     Maintain Material
             Inventory                  Inventory Optimization          GR and put away
                                                                                                       Inventory and              Update physical
           Information /                 (incl. transfer postings        w/o delivery
                                                                                                       valuation                Inventory results
              Lookup                       & stock transfers)              or ASN
                                                                                                      information

Backend           ERP 6.0                   ERP 6.0                        ERP 6.0                     ERP 6.0                        ERP 6.0
System             EhP4                      EhP4                           EhP4                        EhP4                           EhP4


Business Value                                                                 Use Cases
   Simplified access to look up inventory quantities as well as                    Enable integration of complementary solutions (e.g., mobile
    other product information at various organizational units,                       devices, inventory optimization, cycle counting)
    special stocks and stock qualifications as well as inventory                    Enable partners and customers to build new UIs for improved
    values                                                                           user productivity (e.g., warehouse clerk), and increased
   Increased inventory accuracy: Inventory management and                           flexibility
    reconciliation of remote, non-SAP units to capture                              Enable redundant-free, consistent, real-time view on and
    information on remote/distributed stock (e.g., at LSP,                           management of inventory
    external stock, stock on truck, and so on)                                      Inventory handling for sample management
                                                                                    Material Information Sheet
 Procurement and Logistics Execution


  ES Bundle – Procure to Pay



       Allows the use of an external sourcing system
       Improves the connection between ERP and collaboration systems for the most important procurement
        documents
       Allows customers and industry solutions to create their own user interfaces on top of the core business
        logic

    Planner                    Buyer                     Buyer            Buyer               Warehouse Clerk        Invoice Clerk
Project Member                                      Strategic Buyer                           Project Member




           Demand                                                                                       Goods
                                        Purchase                                 Purchase
           Creation                                             RFx                                    Receipt                  Invoice
                                        Request                                   Order
              and                                            Processing                                   and                 Processing
                                       Processing                               Processing
           Planning                                                                                  Service Entry


Business Value                                                            Use Cases
   Easy use of sourcing/bidding functionality                               Connection to external sourcing (A2A)
   Easy integration with external planning systems                          Notification of external systems (notification, information A2A)
   Easy integration with collaboration systems                              Communication with business partner (B2B)
   Do-it-yourself simplification for customers                              Document creation/update from external system (A2A)
                                                                             Backend enabling for new user interfaces (A2X)
Procurement and Logistics Execution


 ES Bundle – Trade and Commodity
 Management

     ES Bundle Trade & Commodity Management allows integration of SAP Endorsed Business Solution “Commodity SL 5.6” by
      Triple Point Technology via A2A enterprise SOA into SAP ERP 6.0
     Facilitates a seamless Front-to-Back Office Commodity Management Scenario
     Synchronizes Trading Front Office physical and financial positions with SAP logistics and SAP Treasury and Risk
      Management enabling a SOX and IFRS compliant system



Front Office                     VP Finance               Mid Office Operation            Finance / A/R Clerk        Controller
  Trader                                                       Manager




                                                                         Schedules
                                              Approves
               Enters                                                    Shipment                          Creates                 Reviews
                                                Credit
               Trade                                                      Assigns                          Invoice                Profitability
                                              Exception
                                                                           Vessel
Backend Commodity SL                          ERP 6.0                      ERP 6.0                         ERP 6.0                 ERP 6.0
System      5.6                                EhP4                         EhP4                            EhP4                    EhP4


Business Value                                                                   Use Cases
   Integrated trading system ERP to manage procurement,                            Integration of SAP Endorsed Business Solution Commodity SL
    selling & trading of commodities incl. commodity risk                            5.6 with SAP ERP 6.0
    management                                                                      Real-Time integration of Physical and Financial Positions
   World class front-office-trading delivered via EBS partner                      Facilitation of Hedge Accounting (FAS 133 / IAS 39)
    Triple Point Technology                                                         Allows a customer real-time view of his true physical and
   Transparency along the supply chain                                              financial exposure
   Commodity trading platform as basis for commodity
    accounting compliance
Procurement and Logistics Execution


 ES Bundle – Central Contract Management



       Will distribute SRM Central Contract to ERP Backend Systems
       Backend Source of Supply Determination leverages SRM Central Contract
       Offer ERP Backend Systems the most actual price calculation by calling the SRM pricing routine at runtime
       Update SRM Central Contract with release information and release history from all ERP Backend Systems




                                                                                                                        Update
                                                                            Leverage              Receive              Central
            Create                    Distribute     Purchase                Central
                                                                                                   Latest              Contract
           Central                     Central       Request                Contract
                                                                            In Source             Pricing               With
           Contract                   Contract      Processing
                                                                           Assignment               Data               Release
                                                                                                                        Data

Business Value                                                     Use Cases
   Benefit in all backend systems from strong functionalities        Connection to external central contract hub
    provided by the SRM central contract                              Document creation/update from external system
   Seamless integration between central contract hub and             Update external central contract by local releases
    operational procurement systems
   Most actual pricing calculation across local and central
    system
   Overall release history and information at one central place
    – the SRM central contract
Procurement and Logistics Execution


 ES Bundle – Supplier Collaboration for the
 Supply Chain

        Eases B2B communication between suppliers and customers using standardized enterpriseservices
        Allows visibility and enables speed and flexibility across the supply chain
        Target Market: All customers interested in using standardized enterprise services for collaboration
        Majority of the package already functioning in SCM 4.1

                          Supply Planner                         Purchaser                Goods Recipient


    Buying                                     Planning for
                                                                              Purchasing                     Goods receiving
    Organization                               replenishment



    Supplying
                                                Sales planning               Order processing                Delivery
    Organization
                        Sales Responsible               Order Processor                         Dispatcher

Business Value                                                                       Use Cases
   Enterprise SOA standardization results in ready-to-use,                             Supply Planner exchanging information with sales responsible
    easy-to-understand B2B interfaces and reduces manual                                 for replenishment
    interfaces. This leads to:                                                           Purchaser/Goods Recipient interacting with order processors;
         reduced TCO during implementation and operations                               Dispatcher exchanging information with purchaser/goods
         flexibility to use landscape that best fits individual business needs
                                                                                         recipient
         extend reach to new business partners and system users
                                                                                         Supplier Managed Inventory: Sales Responsible receives
         faster procurement cycles
   Resulting higher visibility of customer data to supplier (and                        demand and stock information from Supply Planner and sends
    vice versa) leads to                                                                 back replenishment planning results
           better process decisions and planning
           real time status information during entire process
Procurement and Logistics Execution


 ES Bundle – Outsourced Manufacturing



       Outsourced Manufacturing requires effective communication and accurate information sharing with supply chain partners to
        assure on-time delivery of quality products at agreed upon cost. Procuring the right components (per approved manufacturer
        parts list) at the right price is critical. With manufacturing outsourced, the ability to convey desired product configuration to
        contract manufacturers and instruct them which component batches to consume becomes essential. By providing necessary
        enterprise services, we will enable our customers to collaborate with their contract manufacturers/component suppliers by
        sharing vital information.

             Buyer                 Buyer or               Supplier              Buyer              Supplier          Buyer               Buyer
           (in ERP)             Supplier (in SNC)         (in SNC)            (in ERP)             (in SNC)        (in SNC)            (in ERP)

        Create, Change &       Receive & Review     Confirm, Receive &       Receive             Request       Approve & Publish   Receive & Update
            Publish                                       Publish         Purchase Order      Purchase Order       Change
        Purchase Order          Purchase Order       Purchase Order        Confirmation          Change         Purchase Order     Purchase Order

    Used
    Services
        Create &               Replenishment        Replenishment        Confirm                               Replenishment       Change
        Change                 Order                Order                Purchase                              Order               Purchase
        Purchase Order         Notification         Confirmation         Order                                 Notification        Order



Business Value                                                                  Use Cases
   Enable essential and accurate information sharing between                      MPN Collaboration (request and confirm same/different MPN;
    supply chain partners                                                           check against AMPL)
   Streamline and facilitate outsourced manufacturing                             Price Collaboration (request and confirm same/different Price)
    collaboration                                                                  Share Product Configuration with Supplier/Contract
                                                                                    Manufacturer
                                                                                   Share Component Batch Number and Classification with
                                                                                    Contract Manufacturer
Procurement and Logistics Execution


 ES Bundle – Service Procurement



         Improves integration between Materials Management (ERP) and Supplier Self-Services (SUS) inside the
          SRM Solution to also support Service procurement
         Will allow the use of an external supplier collaboration system
         Allows customers and industry solutions to create user interfaces on top of the core business logic


                           Purchase         Purchase         Service
           ERP 6.0
    ERP

            EhP4




                                                                                     Invoice               Credit
                            Order            Order            Entry
                                                                                   Processing              Memo
                            Create         Processing         Sheet
            SRM 7.0




                                               Sales
    SUS




                              Sales                                                  Invoice               Credit
                                              Order        Confirmation
                              Order                                                Processing              Memo
                                            Processing




Business Value                                              Use Cases
   Easy use of purchasing functionality                       Procurement document collaboration with external business
   Easy integration with external collaboration system         partner (B2B)
   Do-it-yourself simplification for customers
Index




  Introduction and Overview                          6. Procurement and Logistics Execution
  1. Analytics                                              6.1 Procurement
                                                            6.2 Inbound and Outbound Logistics
          1.1 Financial Analytics
                                                            6.3 Inventory and Warehouse Management
          1.2 Strategic Enterprise Management
  2. Financials                                      7. Product Development and Manufacturing
          2.1    Financial Supply Chain Management          7.1   Life-cycle Data Management
                                                            7.2   Manufacturing Execution
          2.2    Corporate Governance
                                                            7.3   Product Development
          2.3    Financial Accounting
                                                            7.4   Production Planning
          2.4    Treasury
                                                            7.5   General
  3. Human Capital Management
          3.1 Talent Management
                                                     8. Sales and Service
                                                            8.1 General
          3.2 Workforce Process Management
          3.4 General                                       8.2 Sales Order Management
                                                     9. Cross SAP ERP
  4. End-user Service Delivery
  5. Corporate Services
          5.1    Enterprise Asset Management
          5.2    Project and Portfolio Management
          5.3    Quality Management
          5.4    Real Estate Management
          5.5    Travel Management
Procurement and Logistics Execution > Procurement


 Functional Improvements in MM for
 EM and ExD
 Provision of an Empties Account for Each Supplier in Empties Management in Purchasing
 (Beverage Industry)
 Benefits                                                                              /BEV1/NE_ENH
    Beverage companies using this functionality will have an overview of the empties account for each of their suppliers, which was previously impossible.




                                                                                                                            Target Users for this Business
 New Features                   Description
                                                                                                                            Function

 Supplier-related empties          The functionality provides a list of transactional data (each single movement per          Beverage industry
 account in purchasing              account in quantity and value) as empties account data related to each supplier.            customers (purchasing
                                                                                                                                department)


 Improvements of                                                                                                            Target Users for this Business
                                Description
 existing features                                                                                                          Function

 Mass maintenance for              Provides a specific transaction for mass maintenance of material related excise            Beverage customers with
 material-related excise            duties fields                                                                               excise duties in place
 duties fields
Procurement and Logistics Execution > Procurement > Functional Improvements in MM for EM and ExD


 Feature: Supplier-related empties account in
 purchasing
Delivered by Business Function /BEV1/NE_ENH
     The functionality provides a list of transactional data (each single movement per account in quantity and
      value) as empties account data related to each supplier.




AR clerk
                                                                                                   Processing Purchase Orders in ERP

                                                                Post                                   Perform Invoice                 Display empties
                Create                                     Goods Issue                               Verification and post                 account
            Purchase Order                                 for Purchase
                                                               Order
                                                                                                       Supplier Related
                                                                                                      Empties Account        *           data related
                                                                                                                                       to each supplier    *
                                                                                                                                         * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                               Business value
     It was impossible to get an overview of empties account                                     Negotiations with suppliers require current empties data
      data related to different suppliers. Empties reporting had                                   related to specific suppliers. This data now can be provided
      to be performed manually by extracting data from the                                         by the ERP system.
      purchase order document.
Procurement and Logistics Execution > Procurement


 MM, Integration of MM and FI

 Procure-to-Pay: Down-Payment Creation, Clearing, and Retentions Integrated with Logistics
 Processes
 Benefits                                                                            LOG_MMFI_P2P
    Continuous improvement for invoice verification and purchasing




                                                                                                                     Target Users for this Business
 New Features                   Description
                                                                                                                     Function

 Down payments and               Down payments can be specified in the purchase order.                                 Operational purchaser and
 down-payment clearing           A new monitor shows all POs with down-payment information.                             invoicing clerk
                                 Selected down payments can be booked from this report, including data transfer
                                  from the purchase order.
                                 Down payments can be cleared directly within the logistics invoice (was possible
                                  only in FI transaction)

 Retentions                        Retentions can be stored in purchase order and contract                             Invoicing clerk and strategic
                                   Users can deduct retentions from the invoiced amount automatically in                purchaser
                                    transaction MIRO; they are stored as a separate document
Procurement and Logistics Execution > Procurement > MM, Integration of MM and FI


 Feature: Down payments and down-payment
 clearing
Delivered by Business Function LOG_MMFI_P2P
     Down payments can be specified in the purchase order.
     A new monitor shows all POs with down-payment information.
     Selected down payments can be booked from this report, including data transfer from the purchase order.
     Down payments can be cleared directly within the logistics invoice (was possible only in FI transaction)




                                                                                                                                         *
                                                                                                                           e.g. Buyer or
                                                            Master Data (Material, Service, Supplier)                      Master Data Manager

                                                                                                                     Goods
          Demand                         Purchase                                              Purchase
                                                                         RFx                                         Receipt                Invoice
        Creation and
          Planning

            e.g. Employee
                                         Request
                                        Processing

                                           Buyer
                                                                      Processing


                                                                         e.g. Buyer or
                                                                                                Order
                                                                                              Processing

                                                                                                 Buyer
                                                                                                           *       and Service
                                                                                                                      Entry
                                                                                                                      e.g. Warehouse
                                                                                                                                           Processing


                                                                                                                                                 Invoicing
                                                                                                                                                             *
            or Planner                                                   Sourcing                                     Clerk or Project           Clerk
                                                                         Specialist                                   Member
                                                                                                                                     * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                            Business value
     Down-payment request (F-47) and down payments (F-48)                                  *Down payments can be entered manually and processed
      could be posted only by using FI transactions and                                      automatically via BADI ME_Process_PO_CUST in the
      referencing a purchase order. There was no direct link                                 purchase order. *Down payment clearing with manually
      between down payments and the purchase order. Down-                                    entered amounts and invoices can be posted simultaneously
      payment clearing could be posted with FI transactions                                  in transaction MIRO.
      (F-54) after creating the MM invoice.
Procurement and Logistics Execution > Procurement > MM, Integration of MM and FI


 Feature: Retentions

Delivered by Business Function LOG_MMFI_P2P
     Retentions can be stored in purchase order and contract
     Users can deduct retentions from the invoiced amount automatically in transaction MIRO; they are stored
      as a separate document




                                                                                                                                         *
                                                                                                                           e.g. Buyer or
                                                            Master Data (Material, Service, Supplier)                      Master Data Manager

                                                                                                                     Goods
          Demand                         Purchase                                              Purchase
                                                                         RFx                                         Receipt                 Invoice
        Creation and
          Planning

            e.g. Employee
                                         Request
                                        Processing

                                           Buyer
                                                                      Processing


                                                                         e.g. Buyer or
                                                                                                Order
                                                                                              Processing

                                                                                                 Buyer
                                                                                                           *       and Service
                                                                                                                      Entry
                                                                                                                      e.g. Warehouse
                                                                                                                                           Processing


                                                                                                                                                 Invoicing
                                                                                                                                                             *
            or Planner                                                   Sourcing                                     Clerk or Project           Clerk
                                                                         Specialist                                   Member
                                                                                                                                     * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                            Business value
     Users could not post retentions with reference to the                                 Retentions can be stored in purchase order and contract
      purchase order                                                                        Users can deduct retentions from the invoiced amount
                                                                                             automatically in transaction MIRO; they are stored as a
                                                                                             separate document
Procurement and Logistics Execution > Procurement


 MM, Multiple Account Assignment


 Procure-to-Pay: Multiple Account Assignment
 Benefits                                                                              LOG_MM_MAA_1
    Provide total cost information for items added into inventory to the core financial system.
    Multiple account assignment allows a purchase order line with multiple account assignments to be valuated (have an FI impact) in the goods receipt.
    Amount (dollar)-based distribution is provided along with the existing quantity and percentage-based distributions.


                                                                                                                           Target Users for this Business
 New Features                   Description
                                                                                                                           Function

 Multiple account                  Allows a purchase order line item with multiple account assignments to be                 Operational purchaser
 assignment with                    valuated (have an FI impact) in the goods receipt
 valuated goods receipt

 Multiple account                Amount (dollar or euro)-based distribution is provided along with existing quantity         Operational purchaser
 assignment with                  and percentage-based distributions
 amount-based                    Both new multiple account assignment functions are available for account
 distribution                     assignment category K (cost center) and A (asset)
Procurement and Logistics Execution > Procurement > MM, Multiple Account Assignment


 Feature: Multiple account assignment with
 valuated goods receipt
Delivered by Business Function LOG_MM_MAA_1
     Allows a purchase order line item with multiple account assignments to be valuated (have an FI impact) in
      the goods receipt




                                                                                                                                          *
                                                                                                                            e.g. Buyer or
                                                           Master Data (Material, Service, Supplier)                        Master Data Manager

                                                                                                                     Goods
          Demand                        Purchase                                              Purchase
                                                                        RFx                                          Receipt                  Invoice
        Creation and
          Planning

           e.g. Employee
                                        Request
                                       Processing

                                          Buyer
                                                      *              Processing


                                                                        e.g. Buyer or
                                                                                               Order
                                                                                             Processing

                                                                                                Buyer
                                                                                                          *        and Service
                                                                                                                      Entry      *
                                                                                                                       e.g. Warehouse
                                                                                                                                            Processing


                                                                                                                                                  Invoicing
                                                                                                                                                              *
           or Planner                                                   Sourcing                                       Clerk or Project           Clerk
                                                                        Specialist                                     Member
                                                                                                                                      * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                           Business value
     This function is a legal requirement in many countries                               *Provide total cost information for items added into inventory
                                                                                            to the core financial system *Recognize accounting impact
                                                                                            on goods receipt rather than on invoice receipt.
Procurement and Logistics Execution > Procurement > MM, Multiple Account Assignment


 Feature: Multiple account assignment with
 amount-based distribution
Delivered by Business Function LOG_MM_MAA_1
     Amount (dollar or euro)-based distribution is provided along with existing quantity and percentage-based
      distributions
     Both new multiple account assignment functions are available for account assignment category K
      (cost center) and A (asset)




                                                                                                                                          *
                                                                                                                            e.g. Buyer or
                                                           Master Data (Material, Service, Supplier)                        Master Data Manager

                                                                                                                     Goods
          Demand                        Purchase                                              Purchase
                                                                        RFx                                          Receipt                  Invoice
        Creation and
          Planning

           e.g. Employee
                                        Request
                                       Processing

                                          Buyer
                                                      *              Processing


                                                                        e.g. Buyer or
                                                                                               Order
                                                                                             Processing

                                                                                                Buyer
                                                                                                          *        and Service
                                                                                                                      Entry      *
                                                                                                                       e.g. Warehouse
                                                                                                                                            Processing


                                                                                                                                                  Invoicing
                                                                                                                                                              *
           or Planner                                                   Sourcing                                       Clerk or Project           Clerk
                                                                        Specialist                                     Member
                                                                                                                                      * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                           Business value
     This function is more specific to the public sector, because                         *Provide total cost information for items added into inventory
      those customers need budget-oriented distribution to                                  to the core financial system *Distribute overall item amount
      accounting objects in logistics                                                       to accounting lines by dollar value
Procurement and Logistics Execution > Procurement


 Procure-to-Pay - SAP SRM Integration

 Basic Functionalities for a Holistic Procurement Solution: SAP ERP (MM-PUR) and SAP SRM
 Functionalities
 Benefits                                                                              LOG_MM_P2PSE_1
  A completely end-to-end and integrated contract management solution provides better compliance with negotiated terms and operational contract
   execution because of seamless integration: end-to-end integration between legal contract, operational contract, and contract execution
  Closes the gap between missing SAP ERP sourcing functionality by using SAP SRM sourcing capabilities
  Gain a common UI for designing integrated procurement processes



                                                                                                                         Target Users for this Business
 New Features                   Description
                                                                                                                         Function

 Leverage the central            A central contract created in SAP SRM can be used as source of supply directly in         Strategic and operational
 contract for source of           SAP ERP                                                                                    purchaser
 supply determination            When a purchase order is created based on a central contract, the latest pricing
                                  information is called via a service
                                 The central contract in SAP SRM is updated when the purchase order is released

 Manual sourcing:                Enhance the collective processing of purchase requisition application to create an        Operational purchaser
 creation of RFx from             RFx directly from a purchase requisition and send it to several suppliers
 purchase requisitions           Transparency throughout the process; direct linkage between purchase
                                  requisition and RFx documents
                                 Support for change and update processes

 Common purchasing               Offer a common and unified set of operative and strategic purchasing roles to be          Operational and strategic
 roles for a multisystem          used for a multisystem landscape                                                           purchaser
 landscape of SAP ERP            Provide unified POWER lists displaying SAP ERP and SAP SRM business objects
 and SAP SRM                      in one screen
                                 Facilitate cross-system search for purchasing documents
                                 Use a single point of entry for all purchasing-related activities, regardless of the
                                  system in which individual activities must be performed
Procurement and Logistics Execution > Procurement


 Procure-to-Pay - SAP SRM Integration


                                                                                                                        Target Users for this Business
 New Features                   Description
                                                                                                                        Function

 Service procurement:            Enhance MM-SRV process with sourcing capabilities in SAP SRM                             Operational and strategic
 sourcing for MM-SRV             Enable transfer of purchase requisition with hierarchical service line structure to       purchasers procuring
 with multilevel service          SAP SRM                                                                                   services
 lines                           Integrate and use sourcing rules, RFx, and back-end contract
                                 Enhance expressive bidding

 Service procurement:            Enable supplier collaboration for external service procurement by integrating MM-        Operational purchaser
 collaborative end-to-end         SRV and supplier self-service                                                            Supplier
 process                         Enhance SUS to allow suppliers to submit a service entry sheet and invoices for
                                  services performed


 Improvements of                                                                                                        Target Users for this Business
                                Description
 existing features                                                                                                      Function

 Sourcing: new BADI for            With this BADI, a customer can very flexibly define which purchase requisitions        Used by IT person to set up
 flexible sourcing rules            will be sourced via SAP SRM sourcing capabilities and which will be sourced             the system
                                    within SAP ERP. Example: a customer can define that all purchase requisitions of
                                    a specific material group with a price higher than €10,000 will be processed via
                                    SAP SRM sourcing to have an RFx initiated before sending out a purchase order
                                    to a supplier.

 Manual sourcing:                Enhance the collective processing of purchase requisition application to send a          Operational purchaser
 centralized source of            purchase requisition to a centralized sourcing department. Demand coming from
 supply processing                multiple areas can be bundled and sourced there.
                                 Transparency throughout the process: direct linkage between purchase
                                  requisition and centrally created documents
                                 Support for change and update processes

 Roles: enhancements of            Continuous improvement of version 1.3 of the buyer role to adapt to the new            Operational purchaser
 the buyer role in                  functionalities for contract and sourcing integration
 SAP ERP
Procurement and Logistics Execution > Procurement > Procure-to-Pay - SAP SRM Integration


 Feature: Leverage the central contract for
 source of supply determination
Delivered by Business Function LOG_MM_P2PSE_1
     A central contract created in SAP SRM can be used as source of supply directly in SAP ERP
     When a purchase order is created based on a central contract, the latest pricing information is called via a
      service
     The central contract in SAP SRM is updated when the purchase order is released

                                                       SAP SRM                                        SAP ERP: 1
                                                                                                                                      Specific type of
                                                                                                                                    contract is created
                                                                                                     Search for                       in SAP ERP. In
                                                           Quota                                     source of                         each source of
                                                                                                      supply                               supply
         One central
       contract object                                  Contract                                                                       determination
        (with contract                                                                                                                  central SRM
       hierarchies) as                                                                                  ERP 2                        contracts can be
          source of                            C1                       C2                                                             considered. In
       supply for SAP                                                                                                                 addition to that
       SRM and SAP                                                                                    Search for                         scheduling
             ERP                       C1.2         C1.2        C2.2         C2.1                     source of                     agreements can be
                                                                                                       supply                       created as before.



 Customer business challenges                                                              Business value
     Need to keep an overview of contracts used across a                                   Better prices and conditions by using the contract hierarchy
      multisystem landscape                                                                  concept
     Lack of a powerful contract to be used in all purchasing                              Ensure contract compliance across the company
      areas in the entire company                                                           Ensure that up-to-date contracts are used; lower risk to use
     Need to gather call-off volume to benefit from release-                                replicated and outdated contracts
      based rebates and to earn better prices by exhausting the                             Increase user productivity
      best conditions                                                                       End-to-end integration between legal contract, operational
                                                                                             contract, and contract execution
                                                                                            Centralized compliance reporting
Procurement and Logistics Execution > Procurement > Procure-to-Pay - SAP SRM Integration


 Feature: Manual sourcing: creation of RFx
 from purchase requisitions
Delivered by Business Function LOG_MM_P2PSE_1
     Enhance the collective processing of purchase requisition application to create an RFx directly from a
      purchase requisition and send it to several suppliers
     Transparency throughout the process; direct linkage between purchase requisition and RFx documents
     Support for change and update processes




                                                                                                                        e.g. Buyer or
                                                            Master Data (Material, Service, Supplier)                   Master Data Manager

                                                                                                                         Goods
          Demand                        Purchase                                                  Purchase
                                                                        RFx                                              Receipt                    Invoice
        Creation and
          Planning

           e.g. Employee
                                        Request
                                       Processing

                                          Buyer
                                                        *            Processing


                                                                         e.g. Buyer or
                                                                                      *            Order
                                                                                                 Processing

                                                                                                    Buyer
                                                                                                                       and Service
                                                                                                                          Entry
                                                                                                                            e.g. Warehouse
                                                                                                                                                  Processing


                                                                                                                                                    Invoicing
                                                                                                                                                                *
           or Planner                                                    Sourcing                                           Clerk or Project        Clerk
                                                                         Specialist                                         Member

                                                                                                                                               * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                              Business value
     SAP ERP functionality for RFQ processing is outdated                                    Use state-of-the-art RFx functionality without loosing
     Process transparency for the purchaser when using SAP                                    integration with operational P2P process
      SRM RFx functionality cumbersome due to a lack of                                       Negotiate better prices
      integration                                                                             Increase user productivity
Procurement and Logistics Execution > Procurement > Procure-to-Pay - SAP SRM Integration


 Feature: Common purchasing roles for a
 multisystem landscape of SAP ERP and SAP SRM

Delivered by Business Function LOG_MM_P2PSE_1
     Offer a common and unified set of operative and strategic purchasing roles to be used for a multisystem
      landscape
     Provide unified POWER lists displaying SAP ERP and SAP SRM business objects in one screen
     Facilitate cross-system search for purchasing documents
     Use a single point of entry for all purchasing-related activities, regardless of the system in which individual
      activities must be performed



                                                                                                                                            *
                                                                                                                              e.g. Buyer or
                                                            Master Data (Material, Service, Supplier)                         Master Data Manager

                                                                                                                        Goods
          Demand                        Purchase                                                 Purchase
                                                                        RFx                                             Receipt                 Invoice
        Creation and
          Planning

           e.g. Employee
                          *             Request
                                       Processing

                                          Buyer
                                                        *            Processing


                                                                         e.g. Buyer or
                                                                                      *           Order
                                                                                                Processing

                                                                                                   Buyer
                                                                                                             *        and Service
                                                                                                                         Entry      *
                                                                                                                         e.g. Warehouse
                                                                                                                                              Processing


                                                                                                                                                    Invoicing
                                                                                                                                                                *
           or Planner                                                    Sourcing                                        Clerk or Project           Clerk
                                                                         Specialist                                      Member
                                                                                                                                            * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                              Business value
     Different applications with different UI approaches                                     Less end-user training
     User needs to know which task to perform in which                                       Single point of entry for the user to perform tasks; improved
      system; user must have knowledge of the system                                           user productivity
      landscape                                                                               Flexible role concept, easily to adapt to customer and user-
     No overview of all activities and tasks a user must perform                              specific needs
Procurement and Logistics Execution > Procurement > Procure-to-Pay - SAP SRM Integration


 Feature: Service procurement: sourcing for
 MM-SRV with multilevel service lines
Delivered by Business Function LOG_MM_P2PSE_1
     Enhance MM-SRV process with sourcing capabilities in SAP SRM
     Enable transfer of purchase requisition with hierarchical service line structure to SAP SRM
     Integrate and use sourcing rules, RFx, and back-end contract
     Enhance expressive bidding


                                                                                                                       Clerk or Project      Invoicing
       e.g. Employee               Operational                       Operational           Operational
                                                                                                                       Member                Clerk
       or Planner                  Buyer                             Buyer                 Buyer




                                                                                                                                                                  SAP ERP
                                Purchase                                              Purchase                           Service
                   PM/PS                                           Contract                                                                     Invoice
                                Request                                                Order                            Entry Sheet



                                         *                                    *
         SAP SRM




                                                       RFx                                               Sales Order      Confirmation            Invoice



                                                  Strategic
                                                                  *                               Supplier Company
                                                                                                                                  Supplier
                                                                                                                                          Supplier Self Service


                                                  Buyer                                                                                                  * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                                Business value
     Lack of advanced sourcing capabilities for external service                               Utilization of advanced sourcing capabilities for effective
      procurement                                                                                source determination for external service procurement
     Complex nature of the definition of services                                              Increased efficiency and harmonization of the procurement
     Lack of transparency and integration across the process                                    process
      life cycle for external service procurement
Procurement and Logistics Execution > Procurement > Procure-to-Pay - SAP SRM Integration


 Feature: Service procurement: collaborative
 end-to-end process
Delivered by Business Function LOG_MM_P2PSE_1
     Enable supplier collaboration for external service procurement by integrating MM-SRV and supplier self-
      service
     Enhance SUS to allow suppliers to submit a service entry sheet and invoices for services performed


                                                                                                                         Clerk or Project      Invoicing
           e.g. Employee              Operational                        Operational         Operational
                                                                                                                         Member                Clerk
           or Planner                 Buyer                              Buyer               Buyer




                                                                                                                                                                    SAP ERP
                                   Purchase                                                Purchase                        Service
                      PM/PS                                           Contract                                                                    Invoice
                                   Request                                                  Order                         Entry Sheet


                                                                                                       *                          *                        *
            SAP SRM




                                                          RFx                                              Sales Order      Confirmation            Invoice



                                                      Strategic
                                                                                                                  *
                                                                                                      Supplier Company
                                                                                                                                        *
                                                                                                                                    Supplier
                                                                                                                                                            *
                                                                                                                                            Supplier Self Service


                                                      Buyer

 Customer business challenges                                                                Business value
     Lack of supplier collaboration for external service                                       Support end-to-end process for external services
      procurement                                                                                procurement
     Lack of transparency and integration across the process                                   Increase transparency and compliance throughout the
      life cycle for external service procurement.                                               procurement process
                                                                                                Better manage money spent on services
                                                                                                Reduce TCO
Procurement and Logistics Execution > Procurement


 Serial Numbers in Purchasing


 Manage Serialized Materials and Components in Your Procurement Process
 Benefits                                                                               LOG_MM_SERNO
    Complete support of serialized materials within the procurement scenario. The serial number data is also available in third-party processes at any time.




 Improvements of                                                                                                             Target Users for this Business
                                Description
 existing features                                                                                                           Function

 Serial number tracking            Serial number tracking is now possible in the regular procurement process as well           All customers using return
 in procurement                     as in the third-party process                                                                deliveries and serial
                                                                                                                                 numbers
                                                                                                                                Some customers in the
                                                                                                                                 maintenance business
Agenda




  Introduction and Overview                          6. Procurement and Logistics Execution
  1. Analytics                                              6.1 Procurement
                                                            6.2 Inbound and Outbound Logistics
          1.1 Financial Analytics
                                                            6.3 Inventory and Warehouse Management
          1.2 Strategic Enterprise Management
  2. Financials                                      7. Product Development and Manufacturing
          2.1    Financial Supply Chain Management          7.1   Life-cycle Data Management
                                                            7.2   Manufacturing Execution
          2.2    Corporate Governance
                                                            7.3   Product Development
          2.3    Financial Accounting
                                                            7.4   Production Planning
          2.4    Treasury
                                                            7.5   General
  3. Human Capital Management
          3.1 Talent Management
                                                     8. Sales and Service
                                                            8.1 General
          3.2 Workforce Process Management
          3.4 General                                       8.2 Sales Order Management
                                                     9. Cross SAP ERP
  4. End-user Service Delivery
  5. Corporate Services
          5.1    Enterprise Asset Management
          5.2    Project and Portfolio Management
          5.3    Quality Management
          5.4    Real Estate Management
          5.5    Travel Management
Procurement and Logistics Execution > Inbound and Outbound Logistics


 EDI Monitors


 EDI Monitors: A Comfortable Overview of Technical Details
 Benefits                                                                              LOG_SD_EDIMON
    Customers using the BF get a user-friendly UI to control and work on IDocs they have received.




 Improvements of                                                                                                       Target Users for this Business
                                 Description
 existing features                                                                                                     Function

 New IDoc monitors                The transactions enable the user to (re)process IDocs more easily. Users can           Users responsible for
                                   quickly analyze incorrect IDocs, resolve issues, and restart IDoc processing.           inbound communication
                                  IDocs are displayed in application format and not in the generic technical format       with external parties
                                   of transaction WE02. That enables the user to discover possible causes of
                                   processing problems more quickly.
Index




  Introduction and Overview                          6. Procurement and Logistics Execution
  1. Analytics                                              6.1 Procurement
                                                            6.2 Inbound and Outbound Logistics
          1.1 Financial Analytics
                                                            6.3 Inventory and Warehouse Management
          1.2 Strategic Enterprise Management
  2. Financials                                      7. Product Development and Manufacturing
          2.1    Financial Supply Chain Management          7.1   Life-cycle Data Management
                                                            7.2   Manufacturing Execution
          2.2    Corporate Governance
                                                            7.3   Product Development
          2.3    Financial Accounting
                                                            7.4   Production Planning
          2.4    Treasury
                                                            7.5   General
  3. Human Capital Management
          3.1 Talent Management
                                                     8. Sales and Service
                                                            8.1 General
          3.2 Workforce Process Management
          3.4 General                                       8.2 Sales Order Management
                                                     9. Cross SAP ERP
  4. End-user Service Delivery
  5. Corporate Services
          5.1    Enterprise Asset Management
          5.2    Project and Portfolio Management
          5.3    Quality Management
          5.4    Real Estate Management
          5.5    Travel Management
Procurement and Logistics Execution > Inventory and Warehouse Management


 Vendor-Managed Inventory


 Consignment VMI
 Benefits                                                                             APO_VMI_CONS
    Increase visibility of real customer demand. Enable parallel consignment and nonconsignment models.
    Improve usage of stock along the supply chain.
    Reduce stock-outs, rush orders and supply bottlenecks.
    Improve cooperation with customers.
    Improve delivery service levels.
    Lower safety stocks.

                                                                                                                       Target Users for this Business
 New Features                  Description
                                                                                                                       Function

 Shipment split                   Support parallel consigned and standard VMI scenarios for different products           Customer service managers
                                   shipped to the same customer. A shipment split is executed before TLB                   and supply chain planners
                                   shipments are published to SAP ERP.                                                     who use SAP APO

 VMI master data                  Support of automatic creation of location products in the ship-to location             Supply chain planner and
 integration                       (customer location).The customer material info record in SAP ERP carries                person responsible for
                                   customer, material, and customer material. The info record is used as a reference       supply chain integration
                                   to create the location products in SAP APO.

 Automatic ATP check of           Automatically trigger an ATP check of the TLB shipment in SAP ERP after the TLB        Supply chain planners and
 TLB shipments                     shipment is published but before the related sales order is saved in SAP ERP            person responsible for
 published to SAP ERP                                                                                                      supply chain integration

 Integration of                 If the special stock partner has been defined for consignment stock processing by        Supply chain planners and
 consignment stock in            a third party other than the customer, you can use the partner function for special       person responsible for
 third-party logistics           stock partner in SD in SAP ERP.                                                           supply chain integration
                                To enable this scenario within VMI in SAP APO, a new BAdI has been introduced
                                 on the SAP ERP side: VMI_SPECIAL_STOCK_PARTNER. The BAdI maps the
                                 consignment stock to the corresponding customer location and the result would
                                 be an update of the stock in the corresponding customer location in SAP APO.
Procurement and Logistics Execution > Inventory and Warehouse Management


 Vendor-Managed Inventory



 Improvements of                                                                                                          Target Users for this Business
                                Description
 existing features                                                                                                        Function

Transfer of in-transit            An additional step is introduced that enables modeling of in-transit consignment          Supply chain planners
consignment stock                  special stock. The object will be transferred to SAP APO, where it can be stored as
                                   a stock object so that it can be viewed as a separate key figure and integrated into
                                   the VMI planning process.
Procurement and Logistics Execution > Inventory and Warehouse Management > Vendor-Managed Inventory


 Feature: Shipment split

Delivered by Business Function APO_VMI_CONS
     Support parallel consigned and standard VMI scenarios for different products shipped to the same
      customer. A shipment split is executed before TLB shipments are published to SAP ERP.




                                                                                               Shipment split

                                                             Create                               Build efficient                      Publish
               Plan supply
                 network
                                                          distribution
                                                              plan
                                                                                                    truck loads
                                                                                               (with shipment split)   *             shipments
                                                                                                                                    to SAP ERP

                                                                                                                                    * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                            Business value
     Customers can support VMI agreements with a consigned                                   VMI and consignment inventory working together
      and nonconsigned approach                                                               VMI planning in SAP APO ensures the most profitable
                                                                                               overall replenishment plan for the entire supply chain
                                                                                              Configuration of SAP ERP consignment inventory handles
                                                                                               the implications of maintaining customer consignment
                                                                                               inventory and the financial settlement upon receipt of the
                                                                                               appropriate consumption signal
Procurement and Logistics Execution > Inventory and Warehouse Management > Vendor-Managed Inventory


 Feature: VMI master data integration

Delivered by Business Function APO_VMI_CONS
     Support of automatic creation of location products in the ship-to location (customer location).The customer
      material info record in SAP ERP carries customer, material, and customer material. The info record is used
      as a reference to create the location products in SAP APO.




                                                                                               VMI master data integration


                 Create master data                                       Create and activate                            Create/update master
                       in ERP                                              Integration Model
                                                                                                         *                  data in APO

                                                                                                                                  * Improvements
                                                                                                                                                 *
 Customer business challenges                                                            Business value
     Automatic creation of location products in the ship-to                                  Embed customers‟ warehouses and products in the planning
      location (customer location) instead of manual creation                                  process. Increase visibility of real customer demand.
                                                                                               Reduction of stock-outs, rush orders, and supply
                                                                                               bottlenecks.
Procurement and Logistics Execution > Inventory and Warehouse Management > Vendor-Managed Inventory


 Feature: Automatic ATP check of TLB
 shipments published to SAP ERP
Delivered by Business Function APO_VMI_CONS
     Automatically trigger an ATP check of the TLB shipment in SAP ERP after the TLB shipment is published
      but before the related sales order is saved in SAP ERP




                                                                                               Automatic ATP check of
                                                                                               TLB shipments published in ERP
             Build efficient                                 Publish                               Automatically
                                                                                                                                  Save sales order
                 truck
                 loads
                                                           shipments
                                                          to SAP ERP
                                                                                                      trigger
                                                                                                 ATP check in ERP     *               in ERP

                                                                                                                                    * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                            Business value
     Automatic ATP check instead of manual ATP check                                         Improve delivery service level and demand fulfillment
Procurement and Logistics Execution > Inventory and Warehouse Management > Vendor-Managed Inventory


 Feature: Integration of consignment stock in
 third-party logistics
Delivered by Business Function APO_VMI_CONS
     If the special stock partner has been defined for consignment stock processing by a third party other than
      the customer, you can use the partner function for special stock partner in SD in SAP ERP.
     To enable this scenario within VMI in SAP APO, a new BAdI has been introduced on the SAP ERP side:
      VMI_SPECIAL_STOCK_PARTNER. The BAdI maps the consignment stock to the corresponding
      customer location and the result would be an update of the stock in the corresponding customer location in
      SAP APO.


                                                                                               Integration of consignment stock
                                                                                               in third-party logistics
                 Publish                                    Create                                                              Update of stocks
               shipments
               to SAP ERP              *                 consignment
                                                            issues
                                                                                                      Deliver orders                   at
                                                                                                                               the stock partner

                                                                                                                                    * Improvements
                                                                                                                                                   *
 Customer business challenges                                                            Business value
     No ability to integrate a third-party logistics provider in VMI                         Improve cooperation with customers
      consignment                                                                             Improve delivery service level
                                                                                              Lower safety stocks
Procurement and Logistics Execution > Inventory and Warehouse Management


 Integration Ext. Warehouse Management,
 Enterprise Services
 Use Enterprise Services to Link SAP ERP with an External Warehouse Management System
 Benefits                                                                            LOG_ESOA_OPS_3
    Use of enterprise services provides an easier and more straightforward method of integration than was previously available (using IDocs)
    Upgrades to SAP ERP or the external warehouse management system will not disturb the integration
    Reduced time and effort and thus implementation costs when integrating an external warehouse management system into the SAP landscape


 Improvements of                                                                                                       Target Users for this Business
                               Description
 existing features                                                                                                     Function

 Integration of external          This business function and the ES bundle enable exchange of logistics-relevant         System administrators in
 warehouse                         information like inbound and outbound deliveries and data related to the                enterprises with warehouse
 management system                 movement of goods within a tracking system. They offer replication of product,          management operations
                                   customer, and supplier master data from SAP ERP to the external warehouse
                                   management system.
Agenda




  Introduction and Overview                          6. Procurement and Logistics Execution
  1. Analytics                                              6.1 Procurement
                                                            6.2 Inbound and Outbound Logistics
          1.1 Financial Analytics
                                                            6.3 Inventory and Warehouse Management
          1.2 Strategic Enterprise Management
  2. Financials                                      7. Product Development and Manufacturing
          2.1    Financial Supply Chain Management          7.1   Life-cycle Data Management
                                                            7.2   Manufacturing Execution
          2.2    Corporate Governance
                                                            7.3   Product Development
          2.3    Financial Accounting
                                                            7.4   Production Planning
          2.4    Treasury
                                                            7.5   General
  3. Human Capital Management
          3.1 Talent Management
                                                     8. Sales and Service
                                                            8.1 General
          3.2 Workforce Process Management
          3.4 General                                       8.2 Sales Order Management
                                                     9. Cross SAP ERP
  4. End-user Service Delivery
  5. Corporate Services
          5.1    Enterprise Asset Management
          5.2    Project and Portfolio Management
          5.3    Quality Management
          5.4    Real Estate Management
          5.5    Travel Management
Product Development and Manufacturing


 Product Development and Manufacturing
 Business Functions (1/2)
    Value Proposition for Product Development and Manufacturing enhancements within SAP Enhancement Package 4
    for SAP ERP
    In Manufacturing, SAP Enhancement Package 4 provides additional support for lean manufacturing initiatives to further eliminate wasteful activities. The
    key deliverables also help optimize collaboration with subcontractors and improve control of the outsourced manufacturing process improving visibility
    on all subcontracting activities. In addition, new analytics and an improved dashboard improve decision making at the enterprise and plant levels.
    Key enhancements: Integration between SAP LPO and SAP ERP / Lean Manufacturing Analytics / Enhanced Production Supervisor
    role / Outsourced Manufacturing / WIP Batches
    In Product Development, SAP Enhancement Package 4 helps automate the process of converting product formulas or specification information into
    finalized data that can be used for product labeling. The key enhancements will allow customers to shorten time-to-market by using iPPE as a data
    backbone that brings together all relevant information from CAD, DMU, and engineering change management to project management information.
    Key enhancements: Product Labeling in SAP PLM: Recipe Management / PLM iPPE Integration

Description                                                                                      Target Customers

   PLM iPPE Integration:                                                                           All customers who want to extend the integration of their iPPE
    Integration for integrated product and process engineering (iPPE). By activating                 installation and connect it to a CAD system or their cProjects
    this switch, you activate instance-handling (CAD instances) in iPPE, DMU viewing                 installation.
    in iPPE, and iPPE integration with cProjects.

   PLM Web User Interface:                                                                         Customers who want to make use of the enhanced usability
    Activates the Web Dynpro user interface for SAP PLM.                                             and enhanced features of the Web user Interface for SAP PLM

   Product Labeling in SAP PLM: Recipe Management:                                                 Customers who use Recipe Management in SAP PLM and wish
    Collect, adjust, and finalize product technical data in preparation for incorporation            to automate the process of converting a product formula or
    into content that is to be printed on packaging                                                  specification information into a finalized view of technical data to
                                                                                                     be incorporated into product labeling.

   SAP LPO Integration: Integration of SAP Lean Planning and Operations (SAP LPO)                  Customers with decentralized manufacturing operations,
    and SAP ERP using SAP MII. SAP ERP sends master data, demand, tracking                           leveled production, and pull systems using SAP ERP
    transactions, and inventory adjustments to SAP LPO. The MRP engine uses a daily,                 Customers who want to implement SAP LPO
                                                                                                     Customers in the automotive, aerospace, IM&C, component
    leveled production plan to compute the supplier's plan sent from SAP ERP.
                                                                                                     manufacturing, high-tech, and medical device industries

   Outsourced Manufacturing: New subcontracting cockpit                                            Customers who want to optimize collaboration with their
         Tracking of external production                                                            subcontractors and who are striving for better visibility
         Collect subcontracting WIP costs on production orders                                      Customers with a demand for on-time information flow and
         In-time consumption of component                                                           improved control of the outsourced manufacturing process
         Stock-in transfer to track shipment
         Consumption/scrap report
Product Development and Manufacturing


 Product Development and Manufacturing
 Business Functions (2/2)

Description                                                                                        Target Customers

   Batch History:                                                                                    Customers in all industries that use batches, analyze the batch
    Extends the batch information cockpit (BIC) in SAP ERP with details on batch-related objects       history using the batch information cockpit (BIC) in SAP ERP,
    that can be retrieved from other SAP systems or from non-SAP systems. It supports                  and retrieve information (batch-related objects) from other SAP
    scenarios for the analysis of quality-related issues that arise from defective products.           systems and non-SAP systems

 Order Split:                                                                                        Customers in mill products or discrete industries who use
   Enhancement of existing split functionality for production orders. PP confirmations, MM             production orders and who need to split production orders
  goods movements, and related CO postings are adjusted and split accordingly.                         during the production process but need cost transparency.
 This approach ensures transparency for operations, confirmations, and so on. It allows a             Customers who run SAP ERP-based manufacturing.
  reasonable plan-actual comparison on the CO side.

   Business Package for Production Supervisor:                                                       Customers in the manufacturing industry who want to provide
    Business package for production supervisors that contains the following iViews: create             their production personnel with configurable dashboards that
    confirmation, list of confirmations, days' supply monitor, and work list. Also contains a          provide the most relevant information to the user to work more
    personal object work list (POWL) for customer orders with multiple delays.                         efficiently. This dashboard perfectly fits the requirements of
                                                                                                       production supervisors, foremen, production schedulers, and so
                                                                                                       on as they provide work lists with status information, monitors
                                                                                                       on material availability, capacity load, a key figure monitor, and
                                                                                                       so on.

   WIP Batch:                                                                                        Manufacturing industries, especially mill products customers
    Create work-in-process (WIP) batches during confirmation of operations and phases.                 who require high transparency into and traceability of work-in-
    Conversion of WIP batches to batches managed on inventory stocks. Batch where-used list            process. Customers working with batch management
    enhancement to support WIP batches.

 SAP EWM Integration in Manufacturing:                                                               Customers who want to use SAP EWM alongside classic
  Integration of SAP EWM with manufacturing ensures that complete end-to-end processes in              manufacturing, kanban, and repetitive manufacturing
  the manufacturing environment run with stock managed by SAP EWM
 Integration covers classic manufacturing (PP and PP-PI), kanban, and repetitive
  manufacturing

   Cost Estimate and Simulation:                                                                     SAP CQM customers and PDCE customers who want to benefit
    Functional enhancements and performance improvements for cost and quotation                        from the improvements
    management with the costing engine of SAP SEM and content of the product design cost
    estimate (PDCE).

 For details please refer to Financials and Analytics Presentation (chapter Analytics)
Product Development and Manufacturing


 Product Development and Manufacturing
 ES Bundles (1/2)

Description

    Integration of Manufacturing Execution Systems:
     The Integration of Manufacturing Execution Systems ES bundle (IMES) offers a way to synchronize manufacturing-related master data and
     transactional data between SAP ERP 6.0 and shop floor systems. This gives the enterprise a real-time view of production processes occurring
     at manufacturing locations that may be spread across the globe.
        The important topics for EhP4 deliverables are the followings:
         – Automotive Production Back flush processing;
         – Confirm multi-item order (Mill);
         – MTO/ETO Manufacturing including;
         – Configuration (ADMEC);
     This ES bundle provides a way to synchronize manufacturing master and transactional information from SAP ERP with shop floor systems
     Industry Relevance: All manufacturing industries that use SAP ERP for planning and third-party shop floor applications for Production
     Execution, Quality Management, Asset Maintenance, and so on

    PLM Connectivity:
     This ES Bundle supports customers in ....
      Facilitates the usage of mySAP PLM as data backbone for business processes, which include Non-SAP applications, in the area of product development
       and design.
      Allows the finding of mySAP PLM objects and the retrieval of detailed information mySAP PLM through Enterprise Services.

    Batch Traceability & Analytics:
     Occasional oversights can result in defective products. The ES bundle enables businesses to analyze and find the root cause of the faulty
     materials in these products across the entire supply chain without logging into multiple systems that track parameters and flows of materials
     and products.

    Responsive Product Development and Launch:
      Facilitates the usage of SAP PLM as data backbone for business processes, which include non-SAP applications, in the area of product
       development and design.
      Allows the finding of SAP PLM objects and the retrieval of detailed information SAP PLM through enterprise services.
Product Development and Manufacturing


 Product Development and Manufacturing
 ES Bundles (2/2)

Description

    Outsourced Manufacturing:
     Outscourced Manufacturing reflects the situation that the production process is fully or partially outsourced to a subcontractor/supplier.
     The brand owner still requires:
      permanent transparency of the production covering both financial and logistics aspects;
      visibility into component and finished good inventory levels;
      control over the processing and implementation of engineering changes related to the products manufactured.
    This bundle covers the required enterprise services to fulfill these requirements, by improving the following supplier collaboration processes:
      work order collaboration;
      engineering change collaboration;
      purchase order collaboration.
    The services being developed with this bundle complement re-used services from the bundles Procure-To-Payas well as Supplier
     Collaboration for the Supply Chain.
Product Development and Manufacturing


 ES Bundle – Integration of Manufacturing
 Execution Systems

       This ES bundle provides a way to synchronize manufacturing master and transactional information from
        SAP ERP with shop floor systems
       Industry Relevance: All manufacturing industries that use SAP ERP for planning and third-party shop floor
        applications for Production Execution, Quality Management, Asset Maintenance, and so on


Production                                                                                              Maintenance
Supervisor                              Operator                       Quality Manager                   Supervisor




               Production                          Production Status                 Create/Search                    Report Machine
               Download                               Reporting                          Batch                         Breakdown

Backend          ERP 6.0                                ERP 6.0                           ERP 6.0                          ERP 6.0
System            EhP4                                   EhP4                              EhP4                             EhP4


Business Value                                                             Use Cases
   Near-Real-time synchronization helps in keeping ERP and                   Download of Production Order, BOM, Bill Of Operation from
    shop floor systems up to date.                                             ERP to shop floor
   Eradication of individual touch points to shop floor systems.             Real-time update of shop floor status of Production Order,
   Decision support                                                           Maintenance etc to ERP
                                                                              Simplified UI to be used by Operators
                                                                              Conversion of ERP information to ISA-95 standard message
Product Development and Manufacturing


 ES Bundle – Batch Traceability & Analytics



       Addresses tracking of batches or lots of material through process, continuous, or discrete production environment
       Batch tracking information is coordinated with plant inventory, laboratory analyses, and inventory movement information to
        provide powerful lot genealogy reports. It can also be combined with appropriate data on equipment from real-time data
        systems
       With the help of this bundle, Batch Tracing can also be achieved across the complete value chain and beyond company
        boundaries

                                                            Production or QM
Customer                                                     Mgr @ Supplier




                                                                                             Identify other
               Complains                Find batch master
                                                                   Quarantine all        products which have         Inform customer
             about product              & characteristics
                                                                     affected                    been                  and recall all
              being out of                 and all batch-
                                                                     batches              produced with the         affected deliveries
                 spec                     related objects
                                                                                           affected batches



Business Value                                                         Use Cases
   Integrates various ERP functional areas (PP, PP-PI, Batch,            Creation of a Batch History (incl. all batch-related objects
    Sales, Purchase, I/O Delivery, Inventory) and non-SAP                  sorted by creation date acc. to GMP)
    systems                                                               Determination from which other batches a batch was created
   Provides information for cross-company traceability                   Determination in which other batches a specific batch was
   Empowers production personnel to analyze from a single                 used
    cockpit that gets production execution/logistics information          Analysis of how the batch was produced (e.g., process
    from SAP ERP to the lowest level systems such as plant                 parameters)
    historian and archive systems
   Support legal requirements (GMP, EU 178/2002), defect
    tracing, callback activities and regression requirements
Product Development and Manufacturing


 ES Bundle – Responsive Product Development
 and Launch


     Facilitates the usage of SAP PLM as data backbone for business processes, which include
      non-SAP applications, in the area of product development and design.
     Allows the finding of SAP PLM objects and the retrieval of detailed information SAP PLM
      through enterprise services.


Development Engineer           CAD Engineer             CAE Engineer                     Engineering Manager     Production Engineer




                                                                                                   Engineering Change
          Material Master                             Bill of Material
                                                                                                        Number

Backend                ERP 6.0                              ERP 6.0                                            ERP 6.0
System                 corePLM                              corePLM                                            corePLM


Business Value                                                 Use Cases
   Increase accuracy and speed of development and design         CAD Integration: Third-party tools
    process                                                       Real-Time Design Collaboration Tool Integration
   Elimination of redundant data within the company thru         Computer Aided Engineering Software Integration
    centralization                                                Integration of Team Data Management Systems
   Access to backbone data
Index




  Introduction and Overview                          6. Procurement and Logistics Execution
  1. Analytics                                              6.1 Procurement
                                                            6.2 Inbound and Outbound Logistics
          1.1 Financial Analytics
                                                            6.3 Inventory and Warehouse Management
          1.2 Strategic Enterprise Management
  2. Financials                                      7. Product Development and Manufacturing
          2.1    Financial Supply Chain Management          7.1   Life-cycle Data Management
                                                            7.2   Manufacturing Execution
          2.2    Corporate Governance
                                                            7.3   Product Development
          2.3    Financial Accounting
                                                            7.4   Production Planning
          2.4    Treasury
                                                            7.5   General
  3. Human Capital Management
          3.1 Talent Management
                                                     8. Sales and Service
                                                            8.1 General
          3.2 Workforce Process Management
          3.4 General                                       8.2 Sales Order Management
                                                     9. Cross SAP ERP
  4. End-user Service Delivery
  5. Corporate Services
          5.1    Enterprise Asset Management
          5.2    Project and Portfolio Management
          5.3    Quality Management
          5.4    Real Estate Management
          5.5    Travel Management
Product Development and Manufacturing > Life-Cycle Data Management


 Product Labeling in SAP PLM: Recipe
 Management
 Support the Entire Process of Collecting, Adjusting and Finalizing Technical Product Information
 for Use in Product Labeling
 Benefits                                                                            PLM_RM_Product_Labeling
  Time saved by automating the various steps required to gather the necessary data, perform calculations, consolidate, and rephrase product technical
   information into finalized data that can be used for product labeling
  Time saved through ready access to all components of technical information used in package labeling
  Reduced errors in labeling data by eliminating rekeying and generating label content directly from information generated by Recipe Management
   formulation and specification management processes
  Reduced risk of product recalls caused by improperly labeled product


                                                                                                                         Target Users for this Business
 New Features                  Description
                                                                                                                         Function

 Develop product                Labeling in Recipe Management in SAP PLM supports assembling and                           R&D; product development
 labeling data                   transforming formula information into the final view of product technical data to be       Product labeling
                                 used on product packaging. Product definition information developed and
                                                                                                                            Nutrition labeling
                                 managed in Recipe Management is used to create the three main components of
                                 food product labeling, including the nutrition, ingredient statement, and dietary
                                 information.
                                Recipe Management labeling collects formula or specification data and supports
                                 the user during the process of calculating, rounding, grouping, combining,
                                 rephrasing, and adding explanatory notes. Once the complete set of label data is
                                 finalized, it is associated with a packaged product and made valid based on
                                 organization element or region.
 Product Development and Manufacturing > Life-Cycle Data Management > Product Labeling in SAP PLM: Recipe Management


  Feature: Develop product labeling data

 Delivered by Business Function PLM_RM_Product_Labeling
      Labeling in Recipe Management in SAP PLM supports assembling and transforming formula information into the final view
       of product technical data to be used on product packaging. Product definition information developed and managed in Recipe
       Management is used to create the three main components of food product labeling, including the nutrition, ingredient
       statement, and dietary information.
      Recipe Management labeling collects formula or specification data and supports the user during the process of calculating,
       rounding, grouping, combining, rephrasing, and adding explanatory notes. Once the complete set of label data is finalized, it
       is associated with a packaged product and made valid based on organizational element or region.

  Product                                           Product                                  Quality &
Development                                         Labeling                                Regulatory
                                                                                                                       Product Development
                                                                                                                       (Process Industries)

               Create and                                    Develop                                    Check                     Release recipes
             manage recipes                               Product Label
                                                                               *                      Compliance                 and specifications


                                                                                                                                    * Improvements
  Customer business challenges                                                            Business value
      Collecting, calculating, adjusting and assembling product                             Improved efficiency of the product labeling process
       technical information into a market-ready, optimized form                             Recipe Management labeling automates many of the steps
       for presentation to the end consumer is a tedious and                                  of collecting, calculating, rounding, finalizing, and linking
       time-consuming process. A great deal of care must be                                   label data with packaged products
       taken to ensure that product data is represented                                      Improved consistency of product labeling
       accurately and in a manner consistent with government-                                By standardizing the approach for developing labeling data
       mandated rules for product and nutrition labeling.                                     and associating it with packaged products, the product
                                                                                              labeling function of Recipe Management will help ensure the
                                                                                              consistency and accuracy of the final label and reduce
                                                                                              chances for errors
Agenda




  Introduction and Overview                          6. Procurement and Logistics Execution
  1. Analytics                                              6.1 Procurement
                                                            6.2 Inbound and Outbound Logistics
          1.1 Financial Analytics
                                                            6.3 Inventory and Warehouse Management
          1.2 Strategic Enterprise Management
  2. Financials                                      7. Product Development and Manufacturing
          2.1    Financial Supply Chain Management          7.1   Life-cycle Data Management
                                                            7.2   Manufacturing Execution
          2.2    Corporate Governance
                                                            7.3   Product Development
          2.3    Financial Accounting
                                                            7.4   Production Planning
          2.4    Treasury
                                                            7.5   General
  3. Human Capital Management
          3.1 Talent Management
                                                     8. Sales and Service
                                                            8.1 General
          3.2 Workforce Process Management
          3.4 General                                       8.2 Sales Order Management
                                                     9. Cross SAP ERP
  4. End-user Service Delivery
  5. Corporate Services
          5.1    Enterprise Asset Management
          5.2    Project and Portfolio Management
          5.3    Quality Management
          5.4    Real Estate Management
          5.5    Travel Management
Product Development and Manufacturing > Manufacturing Execution


 Batch History


 Analyze the History of Batches Across SAP and Non-SAP Systems
 Benefits                                                                              LOG_PP_BATCH_HISTORY
  This business function enables you to obtain batch-related information stored in different SAP ERP systems.
  Example: one system produces and delivers the batch to another system that does the packaging and the delivery to the customer.
  This business function also provides a working example showcasing how to obtain batch-related information from non-SAP systems with different levels
   of granularity using SAP MII.
  Example of higher data granularity in the SAP ERP systems: the batch characteristics relevant for the batch determination in the SAP ERP processes
   and very detailed data granularity in LIMS or MES systems like the process parameters used when a batch was produced.


                                                                                                                       Target Users for this Business
 New Features                   Description
                                                                                                                       Function

 New display for Batch             The function introduces a new batch history details display for quality managers      Quality managers, quality
 History                            that provides the complete history overview for a batch present in different           executives, and others using
                                    systems (SAP and non-SAP)                                                              the batch information
                                                                                                                           cockpit
 Product Development and Manufacturing > Manufacturing Execution > Batch History


  Feature: New display for Batch History

Delivered by Business Function LOG_PP_BATCH_HISTORY
      The function introduces a new batch history details display for quality managers that provides the complete
       history overview for a batch present in different systems (SAP and non-SAP)




Quality Manager
                                                                                        Batch History Details

                Start Batch                                                        Select the selection criteria           Right click on the
                                                         Restart BIC for
                                                                                      in Material and Batch
           Information Cockpit
                  (BIC)
                                                         required user
                                                            group
                                                                                      History Tab page and
                                                                                     execute to get batches        *         batch and get
                                                                                                                          batch history details
                                                                                                                                                  *
                                                                                                                             * Improvements
  Customer business challenges                                                     Business value
      Good manufacturing practice guidelines direct                                   One flexible environment for selecting the relevant batch-
       manufacturers to make their documentation cover the                              related objects types for batch history search from SAP and
       different manufacturing operations for each batch. The                           non-SAP systems.
       batch history functionality makes it possible to provide the                    Better end-user satisfaction
       history of manufacture for each batch.                                          Removes high default probability by obtaining batch
      To get the complete history data for a batch with all                            information from various systems
       details, customers have to go to different systems, reports                     Covers the good manufacturing practice guidelines
       and transactions.                                                                requirement for tracing the history of manufacture for each
                                                                                        batch
Product Development and Manufacturing > Manufacturing Execution


 Business Package for Production Supervisor

 Configurable Dashboard for Production Personnel with a New, Easy-To-Use User Interface to
 Provide a Quick Overview of the Current Production Status
 Benefits                                                                              LOG_PP_PRSP
    Fast and easy access to all information needed by the production supervisors, foremen, or production schedulers.
    Easy-to-use, personalized, and preconfigured object work lists (POWL) provide a clear overview of production-related status information. Together with
     additional monitors, you get greater transparency into the status of your production processes and you can easily monitor your production. In the end,
     you can run production more smoothly and more efficiently. You can also react much more quickly to exceptional situations on the shop floor.


                                                                                                                           Target Users for this Business
 New Features                   Description
                                                                                                                           Function

 Manufacturing                     This business package provides production supervisors with a quick overview of            Shop-floor personnel like
 intelligence dashboard             pending work orders, production confirmations, and supply and demand. It                   production and shift
 for production                     provides users in production facilities a quick overview of current pending work           supervisors, foremen, and
 supervisors                        orders, feasibility, supply situation, delays, and much more.                              MRP controllers
Product Development and Manufacturing > Manufacturing Execution > Business Package for Production Supervisor


 Feature: Manufacturing intelligence dashboard
 for production supervisors
Delivered by Business Function LOG_PP_PRSP
     This business package provides production supervisors with a quick overview of pending work orders,
      production confirmations, and supply and demand. It provides users in production facilities a quick
      overview of current pending work orders, feasibility, supply situation, delays, and much more.




 Customer business challenges                                                               Business value
     The information that is required to provide production                                     Personalized views of the relevant information on a central
      supervisors with a good overview of the current situation                                   dashboard help the user get the relevant information on time
      on the shop floor is distributed across multiple screens of                                 and make the right decision faster. The user does not need
      different transactions. Bringing all the information on one                                 to call multiple transactions in different systems to get this
      screen enhances the transparency and provides better                                        information (pull principle); the system brings all the required
      decision support.                                                                           information to the user (push principle). It supports
                                                                                                  communication on the shop floor and collaboration with
                                                                                                  other departments like plant maintenance and warehousing.
Product Development and Manufacturing > Manufacturing Execution


 Order Split


 Enable Flexible and Adaptive Manufacturing Processes with Order-Split Functionality
 Benefits                                                                                LOG_PP_PROD_ORD_SPLIT
    Increased flexibility to react to unplanned events on the shop floor, changed customer requirements, or reprioritization of production orders.
    Fair-cost split between parent and child order allowing meaningful comparison of planned and actual costs.



                                                                                                                               Target Users for this Business
 New Features                   Description
                                                                                                                               Function

 Production order split            Allows split of an already partially confirmed production order                               Production planner and MRP
                                   Allows split to put WIP to stock                                                               planner executing,
                                   Supports multiple split                                                                        changing, and confirming
                                   Visualization of split history                                                                 SAP ERP production orders
                                   Split quantity proposal
                                   Supports meaningful comparison of planned and actual cost on parent and child
                                   Fair split of planned cost between parent and child
                                   Support usage of material ledger
                                   Update batch traceability during split (component and WIP batch
Product Development and Manufacturing > Manufacturing Execution > Order Split


 Feature: Production order split

Delivered by Business Function LOG_PP_PROD_ORD_SPLIT
     Allows split of an already partially confirmed production order
     Allows split to put WIP to stock
     Supports multiple split
     Visualization of split history
     Split quantity proposal
     Supports meaningful comparison of planned and actual cost on parent and child
     Fair split of planned cost between parent and child
     Support usage of material ledger
     Update batch traceability during split (component and WIP batch
Production Planner                            Production Supervisor
                                                                                Production Planning (Discrete Manufacturing) CTO in ERP,
                                                                                Production Planning (Discrete Manufacturing) MTO in ERP

                Create &                                   Confirm Order                          Split Order                      Confirm &
              Release Order                                  (partially)                        (optional step)
                                                                                                                   *             complete Order


                                                                                                                                   * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                          Business value
     Inability to react to:                                                               More flexibility for production planner
       Unplanned events on the shop floor                                                 Better cost transparency considering real shop floor-driven
                                                                                            plan changes
       New priorities
                                                                                           Reliable batch traceability information after production order
        Changed customer requirement                                                       split
        Alerts in SAP Supply Chain Management
     No transparency into cost per production order (current
      production order split supports only product cost collector)
Product Development and Manufacturing > Manufacturing Execution


 SAP EWM Integration in Manufacturing


 Integration of SAP EWM with Manufacturing, Kanban, and Repetitive Manufacturing
 Benefits                                                                              LOG_PP_EWM_MAN
    Based on transparent logistic processes that are provided by SAP EWM, users can improve the logistic chain or parts of it
    Particularly in the environment of Lean 6 Sigma, these logistic processes must be measured in detail to improve them.


 Improvements of                                                                                                            Target Users for this Business
                                Description
 existing features                                                                                                          Function

 Integration of SAP EWM            In classic manufacturing the following areas and transactions are enhanced to               Workers on the production
 with classic                       include support for those managed by SAP EWM:                                                line, in the warehouse, or
 manufacturing (PP and             Pull list (MF60)                                                                             supervising logistics
 PP-PI)                            Production and process orders
                                   Confirmation transactions in PP and PP-PI
                                   Cancel confirmation
                                   COGI

 Integration of SAP EWM            Integration of SAP EWM with repetitive manufacturing provides the following                 Workers on the production
 with repetitive                    confirmations:                                                                               line, in the warehouse, or
 manufacturing                     Final confirmation                                                                           supervising logistics
                                   Reporting point confirmation
                                   Decoupled confirmation
                                   Document-neutral cancellation
                                   Document-related cancellation
                                   Restrictions: components cannot be stored in a storage location managed by
                                    SAP EWM

 Integration of SAP EWM          Storage locations managed by SAP EWM can be used with kanban                                  Workers on the production
 with kanban                     Exceptions:                                                                                    line, in the warehouse, or
                                 “Ext. Procurement” / Scheduling agreement and Summarized JIT-calls                             supervising logistics
                                 For “In-house production with planned orders”: It is not allowed to store
                                  components in a EWM-managed storage location.
Product Development and Manufacturing > Manufacturing Execution


 WIP Batch


 Better Transparency in WIP Tracking for Production and Process Orders
 Benefits                                                                              LOG_PP_WIP_BATCH
  Increased visibility and traceability of work-in-process (WIP) through an ability to put WIP on stock, send WIP to subcontractors, and describe individual
   items in WIP by characteristics
  Detailed tracking of material flow through production order from component to finished product at the level of individual item enables more precise recalls
  Ability to model the individual item for item-based scheduling



                                                                                                                            Target Users for this Business
 New Features                   Description
                                                                                                                            Function

 Work-in-process (WIP)             WIP batches to model WIP at an operation level: integrated into batch information          Production planner, MRP
 management with WIP                cockpit, batch where-used list, and order information system                                planner, and shop floor
 batch                             WIP batches allow users to collect characteristics of intermediate products for             supervisor
                                    each production confirmation
                                   Integrated with QM inspections: transfer quality inspection characteristics into
                                    batch classification
                                   WIP batches offer N:M batch traceability from components through WIP to finished
                                    goods receipt
                                   Inventory managed WIP-batches allow goods receipt and goods issue of
                                    intermediate products at a batch level
                                   WIP-batches support stock transfer orders and subcontracting
                                   Integration with production order split (split based on WIP-batches)
Product Development and Manufacturing > Manufacturing Execution > WIP Batch


 Feature: Work-in-process (WIP) management
 with WIP batch
Delivered by Business Function LOG_PP_WIP_BATCH
  WIP batches to model WIP at an operation level: integrated into batch information cockpit, batch where-used list, and order
   information system
  WIP batches allow users to collect characteristics of intermediate products for each production confirmation
  Integrated with QM inspections: transfer quality inspection characteristics into batch classification
  WIP batches offer N:M batch traceability from components through WIP to finished goods receipt
  Inventory managed WIP-batches allow goods receipt and goods issue of intermediate products at a batch level
  WIP-batches support stock transfer orders and subcontracting
  Integration with production order split (split based on WIP-batches)

shop floor supervisor                    Production planner
                                                                                            Process: Manufacturing Execution
                                                                                           (Discrete- or Process Manufacturing)
                                                                                           Post goods                                    External
                                       Create and                  Assign WIP                                      Update
           Confirm                                                                         movements                                   processing
          operation
                                        classify
                                       WIP batch
                                                      *             batch to
                                                                 predecessor(s)
                                                                                  *         for WIP-
                                                                                            batches      *      batch-where-
                                                                                                                  used-list
                                                                                                                               *        with WIP-
                                                                                                                                        batches     *
                                                                                                                               * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                         Business value
     Lack of visibility into work-in-process inventory during                           Greater transparency of work-in-process
      production                                                                         More precise impact analysis of quality defects through
     Lack of transparency of batch history through production                            improved WIP traceability
      (splits and merges; N:M relation component batches to
      finished goods batches) leading to increased effort in
      complaints analysis
     Missing ability to model batches, discrete pieces, or partial
      quantities and their history
Index




  Introduction and Overview                          6. Procurement and Logistics Execution
  1. Analytics                                              6.1 Procurement
                                                            6.2 Inbound and Outbound Logistics
          1.1 Financial Analytics
                                                            6.3 Inventory and Warehouse Management
          1.2 Strategic Enterprise Management
  2. Financials                                      7. Product Development and Manufacturing
          2.1    Financial Supply Chain Management          7.1   Life-cycle Data Management
                                                            7.2   Manufacturing Execution
          2.2    Corporate Governance
                                                            7.3   Product Development
          2.3    Financial Accounting
                                                            7.4   Production Planning
          2.4    Treasury
                                                            7.5   General
  3. Human Capital Management
          3.1 Talent Management
                                                     8. Sales and Service
                                                            8.1 General
          3.2 Workforce Process Management
          3.4 General                                       8.2 Sales Order Management
                                                     9. Cross SAP ERP
  4. End-user Service Delivery
  5. Corporate Services
          5.1    Enterprise Asset Management
          5.2    Project and Portfolio Management
          5.3    Quality Management
          5.4    Real Estate Management
          5.5    Travel Management
Product Development and Manufacturing > Product Development


 PLM iPPE Integration


 iPPE Integration with CAD, DMU Viewing, and cProjects
 Benefits                                                                                /PLMU/IPPE_INT
    This functionality allows customers to shorten their time-to-market by using iPPE as a data backbone that brings together all relevant information from
     CAD, DMU, and engineering change management to project management information.



                                                                                                                             Target Users for this Business
 New Features                  Description
                                                                                                                             Function

 Instance-handling in             Instance-handling in iPPE will allow customers to hold CAD instances on the item             All customers who want to
 iPPE                              level in iPPE. Different types of instances can be stored there, such as differently          connect iPPE with a CAD
                                   positioned instances.                                                                         system

 Digital mock-up                  This functionality will integrate the ECL viewer into the iPPE workbench, allowing           Customers who want to give
 integrated in iPPE                the user to do digital mock-ups by selecting iPPE variants.                                   nonengineering users in
 workbench                                                                                                                       their enterprise access to
                                                                                                                                 visual product information

 cProjects integration for        This functionality creates a connection between iPPE product structures and                  All customers who want to
 iPPE                              cProjects, allowing a connection of both worlds and propagation of a set of                   drive their development
                                   relevant information                                                                          projects with cProjects and
                                                                                                                                 connect the process tightly
                                                                                                                                 to their iPPE engineering
                                                                                                                                 backbone
Product Development and Manufacturing > Product Development > PLM iPPE Integration


 Feature: Instance-handling in iPPE

Delivered by Business Function /PLMU/IPPE_INT
     Instance-handling in iPPE will allow customers to hold CAD instances on the item level in iPPE. Different
      types of instances can be stored there, such as differently positioned instances.




                                                                                                             Product Development
                                                                                                             (Discrete Industries)




 Customer business challenges                                                        Business value
     This feature solves the challenge of consistently storing                         The business benefit lies in having one common engineering
      different instances of a CAD part in a common data                                 BOM in the process, which now can be populated directly
      backbone.                                                                          from a CAD system.
Product Development and Manufacturing > Product Development > PLM iPPE Integration


 Feature: Digital mock-up integrated in iPPE
 workbench
Delivered by Business Function /PLMU/IPPE_INT
     This functionality will integrate the ECL viewer into the iPPE workbench, allowing the user to do digital
      mock-ups by selecting iPPE variants.




                                                                                                              Product Development
                                                                                                              (Discrete Industries)




 Customer business challenges                                                        Business value
     Customers today typically need graphical information of                           Business benefits include an ability to provide graphical
      the product along the life cycle. This feature allows them                         information along the life cycle, thus improving
      to transport a graphical picture of the product to non-                            understanding of the product and reducing errors along the
      engineering audiences.                                                             life cycle.
Product Development and Manufacturing > Product Development > PLM iPPE Integration


 Feature: cProjects integration for iPPE

Delivered by Business Function /PLMU/IPPE_INT
     This functionality creates a connection between iPPE product structures and cProjects, allowing a
      connection of both worlds and propagation of a set of relevant information




                                                                                                             Product Development
                                                                                                             (Discrete Industries)




 Customer business challenges                                                        Business value
     Development projects are typically driven in a project                            This functionality bridges the gap between development
      management system that contains milestones and tasks                               project management and result documentation
      which must be carried out . The results are documented in
      a product structure backbone like iPPE. Today, there is no
      transparency between the tasks and deadlines of the
      project and the results that have been achieved.
Product Development and Manufacturing > Product Development


 PLM Web User Interface


 Web User Interface for SAP PLM Provides Improved Usability
 Benefits                                                                                /PLMU/WEB_UI
    This functionality will allow you to use the new PLM user interaction paradigms and functionality. Using this functionality will improve user acceptance.




                                                                                                                               Target Users for this Business
 New Features                  Description
                                                                                                                               Function

 SAP PLM: access                  This feature allows you to control access to SAP PLM objects of the Web UI for                 All customers who want to
 control context                   SAP PLM                                                                                         control access to SAP PLM
                                                                                                                                   data

 SAP PLM: Internet                This feature will allow you to give external parties Web access to your SAP PLM                All customers who want to
 collaboration                     back-end system through a secure architecture. The Web UI for SAP can be                        involve external parties from
                                   decoupled from the original back-end system and installed in a demilitarized zone               outside the corporate
                                   (DMZ) outside your corporate firewall.                                                          firewall in their engineering
                                                                                                                                   process

 SAP PLM: work center,            The work center and control center will provide the key entry screens for SAP PLM              All customers who want to
 control center, object            users in the new Web UI. It contains functionality like search, favorites, and work             use the Web user interface
 navigator, and search             lists. To find objects based on free text intuitively, search functionality will also be        for SAP PLM
                                   available. Role-specific navigation between objects, search results, and the work
                                   center and control center is enabled by the object navigator of SAP PLM.

 Improvements of                                                                                                               Target Users for this Business
                               Description
 existing features                                                                                                             Function

 SAP PLM: Web UI for              The feature provides a new, streamlined, and Web-based SAP PLM user interface                  All customers who are using
 BOM, engineering                  for BOM, engineering change number, DMS documents, and materials                                the objects in an
 change number,                                                                                                                    engineering environment
 document, and material
 Product Development and Manufacturing > Product Development > PLM Web User Interface


  Feature: SAP PLM: access control context

 Delivered by Business Function /PLMU/WEB_UI
      This feature allows you to control access to SAP PLM objects of the Web UI for SAP PLM




Project Lead                                           External Partner
                                                                                            Document Management, Product Development (Discrete
                                                                                            Industries), Product Development (Process Industries)

               Initiate a collaboration                                   Execute collaboration                         Finish collaboration
                     using access
                   control contexts                   *                      using access
                                                                            control contexts            *                  using access
                                                                                                                          control contexts         *
                                                                                                                                  * Improvements
  Customer business challenges                                                          Business value
      Access to information needs to be controlled at a context                           Customers can set up teams, assign roles to team
       and a user or role level. For example, not all users will be                         members, and control the access that the group will have to
       allowed to see all BOMs, even though they have general                               the SAP PLM data through the Web UI for SAP PLM. That
       authorization to see BOMs.                                                           will allow new forms of direct collaboration and giving
                                                                                            partners, suppliers, and other internal and external parties
                                                                                            access to SAP PLM.
Product Development and Manufacturing > Product Development > PLM Web User Interface


 Feature: SAP PLM: Internet collaboration (1)

Delivered by Business Function /PLMU/WEB_UI
     This feature will allow you to give external parties Web access to your SAP PLM back-end system through
      a secure architecture. The Web UI for SAP can be decoupled from the original back-end system and
      installed in a demilitarized zone (DMZ) outside your corporate firewall.




 Customer business challenges                                                          Business value
     Secure access for external parites through the Web                                  Engineering collaboration can occur on one common system
                                                                                           with the involvement of internal and external parties. That
                                                                                           will reduce the overhead for data exchange, speed up
                                                                                           collaboration, and reduce time-to-market.
Product Development and Manufacturing > Product Development > PLM Web User Interface


 Feature: SAP PLM: Internet collaboration (2)

                                       Company                                                     External
                                                                                                               Internet collaboration with
 Partici-




                                                                                       Enhanced
  pants




                                                                                                               enhanced authorization:
                                                                                       Authority
                                                                                                                  External participants get
                         Julia                               Ralph                      concept,      Dan           role driven access on
                                                                                                                    data, documents and
                                                                                                                    structures
                                                                                                                  Architecture compliant
  Roles




                      Product                                                                                       with network security
                                                          Designer
                      Manager                                                                                       “Layered defense”
                                                                                                                        Separate System in
                                                                                                                         DMZ (Demilitarized
                                                                                                                         Zone) outside of
                     Context:                            Context:                                                        corporate firewall.
                                                                                                                        No data available in
                     Project A                           Project B                                                       DMZ, presentation
                                                                                                                         layer only
 Context




                                                                                                                        Intranet and extranet
                                                                                                                         access controlled by
                                                                                                                         authorizations
                                                                                                                        Team support,
                                                                                                                         context based
                                                                                                                         administration, ACL
                                                                                                                         on object level


                                   Intranet                                             DMZ         Internet
Product Development and Manufacturing > Product Development > PLM Web User Interface


 Feature: SAP PLM: work center, control
 center, object navigator, and search
Delivered by Business Function /PLMU/WEB_UI
     The work center and control center will provide the key entry screens for SAP PLM users in the new Web
      UI. It contains functionality like search, favorites, and work lists. To find objects based on free text
      intuitively, search functionality will also be available. Role-specific navigation between objects, search
      results, and the work center and control center is enabled by the object navigator of SAP PLM.




 Customer business challenges                                                          Business value
     Intuitive and efficient work in an engineering environment                          Fast access to the relevant work environment and faster
                                                                                           navigation within the user's daily work context will improve
                                                                                           work efficiency
Agenda




  Introduction and Overview                          6. Procurement and Logistics Execution
  1. Analytics                                              6.1 Procurement
                                                            6.2 Inbound and Outbound Logistics
          1.1 Financial Analytics
                                                            6.3 Inventory and Warehouse Management
          1.2 Strategic Enterprise Management
  2. Financials                                      7. Product Development and Manufacturing
          2.1    Financial Supply Chain Management          7.1   Life-cycle Data Management
                                                            7.2   Manufacturing Execution
          2.2    Corporate Governance
                                                            7.3   Product Development
          2.3    Financial Accounting
                                                            7.4   Production Planning
          2.4    Treasury
                                                            7.5   General
  3. Human Capital Management
          3.1 Talent Management
                                                     8. Sales and Service
                                                            8.1 General
          3.2 Workforce Process Management
          3.4 General                                       8.2 Sales Order Management
                                                     9. Cross SAP ERP
  4. End-user Service Delivery
  5. Corporate Services
          5.1    Enterprise Asset Management
          5.2    Project and Portfolio Management
          5.3    Quality Management
          5.4    Real Estate Management
          5.5    Travel Management
Product Development and Manufacturing > Production Planning


 SAP LPO Integration


 Standardized Integration of SAP ERP and SAP LPO
 Benefits                                                                              LOG_PP_LPO
    Reduced implementation effort when integrating SAP LPO (using SAP Manufacturing Integration and Intelligence, SAP MII) in connection with SAP ERP
    Leverage and build upon investments in SAP ERP, such as some master data and parts of the transactional data (demand and inventory)
    Enhance lean manufacturing capabilities


                                                                                                                       Target Users for this Business
 New Features                   Description
                                                                                                                       Function

 Provide interfaces for            Provide a set of standard interfaces that can be used to set up and implement an      System integrator
 integration with SAP               integrated planning cycle for lean manufacturing industries with SAP LPO              System administrator
 LPO
Index




  Introduction and Overview                          6. Procurement and Logistics Execution
  1. Analytics                                              6.1 Procurement
                                                            6.2 Inbound and Outbound Logistics
          1.1 Financial Analytics
                                                            6.3 Inventory and Warehouse Management
          1.2 Strategic Enterprise Management
  2. Financials                                      7. Product Development and Manufacturing
          2.1    Financial Supply Chain Management          7.1   Life-cycle Data Management
                                                            7.2   Manufacturing Execution
          2.2    Corporate Governance
                                                            7.3   Product Development
          2.3    Financial Accounting
                                                            7.4   Production Planning
          2.4    Treasury
                                                            7.5   General
  3. Human Capital Management
          3.1 Talent Management
                                                     8. Sales and Service
                                                            8.1 General
          3.2 Workforce Process Management
          3.4 General                                       8.2 Sales Order Management
                                                     9. Cross SAP ERP
  4. End-user Service Delivery
  5. Corporate Services
          5.1    Enterprise Asset Management
          5.2    Project and Portfolio Management
          5.3    Quality Management
          5.4    Real Estate Management
          5.5    Travel Management
Product Development and Manufacturing > General


 Outsourced Manufacturing


 Get Enhanced Visibility, Control, and On-Time Information About Your Subcontractor's Activities
 Benefits                                                                              LOG_MM_OM_1
    New subcontracting cockpit
    Seamless batch traceability (including WIP batch)
    Tracking of external production operations via SNC (use work order collaboration concept to track production progress of the subcontractor)
    In-time product costing (WIP analysis for subcontracting)
    Consumption/scrap report (compare actual and planned consumption)
    In-transfer stock for tracking the component shipment to the subcontractor
    In-transfer stock for tracking the material shipment to customer consignment stock


                                                                                                                            Target Users for this Business
 New Features                   Description
                                                                                                                            Function

 In-time consumption of          In a subcontracting or external processing scenario, users can now post the                  All customers with
 components                       component consumption in a separate step.                                                     subcontracting processes or
                                 A controlling object is also updated at consumption to track the WIP costs.                   doing external processing

 In-transfer stock for             Components can be posted to an in-transfer stock segment                                   All customers using
 components                                                                                                                     subcontracting and external
                                                                                                                                processing scenarios

 Inbound delivery with             Now subcontractors can specify which component batches they used to produce a              All customers using
 component information              certain final product. On the ERP side, that can be maintained in the inbound               subcontracting and needing
                                    delivery. All the related follow-up functions are automatically performed with the          batch traceability
                                    correct batch numbers.

 Direct provisioning of          Plant-to-plant transfer of components can now be posted directly to                          Purchasers
 components from                  subcontracting stock                                                                         Replenishment planners
 another plant                   Users can now specify a subcontractor in stock transfer orders
                                                                                                                               MRP controllers
Product Development and Manufacturing > General


 Outsourced Manufacturing



 Improvements of                                                                                                         Target Users for this Business
                                Description
 existing features                                                                                                       Function

 Subcontracting monitor          Improved visibility in subcontracting process                                             All customers using
                                 Extended functionality to manage the subcontracting process                                subcontracting and external
                                 New user interface                                                                         processing

 External processing of            By providing a sample BADI implementation, customers can decide which material          All customers using the
 production operations              number will be transferred to the subcontracting purchase requisition for external       external processing
 with material number               operations                                                                               scenario to allow certain
                                                                                                                             production steps be
                                                                                                                             performed by a contract
                                                                                                                             manufacturer or
                                                                                                                             subcontractor
Product Development and Manufacturing > General > Outsourced Manufacturing


 Feature: In-time consumption of components

Delivered by Business Function LOG_MM_OM_1
     In a subcontracting or external processing scenario, users can now post the component consumption in a
      separate step.
     A controlling object is also updated at consumption to track the WIP costs.




                  Buyer                           Replenishment Planner             Subcontractor                  Warehouse Clerk




                Create                                      Transfer
                                                                                      Component                        Perform
            Subcontracting
            Purchase Order
                                                          Components
                                                        to Subcontractor
                                                                                     Consumption
                                                                                                       *            Goods Receipt
                                                                                                                                       *
                                                                                                                      * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                Business value
     In the past, the component consumption was posted at the                  With the new functionality, customers can record the
      end of the process during the goods receipt. This                          component consumption exactly when the materials were
      approach led to an inconsistent situation of inventory:                    consumed by the subcontractor. This approach will create a
      although the components were already consumed, the                         consistent view of the inventory and correct valuation of
      stock was not reduced until the goods receipt was posted.                  inventory (no unnecessary high inventory values anymore).
                                                                                WIP cost tracking for subcontracting is now possible.
Product Development and Manufacturing > General > Outsourced Manufacturing


 Feature: In-transfer stock for components

Delivered by Business Function LOG_MM_OM_1
     Components can be posted to an in-transfer stock segment




                  Buyer                           Replenishment Planner                 Subcontractor                  Warehouse Clerk




                Create                                      Transfer                                                 Perform Component
                                                                                            Receive
            Subcontracting
            Purchase Order
                                                          Components
                                                        to Subcontractor     *            Components
                                                                                                            *          Consumption /
                                                                                                                       Goods Receipt

                                                                                                                         * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                    Business value
     In the past customers could not monitor if components                         Complete process tracking of components is now possible
      were already at the subcontractor or still on the road                        A more accurate view on the inventory
     The same issue did exist for consignment materials
Product Development and Manufacturing > General > Outsourced Manufacturing


 Feature: Inbound delivery with component
 information
Delivered by Business Function LOG_MM_OM_1
     Now subcontractors can specify which component batches they used to produce a certain final product.
      On the ERP side, that can be maintained in the inbound delivery. All the related follow-up functions are
      automatically performed with the correct batch numbers.




                  Buyer                           Replenishment Planner             Subcontractor                   Warehouse Clerk




                Create                                      Transfer
                                                                                     Send ASN with                  Manage Inbound
            Subcontracting
            Purchase Order
                                                          Components
                                                        to Subcontractor
                                                                                    component data
                                                                                                       *               delivery
                                                                                                                                        *
                                                                                                                      * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                Business value
     During inbound processing, it was impossible to specify                   Seamless batch traceability can be established
      the component batches the supplier used to produce the                    More efficient inbound processing is now possible without
      final product.                                                             additional manual tasks
     Batches had to be entered manually during goods receipt.
Product Development and Manufacturing > General > Outsourced Manufacturing


 Feature: Direct provisioning of components
 from another plant
Delivered by Business Function LOG_MM_OM_1
     Plant-to-plant transfer of components can now be posted directly to subcontracting stock
     Users can now specify a subcontractor in stock transfer orders



                                                                                                                                  * Improvements
        Replenishment Planner                         Warehouse Clerk                         Subcontractor                 Replenishment Planner




                                                            Perform                                                             Monitor
              Create Stock                                                                       Receive
             Transfer Order
                                      *                    Component
                                                            Transfer           *
                                                                    Production Plant
                                                                                               Components
                                                                                                                             Subcontracting
                                                                                                                               Process

                                                                                                                                  Administration Plant
 Customer business challenges                                                          Business value
     Inefficiency in handling transfer postings of subcontracting                        Several business process steps can now be done within a
      components                                                                           single transaction
                                                                                          Reduced errors due to automation of processes
Agenda




  Introduction and Overview                          6. Procurement and Logistics Execution
  1. Analytics                                              6.1 Procurement
                                                            6.2 Inbound and Outbound Logistics
          1.1 Financial Analytics
                                                            6.3 Inventory and Warehouse Management
          1.2 Strategic Enterprise Management
  2. Financials                                      7. Product Development and Manufacturing
          2.1    Financial Supply Chain Management          7.1   Life-cycle Data Management
                                                            7.2   Manufacturing Execution
          2.2    Corporate Governance
                                                            7.3   Product Development
          2.3    Financial Accounting
                                                            7.4   Production Planning
          2.4    Treasury
                                                            7.5   General
  3. Human Capital Management
          3.1 Talent Management
                                                     8. Sales and Service
                                                            8.1 General
          3.2 Workforce Process Management
          3.4 General                                       8.2 Sales Order Management
                                                     9. Cross SAP ERP
  4. End-user Service Delivery
  5. Corporate Services
          5.1    Enterprise Asset Management
          5.2    Project and Portfolio Management
          5.3    Quality Management
          5.4    Real Estate Management
          5.5    Travel Management
Sales and Service


 Sales and Service
 Business Functions (1/2)
     Value Proposition for Sales and Service enhancements within SAP Enhancement Package 4 for SAP ERP
     In Sales and Service, SAP Enhancement Package 4 provides significant enhancements to further improve the collaboration with customers, boost user
     productivity and accelerate the entire order-to-cash process. The innovations delivered also extends the flexibility offered by the enterprise SOA with
     new enterprise services in sales order management, after-market sales and service, as well as incentive and commission management.
     Key enhancements: Supplier-Managed Inventory / Advanced Returns Management / Enhanced Internal Sales Representative role / Sales order entry
     via CRM / ES Bundle Customer Service Execution / ES Bundle for ATP Check


 Description                                                                                      Target Customers

    Advanced Returns Management:                                                                     Special target industries: wholesale and retail
     End-to-end support for supplier and customer returns business transactions,                      Customers with a high volume of supplier and customer
     including the capture of inspections, the definition of logistical follow-up activities,          returns business transactions
     applications for customer and internal refund determination, and tracking
                                                                                                      Customers with additional reverse logistical processes for
     functionality for monitoring the entire returns process.
                                                                                                       customer returns like forwarding to a distribution center or
                                                                                                       a vendor
                                                                                                      Customers who require inspection-capturing and a
                                                                                                       corresponding refund determination for customer returns

    Sales and Distribution Simplification 2 (Order-to-Cash):                                         New customers and existing customers who use sales
     Enhanced role of internal sales representative; new configurable sales UI;                        and distribution in SAP ERP
     enhanced customer cockpit; and enhanced POWER lists (order tracking, simplified
     display, and maintenance of prices, improved customer search, and display of
     archived quotations and text)

    Supplier-Managed Inventory:                                                                      Target customers are SAP ERP users who, as suppliers,
     This functionality enables SAP ERP customers to run a supplier-managed                            want to run the supplier-managed inventory process with
     inventory process as a supplier. It provides the ability to respond to customer                   their customers using the SAP Supply Network
     requirements automatically without manual intervention.                                           Collaboration application
Sales and Service


 Sales and Service
 Business Functions (2/2)
 Description                                                                                     Target Customers

    Enterprise Services for an ATP Check:                                                          Customers who want to use the ATP functionality of SAP
     This business function enhances the customizing for ATP enterprise services in                  ERP via enterprise services. The services are also
     SAP ERP by adding new nodes in the IMG for determination of the initial location                shipped with EhP 4, but independent of a business
     and demand. Clean-up reports for the enterprise services are also delivered.                    function.

    SME Simplification:                                                                            New customers and existing customers of small
     A broad collection of OPS POWER lists for SME reuse                                             businesses and midsize companies who use SAP ERP.

    SAP Incentive and Commission Management:                                                       Customers interested in enhancing their existing
     Usability                                                                                       scenarios with SAP Incentive and Commission
        Enterprise service-oriented architecture (PIC)                                              Management or in building composites based on newly
        New functionality and features                                                              delivered central services

  For details please refer to industry presentation (chapter insurance)


    Dealer Portal, Veh. Mgmt. Syst., Spare Parts, Enterpr. Serv.:                                  All automotive manufacturers, importers, distributors, and
     Provides new UI based on Web Dynpro for ABAP for the dealer in the vehicle                      national sales companies that offer Web portal access to
     management system and for spare parts business. Improvements are in the area of                 their back-end systems, such as vehicle ordering and
     usability, accessibility, extensibility, and functionality. Services are also provided to       locating, spare parts search, and ordering replenishment.
     handle vehicle and sales orders.

  For details please refer to industry presentation (chapter Automotive)
Sales and Service


 Sales and Service
 ES Bundles

 Description

    Quote to Order for Configurable Products:
     This ES bundle provides enterprise services in the ERP area of quote and order and related documents. It is an extension of the ES bundle
     Order to Cash add product configuration data to existing/planned services for quote and order. Further this ES bundle contains services to
     access documents in Technical Document Management Connectivity. The ES bundle enables customers and partners to build individual
     composite applications for quote/order processing for configurable products. This allows to integrate/build ISV and custom applications for
     product selection/guided selling, graphical configuration, quote and order processing (i.e. ISV/customer specific web-shops) into ERP quote
     and order processing. Furthermore this ES bundle provides the enterprise services for composite applications to create drawings / output /
     proposal documents in Technical Document Management Connectivity attached to quote and order.

    Order To Cash:
     Service-enabling around Customer, Customer Quote, Sales Order, Sales Contracts, Customer Requirement (ATP Check), Outbound Delivery,
     Proof of Delivery, and Customer Invoice. This ES bundle allows companies to integrate customer-facing solutions for order entry by creating
     customer-, product- and industry-specific composite applications for order entry and status tracking.

    Availability Issue Resolution & Backorder Processing:
     This bundle enables ATP check without requiring SCM and connects ATP checks with purchase order as well.
     Includes Backorder Processing for Service Parts Management.

    Customer Service Execution:
     This ES bundle provides enterprise services in the area of SAP ERP 6.0 after market sales and service covering customer service and support,
     installed base management, and field service. This ES bundle enables SAP, customers, and partners to create web-based service processes
     that enhance performance, usability, and user productivity.

    ATP Check
       Extend number of end-users able to perform ATP checks against SAP ERP / SAP SCM
       Better usability of SAP software
       Target Market: All customers interested in using different user interfaces for ATP checks
Sales and Service


  ES Bundle – Availability Issue Resolution &
  Backorder Processing

       Enables companies to substantially improve their order fulfillment and overall service level
       Provides flexibility in resolving availability issues by different strategies
       Supports interactive backorder resolution required especially for emergency orders
       Supports various SAP applications involved

                         Find &
                                                                                  Resolve Backorder
                         Select
    Sales              Backorder             Get Availability Preselection
Representative                                                                          Find / Select             Find / Select
                                                  Confirm selected                Sales / Purchase Orders   External Sources of Supply
                                                 Preselection Items                to loose Confirmation
                                                                                                               Update Sales Order
                                                Update Sales Order /                Reassignment of                to Procure
                                                  Purchase Order                    Order Confirmation         by Direct Shipment
                                                    (wrt Confirmation)


    Backend            ERP 6.0 EhP4                 ERP 6.0 EhP4                      ERP 6.0 EhP4                ERP 6.0 EhP4
    Systems
                          SCM 5.0                      SCM 5.0                           SCM 5.0                    SCM 5.0

                                                       CRM 7.0                           CRM 7.0                    CRM 7.0


Business Value                                                               Use Cases
   Improve sales order fulfillment / increase of service level                 Backorder Processing in Service Parts Management
   Flexibility in backorder resolution
   Capability to focus on most important orders
Sales and Service


 ES Bundle – Customer Service Execution



       This bundle provides a collection of enterprise services enabling scenarios for theafter-market service life
        cycle (technical field service management)
       Facilitates and extends the usage of SAP Service and Asset Management as thesolution for processing
        service requests, service orders and service contracts along with installed base information.


Intelligent          Customer         Service                    Customer                                   Service
  Device                              Manager                   Service Rep                                Technician




               Service                Service                       Service                    Installed                  Service
               Request                Contract                       Order                       Base                   Confirmation

Backend             ERP 6.0         ERP 6.0                         ERP 6.0                    ERP 6.0                    ERP 6.0
System

Business Value                                                         Use Cases
   Increased process efficiency and quality by reducing                  Rapid and easy creation of service requests using remote
    manual errors while speeding up business processes                     monitoring systems or Adobe forms
   Seamless collaboration with non-SAP systems                           Connect remote workers to service management business
   Opportunity for enhanced usability and accessibility when              processes via voice enabled mobility solutions
    designing new composite applications for service                      Seamless collaboration with third-party resource planning and
    management                                                             optimization solutions
                                                                          Streamlined and user-friendly way to handle service
                                                                           management business object via partner composites
Sales and Service


  ES Bundle – ATP Check



     Extend number of end-users able to perform ATP checks against SAP ERP / SAP SCM
     Better usability of SAP software
     Target Market: All customers interested in using different user interfaces for ATP checks




Seller / Call center           Seller / Call center              Customer                                  Seller / Call center
        staff                          staff                                                                       staff




            Retrieve product                       Perform                   Evaluate and                      Take Action,
              and location                        Availability                  make                            e.g., enter
                  data                              Check                      decision                        Sales Order



Business Value                                                    Use Cases
   Improve customer service by extending access to SAP data         Give call center staff opportunity to access up-to-date system
    to broader end user base                                          information and to do reservations on-line in the connected
   Possibility to use more attractive user interfaces for            ERP
    performing ATP checks                                            Enable store staff to access system data and provide
   Availability of ATP check for new scenarios fitting to            information to customer on in which nearby store he will find
    customer requirements                                             the desired product
                                                                     Possibility to connect external application calling the ATP
                                                                      check in ERP
Index




  Introduction and Overview                          6. Procurement and Logistics Execution
  1. Analytics                                              6.1 Procurement
                                                            6.2 Inbound and Outbound Logistics
          1.1 Financial Analytics
                                                            6.3 Inventory and Warehouse Management
          1.2 Strategic Enterprise Management
  2. Financials                                      7. Product Development and Manufacturing
          2.1    Financial Supply Chain Management          7.1   Life-cycle Data Management
                                                            7.2   Manufacturing Execution
          2.2    Corporate Governance
                                                            7.3   Product Development
          2.3    Financial Accounting
                                                            7.4   Production Planning
          2.4    Treasury
                                                            7.5   General
  3. Human Capital Management
          3.1 Talent Management
                                                     8. Sales and Service
                                                            8.1 General
          3.2 Workforce Process Management
          3.4 General                                       8.2 Sales Order Management
                                                     9. Cross SAP ERP
  4. End-user Service Delivery
  5. Corporate Services
          5.1    Enterprise Asset Management
          5.2    Project and Portfolio Management
          5.3    Quality Management
          5.4    Real Estate Management
          5.5    Travel Management
Sales and Service > General


 Supplier-Managed Inventory


 Automated Supplier-Managed Inventory Process
 Benefits                                                                            LOG_SD_SMI
 Benefits for the supplier:
  Automation of currently manual supplier-managed inventory process
  Faster customer responsiveness and exception-based management
  Standardization and tighter supplier customer integration by XML messages
  Increased customer satisfaction



                                                                                                                      Target Users for this Business
 New Features                 Description
                                                                                                                      Function

 Automated supplier-             Ability to receive the inventory and demand information from customers, calculate      Suppliers who wish to
 managed inventory                the required replenishment proposal as per the agreed-upon minimum and                  perform a supplier-managed
 process                          maximum inventory levels, and communicate with their customers with planned             inventory process with their
                                  shipments without manual intervention                                                   customers

 SMI monitor                     SMI monitor available to handle products manually. It provides an opportunity to       Employees at the supplier's
                                  simulate replenishment calculation and collect messages for transmission.               site who are responsible for
                                                                                                                          the SMI process
Sales and Service > General > Supplier-Managed Inventory


 Feature: Automated supplier-managed
 inventory process
Delivered by Business Function LOG_SD_SMI
     Ability to receive the inventory and demand information from customers, calculate the required
      replenishment proposal as per the agreed-upon minimum and maximum inventory levels, and
      communicate with their customers with planned shipments without manual intervention




 Customer business challenges                              Business value
     Eliminate the current manual process                     Increased customer satisfaction
Sales and Service > General > Supplier-Managed Inventory


 Feature: SMI monitor

Delivered by Business Function LOG_SD_SMI
     SMI monitor available to handle products manually. It provides an opportunity to simulate replenishment
      calculation and collect messages for transmission.




 Customer business challenges                                      Business value
     Integration with a supplier's SAP ERP application requires      Supplier can focus on special products that will be
      a way to monitor the SMI process                                 processed manually
Agenda




  Introduction and Overview                          6. Procurement and Logistics Execution
  1. Analytics                                              6.1 Procurement
                                                            6.2 Inbound and Outbound Logistics
          1.1 Financial Analytics
                                                            6.3 Inventory and Warehouse Management
          1.2 Strategic Enterprise Management
  2. Financials                                      7. Product Development and Manufacturing
          2.1    Financial Supply Chain Management          7.1   Life-cycle Data Management
                                                            7.2   Manufacturing Execution
          2.2    Corporate Governance
                                                            7.3   Product Development
          2.3    Financial Accounting
                                                            7.4   Production Planning
          2.4    Treasury
                                                            7.5   General
  3. Human Capital Management
          3.1 Talent Management
                                                     8. Sales and Service
                                                            8.1 General
          3.2 Workforce Process Management
          3.4 General                                       8.2 Sales Order Management
                                                     9. Cross SAP ERP
  4. End-user Service Delivery
  5. Corporate Services
          5.1    Enterprise Asset Management
          5.2    Project and Portfolio Management
          5.3    Quality Management
          5.4    Real Estate Management
          5.5    Travel Management
Sales and Service > Sales Order Management


 Advanced Returns Management

 End-To-End Support for Supplier and Customer Returns Business Transactions with High
 Process Efficiency
 Benefits                                                                              OPS_ADVRETURNS_1
    Optimize total cost of ownership by efficiently processing returns
    Increase customer satisfaction and loyalty by providing a clear returns policy with improved transparency of customer returns and refunds



                                                                                                                            Target Users for this Business
 New Features                  Description
                                                                                                                            Function

 Material inspection            Sales representatives or warehouse associates can enter material inspection                   Sales representatives at the
                                 results in the returns order for materials that are turned in physically at the                counter
                                 counter or that have been shipped to the warehouse without prior notification.                Warehouse associates
                                Associates can use the new material inspection in warehouse application to enter               entering unplanned returns
                                 inspection data for returns deliveries related to a returns order or for inbound               or responsible for material
                                 deliveries related to returns stock transport orders.                                          inspection of returned
                                Warehouse associates can use the new material inspection by vendor application                 materials
                                 to enter inspection data for outbound deliveries related to returns purchase
                                 orders.

 Definition of logistical       Sales representatives or warehouse associates can enter data for logistical follow-           Sales representatives at the
 follow-up activities            up activities in the returns order for materials that are turned in physically at the          counter
                                 counter or that have been shipped to the warehouse without prior notification.                Warehouse associates
                                Warehouse associates can use the new material inspection in warehouse                          entering unplanned returns
                                 application to enter data for logistical follow-up activities for returns deliveries           or responsible for material
                                 related to a returns order or for inbound deliveries related to returns stock                  inspection of returned
                                 transport orders.                                                                              materials

 Automatic creation of            The system creates follow-up documents automatically, based on the settings for             Sales representatives at the
 follow-up documents               logistical follow-up activities and for customer refund.                                     counter or in a call center
                                                                                                                               Warehouse associates
                                                                                                                                responsible for processing
                                                                                                                                logistical follow-up activities
Sales and Service > Sales Order Management


 Advanced Returns Management



                                                                                                                     Target Users for this Business
 New Features                  Description
                                                                                                                     Function

 Refund determination           In the returns order, sales representatives can specify the suggested time for         Sales representative at the
                                 customer refund determination and set the refund code for simplified refund             counter
                                 amount determination                                                                   Sales representative or
                                Sales representatives and returns managers can use the new customer refund              returns manager responsible
                                 determination application to define the customer refund amount                          for customer and internal
                                                                                                                         refund determination

 Returns overview                 Associates involved in returns processes can monitor customer and supplier           All associates involved in
                                   returns business transactions with the new returns overview application.              the processing of returns
                                   Monitoring includes the overview of all follow-up documents and the tracking of       business transactions
                                   the logistical and refunding status.
Sales and Service > Sales Order Management > Advanced Returns Management


 Feature: Material inspection

Delivered by Business Function OPS_ADVRETURNS_1
  Sales representatives or warehouse associates can enter material inspection results in the returns order for
   materials that are turned in physically at the counter or that have been shipped to the warehouse without prior
   notification.
  Associates can use the new Material Inspection in Warehouse transaction to enter inspection data for returns
   deliveries related to returns orders or for inbound deliveries related to store returns.
  Warehouse associates can use the new Material Inspection by Vendor transaction to enter inspection data for
   outbound deliveries related to returns purchase orders.
        Sales Representative
                                                                           Supplier Returns in ERP - Advanced Returns Management,
                                                                           Customer Returns in ERP - Advanced Returns Management

                                                                                                                   Material Inspection:
             Enter data of                         Material Inspection:             Material Inspection:
                                                                                                                     Enter data for
          material inspection                            Enter data                   Enter data for
                                                                                                                    inspections by
           in returns order                       for returns deliveries               store returns
                                                                                                                         vendor


 Customer business challenges                                                  Business value
     Speed up the planning of logistical follow-up activities                    Help plan logistical follow-up activities
     Increase the transparency of customer refunds                               Help find a fair and transparent determination of the
     Identify measures to reduce the returns business volume                      customer refund amount
                                                                                  Improve the traceability of decisions in the returns
                                                                                   processes
                                                                                  Help analyze and evaluate returns processes to reduce the
                                                                                   returns business volume in the future
Sales and Service > Sales Order Management > Advanced Returns Management


 Feature: Definition of logistical follow-up
 activities
Delivered by Business Function OPS_ADVRETURNS_1
     Sales representatives or warehouse associates can enter data for logistical follow-up activities in the
      returns order for materials that are turned in physically at the counter or that have been shipped to the
      warehouse without prior notification.
     Warehouse associates can use the new Material Inspection in Warehouse transaction to enter data for
      logistical follow-up activities for returns deliveries related to a returns order or for inbound deliveries related
      to returns stock transport orders.

        Sales Representative
                                                                           Supplier Returns in ERP - Advanced Returns Management,
                                                                           Customer Returns in ERP - Advanced Returns Management

                                                   Material Inspection:             Material Inspection:
             Enter data for                                                                                          Material Inspection:
                                                      Enter follow-up                  Enter follow-up
          logistical follow-up                                                                                        Confirm logistical
                                                           data                             data
            in returns order                                                                                         follow-up activities
                                                  for returns deliveries             for store returns


 Customer business challenges                                                  Business value
     Reduce the manual work in the logistical processing of                      Help plan logistical follow-up activities
      returned materials                                                          Help speed up the processing of logistical follow-up activities
     Provide planning features for logistical follow-up activities               Help analyze and evaluate returns processes to reduce the
      and accelerate processing                                                    returns business volume in the future
Sales and Service > Sales Order Management > Advanced Returns Management


 Feature: Automatic creation of follow-up
 documents
Delivered by Business Function OPS_ADVRETURNS_1
     For the enhanced store returns procedure with an outbound and inbound delivery, the system
      automatically creates the inbound delivery when you post the goods issue for the issuing plant.
     The system creates logistical follow-up documents, based on the settings for logistical follow-up activities,
      when you save a returns order or when you confirm logistical follow-up activities in the Material Inspection
      in Warehouse transaction.
     The system creates a credit memo for returns order items for which you specify an immediate refund.

                                                                  Supplier Returns in ERP - Basic Processing / Advanced Returns Mgmt.,
                                                                  Customer Returns in ERP - Advanced Returns Management

                                                      Create logistical                                                    Create logistical
          Create inbound
                                                          follow-up                  Create credit memos                 follow-up documents
        delivery inenhanced
                                                        documents                      for returns orders                      in Material
            store returns
                                                     for returns orders                                                       Inspection


 Customer business challenges                                                   Business value
     Speed up the processing of logistical follow-up activities                    High efficiency in processing logistical follow-up activities
     Improve user productivity by reducing user interactions
Sales and Service > Sales Order Management > Advanced Returns Management


 Feature: Refund determination

Delivered by Business Function OPS_ADVRETURNS_1
     In the returns order, sales representatives can specify the suggested time for customer refund
      determination and set the refund code for simplified refund amount determination
     Sales representatives and returns managers can use the new Customer / Internal Refund Determination
      transactions to define the customer refund amount or the refund amount for the issuing company code in
      cross-company-code store returns, respectively.
     Returns managers can release credit memo requests created in Customer Refund Determination

        Sales Representative     Returns Manager
                                                                           Supplier Returns in ERP - Advanced Returns Management,
                                                                           Customer Returns in ERP - Advanced Returns Management

            Specify refund                          Perform Customer                   Perform Internal
                                                                                                                        Release credit
                 control                                  Refund                            Refund
           and refund code
           in returns orders
                                                      Determination
                                                    for returns orders
                                                                                        Determination
                                                                                     for cc store returns
                                                                                                                      memo requests
                                                                                                                    for customer refund     *
                                                                                                                         * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                  Business value
     Transparent determination of the customer refund amount                     Simplified refund determination in the returns order by using
                                                                                   the refund code
                                                                                  Accurate determination of the customer refund with a
                                                                                   comprehensive view of the returns process
Sales and Service > Sales Order Management > Advanced Returns Management


 Feature: Returns overview

Delivered by Business Function OPS_ADVRETURNS_1
     Associates involved in returns processes can monitor customer and supplier returns business transactions
      with the new Returns Overview transaction. Monitoring includes the overview of all follow-up documents
      and the tracking of the logistical and refunding status.
     Associates can use the Returns Overview transaction to restart the automatic creation of follow-up
      documents after they have solved issues for the previous failure.


        Sales Representative     Returns Manager
                                                                           Supplier Returns in ERP - Advanced Returns Management,
                                                                           Customer Returns in ERP - Advanced Returns Management

           Display overview                          Display overview                Monitor follow-up                 Restart follow-up
              for supplier                             for customer                   documents and                       document
          returns processes                         returns processes                process statuses                      creation


 Customer business challenges                                                  Business value
     Challenge: tracking of returns processes                                    Comprehensive view of returns business transactions
                                                                                  Transparency of returns processes
                                                                                  Better service for customers requesting information for their
                                                                                   returns
Sales and Service > Sales Order Management


 Sales and Distribution Simplification 2
 (Order-to-Cash)
 Enhanced User Productivity and Simplification of the Order-to-Cash Process
 Benefits                                                                                LOG_SD_SIMP_02
  Sales are significantly enhanced through the activation of this business function. This business function simplifies and accelerates the order-to-cash
   scenario with an enhanced role of internal sales representative. Customers can configure their individual, Web-based order entry screens and bring up
   exactly the fields they need. The business function also provides improvements for the old sales order transaction with a simplified display and
  maintenance of prices, improved customer search, and improved display of archived quotations and archived text.


                                                                                                                           Target Users for this Business
 New Features                  Description
                                                                                                                           Function

 Enhanced role: internal          Provides additional features for the existing portal role such as telephone                Internal sales and customer
 sales representative              integration, SAP search, and additional selection criteria to specify result lists in       service representatives
                                   the POWER list more precisely. It also provides a link to the advanced return              New user groups can be
                                   management project by providing a work center pool role that can be activated               attracted by easy-to-use,
                                   and inserted into the ISR role.                                                             Web-based sales interfaces

 New configurable               New Web-based, intuitive user interface for fast and easy sales order management.            Internal sales and customer
 Sales UI                       Companies can customize their individual screens and bring up exactly the fields              service representatives
                                 and functions they need.                                                                     New user groups can be
                                In particular, occasional users benefit from the new UI, which speeds up sales                attracted by easy-to-use,
                                 processes and enhances data accuracy.                                                         Web-based sales interface

 Enhanced order tracking          Order tracking enables the internal sales representative to track the status of sales      Internal sales and customer
                                   orders and to provide an answer to a customer inquiry about the order status                service representatives
                                   quickly. The existing POWER list, order tracking, is enhanced for individual
                                   purchasing processes. A new status for overall processing of the sales order is
                                   also available. The new overall process is built from a single status, which
                                   considers time characteristics for status determination.
Sales and Service > Sales Order Management


 Sales and Distribution Simplification 2
 (Order-to-Cash)


                                                                                                                           Target Users for this Business
 New Features                  Description
                                                                                                                           Function

 Enhanced customer                The customer cockpit is a tailored view of a specific customer. The internal sales         Cross-industry: all
 cockpit                           representative (ISR) can get all sales-related information at a glance to react             companies with a sales
                                   quickly during a customer interaction.                                                      department

 Simplified price                 Sales representatives can maintain price elements in the item overview table of the        Sales representatives
 maintenance in sales              sales tab strip in the sales order application. It is no longer necessary to navigate       responsible for sales order
 order entry                       to the conditions overview screen to adjust the pricing for sales order items.              entry

 Fast customer search in          Sales representatives can use a TREX-based, full-text search based in the header           Sales representatives
 sales order entry                 of the sales order application to identify the customer quickly                             responsible for the entry of
                                                                                                                               sales orders

 Improved display of              Improved display of archived quotations: In the transaction to display quotations          Customers who use SD in
 archived quotations with          (VA23), users can now display archived quotations as well. The system searches              SAP ERP
 business transactions             in the database first and then in the archive. (It now has the same behavior as the
                                   transaction to display sales orders VA03.) It is now possible to display archived
                                   text for quotations and sales orders.
Sales and Service > Sales Order Management > Sales and Distribution Simplification 2 (Order-to-Cash)


 Feature: Enhanced role: Internal Sales
 Representative
Delivered by Business Function LOG_SD_SIMP_02
     Provides additional features for the existing portal role such as telephone integration, SAP search, and
      additional selection criteria to specify result lists in the POWER list more precisely. It also provides a link to
      the advanced return management project by providing a work center pool role that can be activated and
      inserted into the ISR role.



    ISR                                          ISR
                                                                                                       Internal Sales Representative


             Inquiry & Quot.                                 Sales Order
               Processing
                                          *                  Processing
                                                                                       *                      Delivery                           Billing


                                                                                                                                              * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                                   Business value
     Reactions to incoming customer inquiries, order changes,                                        Support internal sales staff for real-time reaction to customer
      or cancellations is slow.                                                                        inquiries and complaints with centralized customer and order
     All sales-relevant information supporting full sales cycle                                       status information and simplified sales processes.
      are decentralized.                                                                              Improve user productivity through an easy-to-use and
     Complex and multiple user interfaces; lots of clicks to get                                      intuitive user interface as well as quick access to
      to the required information.                                                                     personalized work lists.
                                                                                                      Improve customer satisfaction with better and faster
                                                                                                       customer service.
Sales and Service > Sales Order Management > Sales and Distribution Simplification 2 (Order-to-Cash)


 Feature: New configurable Sales UI

Delivered by Business Function LOG_SD_SIMP_02
     New Web-based, intuitive user interface for fast and easy sales order management.
     Companies can customize their individual screens and bring up exactly the fields and functions they need.
     In particular, occasional users benefit from the new UI, which speeds up sales processes and enhances
      data accuracy.



    ISR                                          ISR
                                                                                                       Internal Sales Representative


             Inquiry & Quot.                                 Sales Order
               Processing
                                          *                  Processing
                                                                                       *                      Delivery                        Billing


                                                                                                                                           * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                                   Business value
     Complex and multiple user interfaces                                                            Improved user productivity through an easy-to-use and
     Lots of clicks to get to the required information                                                intuitive user interface
     Great effort for end user training                                                              New UI can be adapted to companies' business needs.
     Great effort and complexity to adapt user interface
Sales and Service > Sales Order Management > Sales and Distribution Simplification 2 (Order-to-Cash)


 Feature: Enhanced order tracking

Delivered by Business Function LOG_SD_SIMP_02
     Order tracking enables the internal sales representative to track the status of sales orders and to provide
      an answer to a customer inquiry about the order status quickly. The existing POWER list, order tracking, is
      enhanced for individual purchasing processes. A new status for overall processing of the sales order is
      also available. The new overall process is built from a single status, which considers time characteristics
      for status determination.


                                                 ISR
                                                                                                       Internal Sales Representative


             Inquiry & Quot.                                 Sales Order
               Processing                                    Processing
                                                                                       *                      Delivery                           Billing


                                                                                                                                             * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                                   Business value
     * Sales staff is unable to provide a quick answer to a                                          Order status is directly visible and a customer can be
      customer's questions about order status.                                                         immediately informed
     * Critical order status can be different for processes
Sales and Service > Sales Order Management > Sales and Distribution Simplification 2 (Order-to-Cash)


 Feature: Enhanced customer cockpit

Delivered by Business Function LOG_SD_SIMP_02
     The customer cockpit is a tailored view of a specific customer. The internal sales representative (ISR) can
      get all sales-related information at a glance to react quickly during a customer interaction.




    ISR                                          ISR
                                                                                                       Internal Sales Representative


             Inquiry & Quot.                                 Sales Order
               Processing
                                          *                  Processing
                                                                                       *                      Delivery                           Billing


                                                                                                                                              * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                                   Business value
     Sales representatives need to react quickly - especially                                        The customer cockpit is enhanced by additional information
      during a telephone call. Looking up the proper information                                       and work lists that are related to the sales cycle. The most
      and providing customers with the correct information in                                          important issue is that all kinds of information (independently
      time is key in this business. In SAP ERP, the ISR needs to                                       of where it is located in the system) is automatically
      look up information in different applications and                                                provided by the system via assignment to the respective
      components, but the portal role not only combines all                                            user.
      relevant information on one single screen but also catches
      all information on demand.
Sales and Service > Sales Order Management > Sales and Distribution Simplification 2 (Order-to-Cash)


 Feature: Simplified price maintenance in sales
 order entry
Delivered by Business Function LOG_SD_SIMP_02
     Sales representatives can maintain price elements in the item overview table of the sales tab strip in the
      sales order application. It is no longer necessary to navigate to the conditions overview screen to adjust
      the pricing for sales order items.




    ISR                                          ISR
                                                                                                       Standard Sales Order Processing in ERP


             Inquiry & Quot.                                 Sales Order
               Processing
                                          *                  Processing
                                                                                       *                      Delivery                         Billing


                                                                                                                                            * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                                   Business value
     Challenge is to expedite sales order entry                                                      Fast maintenance of important price elements for sales
                                                                                                       order items
                                                                                                      Common view of important price elements for several sales
                                                                                                       order items
Sales and Service > Sales Order Management > Sales and Distribution Simplification 2 (Order-to-Cash)


 Feature: Fast customer search in sales order
 entry
Delivered by Business Function LOG_SD_SIMP_02
     Sales representatives can use a TREX-based, full-text search based in the header of the sales order
      application to identify the customer quickly




    ISR                                          ISR
                                                                                                       Standard Sales Order Processing in ERP


             Inquiry & Quot.                                 Sales Order
               Processing
                                          *                  Processing
                                                                                       *                      Delivery                          Billing


                                                                                                                                             * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                                   Business value
     Challenge is to expedite sales order entry                                                      Fast identification of the customer
                                                                                                      Higher user productivity and more efficiency for the sales
                                                                                                       order application
Sales and Service > Sales Order Management > Sales and Distribution Simplification 2 (Order-to-Cash)


 Feature: Improved display of archived
 quotations with business transactions
Delivered by Business Function LOG_SD_SIMP_02
     Improved display of archived quotations: In the transaction to display quotations (VA23), users can now
      display archived quotations as well. The system searches in the database first and then in the archive. (It
      now has the same behavior as the transaction to display sales orders VA03.) It is now possible to display
      archived text for quotations and sales orders.



    ISR
                                                                                                       Quotation Processing in ERP


             Inquiry & Quot.                                 Sales Order
               Processing
                                          *                  Processing
                                                                                                              Delivery                        Billing


                                                                                                                                           * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                                   Business value
     High data volume requires quick archiving, but quotations                                       Quotations can be archived faster because they are now
      are still necessary in business transactions                                                     accessible in business transactions
Sales and Service > Sales Order Management


 Enterprise Services for an ATP Check


 ATP via Enterprise Services in SAP ERP, Necessary Customizing, and Clean-Up Reports
 Benefits                                                                               ERP_ATP_EXT_CUST
  The key to the project is the development of new enterprise services (and therefore new interfaces). Currently, no scenario or process from the solution
   builder affected the services - each simply provided additional flexibility and an opportunity to build composite applications. With the services, customers
   can create reservations (example: SD order) without directly changing the SD confirmation quantity. After creation of the reservation, users can
   cancel it or
  propagate it to an SD order.




                                                                                                                              Target Users for this Business
 New Features                  Description
                                                                                                                              Function

 Available to promise in          Additional IMG nodes and clean-up reports are shipped. They are prerequisites for             Sales agents for general
 SAP ERP via enterprise            use of the new EhP4 enterprise services for ATP in SAP ERP. The business                       availability information and
 services                          function enables this feature of ATP in SAP ERP via enterprise services. It allows             planners who work on SD
                                   to do simulative ATP checks, temporary reservations for later consumption in SD                orders
                                   orders, and so on with the new shipped interfaces. The interfaces can be openly
                                   used within custom-built user interfaces because they are enterprise services.
Sales and Service > Sales Order Management >Enterprise Services for an ATP Check


 Feature: Available to promise in SAP ERP via
 enterprise services
Delivered by Business Function ERP_ATP_EXT_CUST
     Additional IMG nodes and clean-up reports are shipped. They are prerequisites for use of the new EhP4
      enterprise services for ATP in SAP ERP. The business function enables this feature of ATP in SAP ERP via
      enterprise services. It allows to do simulative ATP checks, temporary reservations for later consumption in
      SD orders, and so on with the new shipped interfaces. The interfaces can be openly used within custom-
      built user interfaces because they are enterprise services.


AR clerk
                                                                                           Standard Sales Order Processing in ERP

                                                       Check Availability,                      Determine
                Create                                  schedule order,                                                        Monitor sales
              Sales Order
                                        *                 and create
                                                         requirement               *              Prices
                                                                                              and Conditions
                                                                                                                             order processing

                                                                                                                                 * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                          Business value
     First, customers can do ATP in SAP ERP only via the                                 Customers can now do individual temporary reservations
      delivered back-end functionality or using existing BAPIs,                            with the enterprise services (example: for line items of SD
      but not with the flexibility of Web services. Second,                                orders - without directly changing the confirmation quantity.
      customers can do the check for only an entire SD order                               When finished successfully and to the satisfaction of the end
      and not work on individual confirmations of line items.                              user, the reservations can be propagated to the SD orders.
Sales and Service > Sales Order Management


 SME Simplification

 Simplified User Access to Workload Can Guide Users Through the Business Process with
 Personal Object Work List (POWER List)
 Benefits                                                                            OPS_SME_SIMP_01
  This business function provides the POWER lists for the needs of small businesses and midsize companies. The lists are delivered with the service
   provider work set for reuse in roles.
  This business function simplifies and accelerates goods receipt processing based on inbound deliveries by providing a configurable POWER list for
  warehouse operators in charge of receiving goods and posting goods receipts.



                                                                                                                         Target Users for this Business
 New Features                  Description
                                                                                                                         Function

 SD document with WBS             Support to process project-based sales process by the personal object work list          New customers and existing
 elements list                     (POWL)                                                                                    customers of small
                                                                                                                             businesses and midsize
                                                                                                                             companies who use SAP
                                                                                                                             ERP.

 Inbound delivery                 An inbound delivery represents the information on shipped goods provided by the          New customers and existing
                                   supplier from the recipient's perspective                                                 customers of small
                                                                                                                             businesses and midsize
                                                                                                                             companies who use SAP
                                                                                                                             ERP

 Extended billing                 Support the processing status of the billing document and payment information            New customers and existing
 documents                                                                                                                   customers of small business
                                                                                                                             and midsize companies who
                                                                                                                             use SAP ERP
 Sales and Service > Sales Order Management > SME Simplification


  Feature: SD document with WBS elements list

Delivered by Business Function OPS_SME_SIMP_01
      Support to process project-based sales process by the personal object work list (POWL)




Sales Manager




             Find and check                                    View
                                                                                      Create / Edit
            sales documents
             (Billing Preparation)
                                         *                assigned project
                                                          (WBS element)              billing request
                                                                                                                      Create invoice


                                                                                                                        * Improvements
  Customer business challenges                                               Business value
      Limited access to all important sales information relevant               Easy access to all sales information relevant to the project-
       to the sales process and to follow-on actions                             based sales and resource-related billing process
Sales and Service > Sales Order Management > SME Simplification


  Feature: Inbound delivery

Delivered by Business Function OPS_SME_SIMP_01
     An inbound delivery represents the information on shipped goods provided by the supplier from the
      recipient's perspective




Warehouse operator




            Find and check                                   Create                                                  Monitor
          inbound deliveries                                                          Post
               (in the course
            of receiving goods)         *               warehouse order
                                                          for putaway             goods receipt
                                                                                                                    inbound
                                                                                                                   deliveries       *
                                                                                                                  * Improvements
  Customer business challenges                                            Business value
     Improvement of warehouse productivity: monitor the                     Simplifies and accelerates goods receipt processing based
      movement of goods, coordinating workflows with other                    on inbound deliveries by providing a configurable POWER
      areas of the supply chain and sharing warehouse                         list for warehouse operators in charge of receiving goods
      operations information                                                  and posting goods receipts.
Sales and Service > Sales Order Management > SME Simplification


  Feature: Extended billing documents

Delivered by Business Function OPS_SME_SIMP_01
      Support the processing status of the billing document and payment information




Sales Representative




                                                                                     Create
           Find and check                                   Track                                                  Monitor
          billing / complaint
                                        *              processing state
                                                                                   subsequent
                                                                                    document
                                                                                                                payment status
                                                                                                                                     *
                                                                                                                   * Improvements
  Customer business challenges                                            Business value
      Limited access to payment information relevant to the                 Easy access to the status of billing documents with payment
       billing process and follow-up complaints                               information
Index




  Introduction and Overview                          6. Procurement and Logistics Execution
  1. Analytics                                              6.1 Procurement
                                                            6.2 Inbound and Outbound Logistics
          1.1 Financial Analytics
                                                            6.3 Inventory and Warehouse Management
          1.2 Strategic Enterprise Management
  2. Financials                                      7. Product Development and Manufacturing
          2.1    Financial Supply Chain Management          7.1   Life-cycle Data Management
                                                            7.2   Manufacturing Execution
          2.2    Corporate Governance
                                                            7.3   Product Development
          2.3    Financial Accounting
                                                            7.4   Production Planning
          2.4    Treasury
                                                            7.5   General
  3. Human Capital Management
          3.1 Talent Management
                                                     8. Sales and Service
                                                            8.1 General
          3.2 Workforce Process Management
          3.4 General                                       8.2 Sales Order Management
                                                     9. Cross SAP ERP
  4. End-user Service Delivery
  5. Corporate Services
          5.1    Enterprise Asset Management
          5.2    Project and Portfolio Management
          5.3    Quality Management
          5.4    Real Estate Management
          5.5    Travel Management
Cross SAP ERP


 Cross SAP ERP
 Business Functions

Description                                                                                        Target Customers

   Embedded Search in SAP ERP:                                                                       SAP ERP customers who are looking for an improved
    Embedded Search is now available for key business objects in SAP ERP to support                    search experience and want to take advantage of a
    embedded search scenarios and provide fast, simple, and generic search access to                   simple search featuring secure full-text search capabilities
    business information.                                                                              and fuzzy search options
    It is the first step toward a planned simple search experience across SAP Business
    Suite.

   Enhanced Initial Data Transfer:                                                                   Because this enhancement is in the core interface area,
       1. Parallelized data transfer of PDS via core interface (CIF): PDS transfer to SAP SCM         the new functionality will affect every customer who uses
        during initial load.                                                                           SAP ERP and SAP SCM in their business processes. Of
       2. Incremental data transfer via CIF: new integration model-handling method. CIF objects       particular importance is the improvement for customers
        in the integration model without errors during the initial load are active; others are         who integrate product data structures (PDS) in addition to
        excluded.                                                                                      their material master data, because both sets of master
                                                                                                       data are affected here.

   ERP, New User Interface for ABAP Lists:                                                           Customers who want to unify the user experience of
    New user interface (mostly ALV) for about 200 write lists provides increased                       existing write lists
    usability and harmonized end-user interaction.

   ERP, PDF-based forms:                                                                             Customers who want to create or simply use compelling
    Large number of new PDF forms                                                                      forms with little effort
     PDF forms allow standard output on printers and on screen, an option for archiving
      documents, and sending a document via e-mail
     All common business cases for printing forms can now be covered with PDF forms
      (restrictions may apply to some country versions)
Cross SAP ERP > Cross SAP ERP


 Embedded Search in SAP ERP


Secure Free-Text Search Capability for Key Operational Business Data
 Benefits                                                                             ERP_ENTERPRISESEARCH
    Fast, simple, and secure search-driven information access
    Reduce customer TCO by providing easy-to-use search functionality that applies to professional and casual users



                                                                                                                        Target Users for this Business
 New Features                   Description
                                                                                                                        Function

 Search-enablement of              Makes key business objects (mainly SAP ERP Operations) available for Embedded          Professional and occasional
 key business objects in            Search. Examples include material, customer, vendor, sales order, purchase order,       users
 SAP ERP Operations                 quality notifications, document info record, and so on.
Cross SAP ERP > Cross SAP ERP > Embedded Search in SAP ERP


 Feature: Search-enablement of key business
 objects in SAP ERP Operations
Delivered by Business Function ERP_ENTERPRISESEARCH
     Makes key business objects (mainly SAP ERP Operations) available for Embedded Search. Examples
      include material, customer, vendor, sales order, purchase order, quality notifications, document info record,
      and so on.




 Customer business challenges                                Business value
     Great amount of time spent retrieving structured and       Fast, simple, search-driven information access
      unstructured business information                          Secure, generic search access to business information
Cross SAP ERP > Cross SAP ERP


 Enhanced Initial Data Transfer

Better Performance for Product Data Structures (PDS) Transfers from SAP ERP to SAP SCM -
More Sophisticated Handling and Better Usability
 Benefits                                                                                CA_CIF_INILOAD_01
  PDS transfer via the CIF interface has better performance due to parallelization of data block processing. The incremental load of material master data
   via the CIF interface enables users to load data from SAP ERP to SAP SCM even if the selected data set contains erroneous objects. The correct sets
   will be transferred, while the failed ones will be reported and can be reloaded after correcting the errors. This approach enables faster startup of
   processes that
  cross SAP ERP and SAP SCM and narrows error-detection activities to a smaller number of objects.



                                                                                                                           Target Users for this Business
 New Features                   Description
                                                                                                                           Function

 Incremental load of               The enhancement enables users to load material master data from SAP ERP into              Master data administrators
 material master data               SAP SCM in increments. In case of an error, the CIF reports the error but                 Users using SAP SCM in
                                    continues loading the master data that is error-free. That is called a partial load.       connection with SAP ERP
                                    After completion, the user can check the results and correct the erroneous data.
                                    After correction, the user had to load only the remaining master data increment,
                                    which saves time and capacity.



 Improvements of                                                                                                           Target Users for this Business
                                Description
 existing features                                                                                                         Function

 Parallel load of PDS              PDS objects can now be loaded via CIF from SAP ERP into SAP SCM in parallel               Users handling PDSs
 objects                            mode. This feature enhances performance when a high number of PDS are
                                    selected for transfer. The number of objects per thread and number of parallel
                                    threads is customizable in the CIF. Now this feature is enabled for PDS objects.
Cross SAP ERP > Cross SAP ERP > Enhanced Initial Data Transfer


 Feature: Incremental load of material master
 data
Delivered by Business Function CA_CIF_INILOAD_01
     The enhancement enables users to load material master data from SAP ERP into SAP SCM in
      increments. In case of an error, the CIF reports the error but continues loading the master data that is
      error-free. That is called a partial load. After completion, the user can check the results and correct the
      erroneous data. After correction, the user had to load only the remaining master data increment, which
      saves time and capacity.


Planner
                                                                                         Production Planning (Discrete
                                                                                         Manufacturing) MTO in ERP
                                                                                                                               Performing
            Create material                         Initial transfer of master              In case of errors
                                                                                                                                planning
            master data and
             PDS-s in ERP
                                                     data into SCM via CIF
                                                       Integration models
                                                                                 *          post-processing
                                                                                            of failed objects   *           activities on the
                                                                                                                            transferred data
                                                                                                                               * Improvements
 Customer business challenges                                                        Business value
     Performance of master data load into SAP SCM                                      Speeds up data integration between SAP ERP and SAP
     In case of erroneous master data objects, it is a tedious to                       SCM
      find the errors among a large number of objects                                   Enables easier detection and correction of faulty master
                                                                                         data
Cross SAP ERP > Cross SAP ERP


 ERP, New User Interface for ABAP Lists


Harmonize and Standardize User Interaction with Lists
 Benefits                                                                                 ERP_ALL_LISTS
    About 200 previously delivered write lists are replaced by lists (mostly ALV) that provide increased usability and harmonized end-user interaction.
    The new lists improve the end-user experience and help reduce training effort.



                                                                                                                              Target Users for this Business
 New Features                   Description
                                                                                                                              Function

 Flexibility to continue           The functionality is offered to decide (mostly on a report level) whether the new            End users who are very
 usage of selected write            user interface or one of the previously delivered write lists will be used. By default,       familiar with existing write
 lists instead of new lists         the new user interface is being used after switching on the business function, but            lists and their individual
                                    the customer can select to use the user interface of the previously delivered write           features
                                    list instead.


 Improvements of                                                                                                              Target Users for this Business
                                Description
 existing features                                                                                                            Function

 New user interface for            Several of the previously delivered write lists provide highly individual graphical          Customers who want to
 existing write lists               display and interaction capabilities. With the new user interface, these capabilities         unify the user experience of
                                    are harmonized and unified.                                                                   existing write lists
Cross SAP ERP > Cross SAP ERP > ERP, New User Interface for ABAP Lists


 Feature: Flexibility to continue usage of
 selected write lists instead of new lists
Delivered by Business Function ERP_ALL_LISTS
     The functionality is offered to decide (mostly on a report level) whether the new user interface or one of the
      previously delivered write lists will be used. By default, the new user interface is being used after switching
      on the business function, but the customer can select to use the user interface of the previously delivered
      write list instead.




 Customer business challenges                                            Business value
     The end users may be very familiar with certain write lists           Customers can decide on the report level whether they want
      that are already being used and don't want to adopt a new              to use the new user interface
      user interface.
     The unification of different specialized user interfaces
      sometimes requires to relinquish one or another individual
      feature, but customers may prefer in some cases to stick
      to such a feature by accepting different user interfaces.
Cross SAP ERP > Cross SAP ERP


 ERP, PDF-based forms


Cover All Common Business Cases with PDF-Based Forms
 Benefits                                                                               ERP_ALL_PDF_FORMS
    Customers will appreciate the low TCO paired with compelling looks and usability




                                                                                                                     Target Users for this Business
 New Features                   Description
                                                                                                                     Function

 Large number of new             Large number of new PDF-based forms delivered in addition to the existing forms       Customers who want to
 PDF print forms                 PDF-based forms allow standard output on printers and on screeen in the de facto       create or use compelling
 delivered in addition to         standard PDF format, the option of archiving documents, and sending a PDF              forms with little effort
 the existing forms               document via e-mail
                                 All common business cases for printing forms can now be covered with PDF-
                                  based forms (restrictions may apply to some country versions).
Cross SAP ERP > Cross SAP ERP > ERP, PDF-based forms


 Feature: Large number of new PDF print forms
 delivered in addition to the existing forms
Delivered by Business Function ERP_ALL_PDF_FORMS
  Large number of new PDF-based forms delivered in addition to the existing forms
  PDF-based forms allow standard output on printers and on screeen in the de facto standard PDF format, the option of
   archiving documents, and sending a PDF document via e-mail
  All common business cases for printing forms can now be covered with PDF-based forms (restrictions may apply to some
   country versions).




 Customer business challenges                                        Business value
     Significant effort to create and maintain forms in SAP            Customers will appreciate the low TCO paired with
      software                                                           compelling appearance and usability.
     The need to design individual, pixel-perfect forms for print       Easy creation and maintenance of PDF-based forms using
      and screen output                                                  Adobe Lifecycle Designer compared to remarkably greater
                                                                         effort when working with SAPScript or SmartForms.
                                                                        Professional look of customer facing documents crated in
                                                                         SAP System.
                                                                        Possibility to include digital signatures (if respective
                                                                         application supports them)
Copyright 2008 SAP AG
All Rights Reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG. The information contained herein may be changed
without prior notice.
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors.
SAP, R/3, xApps, xApp, SAP NetWeaver, Duet, SAP Business ByDesign, ByDesign, PartnerEdge and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are
trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and in several other countries all over the world.
Business Objects and the Business Objects logo, BusinessObjects, Crystal Reports, Crystal Decisions, Web Intelligence, Xcelsius and other Business Objects products and services mentioned
herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Business Objects S.A. in the United States and in several other countries. Business Objects is an SAP
Company. All other product and service names mentioned and associated logos displayed are the trademarks of their respective companies. Data contained in this document serves
informational purposes only. National product specifications may vary.
The information in this document is proprietary to SAP. No part of this document may be reproduced, copied, or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express prior written
permission of SAP AG. This document is a preliminary version and not subject to your license agreement or any other agreement with SAP. This document contains only intended strategies,
developments, and functionalities of the SAP® product and is not intended to be binding upon SAP to any particular course of business, product strategy, and/or development. Please note that
this document is subject to change and may be changed by SAP at any time without notice. SAP assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions in this document. SAP does not warrant the
accuracy or completeness of the information, text, graphics, links, or other items contained within this material. This document is provided without a warranty of any kind, either express or
implied, including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose, or non-infringement.
SAP shall have no liability for damages of any kind including without limitation direct, special, indirect, or consequential damages that may result from the use of these materials. This limitation
shall not apply in cases of intent or gross negligence.
The statutory liability for personal injury and defective products is not affected. SAP has no control over the information that you may access through the use of hot links contained in these
materials and does not endorse your use of third-party Web pages nor provide any warranty whatsoever relating to third-party Web pages.


Weitergabe und Vervielfältigung dieser Publikation oder von Teilen daraus sind, zu welchem Zweck und in welcher Form auch immer, ohne die ausdrückliche schriftliche Genehmigung durch
SAP AG nicht gestattet. In dieser Publikation enthaltene Informationen können ohne vorherige Ankündigung geändert werden.
Einige von der SAP AG und deren Vertriebspartnern vertriebene Softwareprodukte können Softwarekomponenten umfassen, die Eigentum anderer Softwarehersteller sind.
SAP, R/3, xApps, xApp, SAP NetWeaver, Duet, SAP Business ByDesign, ByDesign, PartnerEdge und andere in diesem Dokument erwähnte SAP-Produkte und Services sowie die
dazugehörigen Logos sind Marken oder eingetragene Marken der SAP AG in Deutschland und in mehreren anderen Ländern weltweit. Business Objects und das Business-Objects-Logo,
BusinessObjects, Crystal Reports, Crystal Decisions, Web Intelligence, Xcelsius und andere im Text erwähnte Business-Objects-Produkte und -Dienstleistungen sowie die entsprechenden
Logos sind Marken oder eingetragene Marken der Business Objects S. A. in den USA und anderen Ländern weltweit. Business Objects ist ein Unternehmen der SAP. Alle anderen in diesem
Dokument erwähnten Namen von Produkten und Services sowie die damit verbundenen Firmenlogos sind Marken der jeweiligen Unternehmen. Die Angaben im Text sind unverbindlich und
dienen lediglich zu Informationszwecken. Produkte können länderspezifische Unterschiede aufweisen.
Die in dieser Publikation enthaltene Information ist Eigentum der SAP. Weitergabe und Vervielfältigung dieser Publikation oder von Teilen daraus sind, zu welchem Zweck und in welcher Form
auch immer, nur mit ausdrücklicher schriftlicher Genehmigung durch SAP AG gestattet. Bei dieser Publikation handelt es sich um eine vorläufige Version, die nicht Ihrem gültigen Lizenzvertrag
oder anderen Vereinbarungen mit SAP unterliegt. Diese Publikation enthält nur vorgesehene Strategien, Entwicklungen und Funktionen des SAP®-Produkts. SAP entsteht aus dieser
Publikation keine Verpflichtung zu einer bestimmten Geschäfts- oder Produktstrategie und/oder bestimmten Entwicklungen. Diese Publikation kann von SAP jederzeit ohne vorherige
Ankündigung geändert werden.
SAP übernimmt keine Haftung für Fehler oder Auslassungen in dieser Publikation. Des Weiteren übernimmt SAP keine Garantie für die Exaktheit oder Vollständigkeit der Informationen, Texte,
Grafiken, Links und sonstigen in dieser Publikation enthaltenen Elementen. Diese Publikation wird ohne jegliche Gewähr, weder ausdrücklich noch stillschweigend, bereitgestellt. Dies gilt u. a.,
aber nicht ausschließlich, hinsichtlich der Gewährleistung der Marktgängigkeit und der Eignung für einen bestimmten Zweck sowie für die Gewährleistung der Nichtverletzung geltenden Rechts.
SAP haftet nicht für entstandene Schäden. Dies gilt u. a. und uneingeschränkt für konkrete, besondere und mittelbare Schäden oder Folgeschäden, die aus der Nutzung dieser Materialien
entstehen können. Diese Einschränkung gilt nicht bei Vorsatz oder grober Fahrlässigkeit.
Die gesetzliche Haftung bei Personenschäden oder Produkthaftung bleibt unberührt. Die Informationen, auf die Sie möglicherweise über die in diesem Material enthaltenen Hotlinks zugreifen,
unterliegen nicht dem Einfluss von SAP, und SAP unterstützt nicht die Nutzung von Internetseiten Dritter durch Sie und gibt keinerlei Gewährleistungen oder Zusagen über Internetseiten
Dritter ab.
Alle Rechte vorbehalten.

				
DOCUMENT INFO
Shared By:
Categories:
Tags:
Stats:
views:279
posted:3/23/2012
language:English
pages:388